2009 Saturn OUTLOOK Owner Manual M

Seats and Restraint Universal Home Remote All-Wheel Drive ...... 5-35 System ...... 1-1 System ...... 2-45 Headlamp Aiming ...... 5-35 Head Restraints ...... 1-2 Storage Areas ...... 2-50 Bulb Replacement ...... 5-35 Front Seats ...... 1-3 Sunroof ...... 2-54 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Rear Seats ...... 1-9 ...... 3-1 ...... 5-38 Safety Belts Instrument Panel Tires ...... 5-39 ...... 1-14 Instrument Panel Child Restraints ...... 1-28 Overview ...... 3-4 Appearance Care ...... 5-84 Airbag System ...... 1-47 Climate Controls ...... 3-19 Vehicle Identiﬁcation ...... 5-91 Restraint System Warning Lights, Gages, Electrical System ...... 5-91 Check ...... 1-61 and Indicators ...... 3-30 Capacities and Speciﬁcations ...... 5-98 Features and Controls ...... 2-1 Driver Information Keys ...... 2-2 Center (DIC) ...... 3-44 Maintenance Schedule ...... 6-1 Doors and Locks ...... 2-8 Audio System(s) ...... 3-74 Maintenance Schedule ..... 6-1 Windows ...... 2-14 Driving Your Vehicle ...... 4-1 Customer Assistance Theft-Deterrent Your Driving, the Road, ...... 7-1 Systems ...... 2-16 Information and the Vehicle ...... 4-1 Customer Assistance and Starting and Operating Towing ...... 4-22 Information ...... 7-1 Your Vehicle ...... 2-20 Service and Reporting Safety Mirrors ...... 2-31 Defects ...... 7-14 Object Detection Appearance Care ...... 5-1 Service ...... 5-3 Vehicle Data Recording Systems ...... 2-34 and Privacy ...... 7-16 OnStar® System ...... 2-42 Fuel ...... 5-5 Checking Things Under Index ...... i-1 the Hood ...... 5-10 ii Preface

Read this manual from beginning to Propriétaires Canadiens end to learn about the vehicle’s On peut obtenir un exemplaire de features and controls. Pictures, ce guide en français auprès de symbols, and words work together concessionnaire ou à l’adresse to explain vehicle operation. suivante: Keep this manual in the vehicle for Helm, Incorporated quick reference. SATURN, the SATURN Emblem, P.O. Box 07130 and the name OUTLOOK are Detroit, MI 48207 registered trademarks of Saturn Canadian Owners 1-800-551-4123 Corporation. GENERAL MOTORS A French language copy of this www.helminc.com and GM are registered trademarks manual can be obtained from your of General Motors Corporation. dealer/retailer or from: Index This manual includes the latest Helm, Incorporated To quickly locate information about information at the time it was P.O. Box 07130 the vehicle, use the index in the printed. Saturn reserves the right to Detroit, MI 48207 back of the manual. It is an make changes after that time 1-800-551-4123 alphabetical list of what is in the without further notice. www.helminc.com manual and the page number where This manual describes features that it can be found. may or may not be on your speciﬁc vehicle.

Safety Warnings and Vehicle Symbols { CAUTION Symbols The vehicle has components and These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead that could hurt you or other people. of text. Symbols are shown along with the text describing the operation Cautions tell what the hazard is and or information relating to a speciﬁc what to do to avoid or reduce the component, control, message, hazard. Read these cautions. gage, or indicator. A circle with a slash through it is a A notice tells about something that M : This symbol is shown when safety symbol which means “Do can damage the vehicle. you need to see your owner manual Not,” “Do not do this” or “Do not let for additional instructions or Notice: These mean there is this happen.” information. something that could damage A box with the word CAUTION is your vehicle. * : This symbol is shown when used to tell about things that Many times, this damage would not you need to see a service manual could hurt you or others if you were be covered by the vehicle’s for additional instructions or to ignore the warning. warranty, and it could be costly. The information. notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage. There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use the same words, CAUTION or Notice. iv Preface

Vehicle Symbol Chart I : Cruise Control : : Oil Pressure Here are some additional symbols B g that may be found on the vehicle : Engine Coolant Temperature : Outside Power Foldaway and what they mean. For more Mirrors O : Exterior Lamps information on the symbol, refer to } the index. : Power # : Fog Lamps / 9 : Airbag Readiness Light : Remote Vehicle Start . : Fuel Gage > # : Air Conditioning : Safety Belt Reminders + : Fuses ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam _ g : Audio Steering Wheel Changer : Tow/Haul Mode Controls or OnStar® j : LATCH System Child Restraints F : Traction Control $ : Brake System Warning Light * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp M : Windshield Washer Fluid " : Charging System Seats and Restraint System 1-1

Safety Belts Airbag System Seats and Safety Belts: They Are for Airbag System ...... 1-47 Everyone ...... 1-14 Where Are the Airbags? ...... 1-49 Restraint System How to Wear Safety Belts When Should an Airbag Properly ...... 1-18 Inflate? ...... 1-51 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 1-23 What Makes an Airbag Safety Belt Use During Inflate? ...... 1-52 Pregnancy ...... 1-28 How Does an Airbag Head Restraints ...... 1-28 ...... 1-53 ...... 1-2 Safety Belt Extender Restrain? Head Restraints What Will You See After Child Restraints an Airbag Inflates? ...... 1-53 Front Seats Older Children ...... 1-28 Manual Seats ...... 1-3 Passenger Sensing Infants and Young Children ....1-30 System ...... 1-55 Seat Height Adjuster ...... 1-3 ...... 1-33 ...... 1-4 Child Restraint Systems Servicing Your Power Seats Where to Put the Restraint .....1-35 Manual Lumbar ...... 1-4 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .....1-60 Lower Anchors and Tethers Adding Equipment to Your Power Lumbar ...... 1-5 ...... 1-37 ...... 1-5 for Children (LATCH) Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .....1-60 Heated Seats Securing a Child Restraint Memory Seat and Mirrors ...... 1-6 ...... 1-43 ...... 1-8 in a Rear Seat Position Restraint System Check Reclining Seatbacks Securing a Child Restraint Checking the Restraint Rear Seats in the Right Front Seat Systems ...... 1-61 Rear Seat Operation ...... 1-9 Position ...... 1-45 Replacing Restraint System Third Row Seats ...... 1-12 Parts After a Crash ...... 1-62 1-2 Seats and Restraint System

Head Restraints The vehicle’s front seats have adjustable head restraints in all outboard seating positions.

{ CAUTION

With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do not drive Adjust the head restraint so that the Pull the head restraint up to raise it. until the head restraints for all top of the restraint is at the same To lower the head restraint, press occupants are installed and height as the top of the occupant’s the release button, located on adjusted properly. head. This position reduces the the head restraint post on the top of chance of a neck injury in a crash. the seatback, while you push the head restraint down. Push down on the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place. Seats and Restraint System 1-3

Front Seats Lift the bar to unlock the seat. Slide the seat to where you want it and release the bar. Try to move Manual Seats the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place. { CAUTION Seat Height Adjuster You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a If the vehicle has a manual driver manual driver’s seat while the seat height adjuster, it is located on vehicle is moving. The sudden the outboard side of the seat. See Manual Seats on page 1-3 for more movement could startle and information. To raise the seat, move confuse you, or make you push a the lever upward repeatedly until the pedal when you do not want to. A. Manual Seat Adjustment Bar B. Driver Seat Height Adjuster. See seat is at the desired height. To lower Adjust the driver’s seat only when the seat, move the lever downward the vehicle is not moving. Seat Height Adjuster on page 1-3. repeatedly until the seat is at the desired height. C. Manual Reclining Seatback Lever. See Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-8.

If the vehicle has a manual bucket seat you can adjust the seat forward or rearward with the bar located under the front of the seat cushion. 1-4 Seats and Restraint System

Power Seats Move the seat forward or rearward Manual Lumbar by sliding the power seat adjustment control (A) forward or rearward. The vehicle may have additional features to adjust the power seat: • Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the power seat adjustment control (A) up or down. • Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the control up or down. • Raise or lower the rear part of the Driver Seat with Power Seat seat cushion by moving the rear If the vehicle has this feature, the Control, Power Recline, and of the control up or down. handle is located on the inboard side Power Lumbar shown of the seatback. See Manual The vehicle may have a memory A. Power Seat Adjustment Control Seats on page 1-3 for more function which allows seat settings information. B. Reclining Seatbacks on to be saved and recalled. See page 1-8. Memory Seat and Mirrors on Turn the handle rearward to C. Power Lumbar on page 1-5. page 1-6 for more information. decrease lumbar support. Turn the handle forward to increase lumbar If the vehicle has power seats, the support. controls are located on the The lumbar support may need to be outboard side of the seats. adjusted when changing the seating position. Seats and Restraint System 1-5

Power Lumbar Heated Seats The passenger seat may take longer to heat up. If the seats have power lumbar, the On vehicles with heated front seats, controls used to operate this feature the controls are located on the If the vehicle has remote vehicle are located on the outboard side of center console. To operate start and is started using the remote the seats. See “Power Lumbar” the heated seats the engine must keyless entry transmitter, the front under Power Seats on page 1-4 for be running. heated seats will be turned on to the more information. high setting if it is cold outside. I (Heated Seatback): Press to See “Remote Vehicle Start” under To increase or decrease lumbar turn on the heated seatback. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) support, press and hold the front or System Operation on page 2-4. rear of the control (C). J (Heated Seat and Seatback): When the ignition is turned on, the Release the control when the Press to turn on or off the heated seat feature will turn off. seatback reaches the desired level heated seat and seatback. To turn the heated seat feature back on, press the desired button. of lumbar support. The light on the button will come on The lumbar support may need to be to indicate that the feature is on. adjusted when changing the Each time the button is pressed, the seating position. temperature settings change from high, to medium, to low, to off. Indicator lights above the button will show the level of heat selected: three for high, two for medium, and one for low. 1-6 Seats and Restraint System

Memory Seat and Mirrors To save positions in memory: To recall the memory positions, the 1. Adjust the driver seat, including vehicle must be in P (Park). Press the seatback recliner and both and release either button 1 or outside mirrors to a comfortable button 2 corresponding to the position. desired driving position. The seat and outside mirrors will move to the See Outside Power Mirrors on position previously stored. You will page 2-32 for more information. hear a single beep. Not all mirrors will have the Using the RKE transmitter to enter ability to save and recall the vehicle, with the remote recall the mirror positions. memory feature on, causes 2. Press and hold button 1 until two automatic seat and mirror beeps let you know that the adjustment. There is no adjustment position has been stored. when the position has not been On vehicles with the memory A second seating and mirror changed by another seating position package, the controls for this feature position can be programmed by or the easy exit feature. See are located on the driver door repeating the above steps and “MEMORY SEAT RECALL” under panel. The controls are used to pressing button 2. DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC program and recall memory settings Buttons) on page 3-65 for more for the driver seat and outside information. mirrors. Seats and Restraint System 1-7

To stop recall movement of the Easy Exit Seat Further programming for the memory feature at any time, press memory seat feature can be done The control for this feature is one of the power seat controls, using the DIC. You can select located on the driver door panel memory buttons, or power mirror or cancel the following: between buttons 1 and 2. buttons. • The automatic easy exit seat With the vehicle in P (Park), the exit If something has blocked the driver feature. position can be recalled by pressing seat while recalling a memory the exit button. You will hear a single • The remote memory seat recall position, the driver seat recall may beep. The driver seat will move back. feature. stop working. If this happens, press the appropriate control for the area If the easy exit seat feature is on in For programming information, see that is not recalling for two seconds, the Driver Information Center (DIC), DIC Vehicle Customization (With after the obstruction is removed. automatic seat movement will occur DIC Buttons) on page 3-65. Then try recalling the memory when the key is removed from the position again by pressing the ignition. See “EASY EXIT SEAT” appropriate memory button. If the under DIC Vehicle Customization memory position is still not being (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-65 for recalled, see your dealer/retailer for more information. service. 1-8 Seats and Restraint System

Reclining Seatbacks In vehicles with seats that have Power Reclining Seatbacks manual reclining seatbacks, the lever In vehicles with seats that have Manual Reclining Seatbacks used to operate them is located on power reclining seatbacks, the outboard side of the seat. the control used to recline them is { CAUTION To recline the seatback, do the located on the outboard side of following: the seat behind the power You can lose control of the 1. Lift the recline lever. seat control. See Power Seats on vehicle if you try to adjust a page 1-4 for more information. manual driver’s seat while the 2. Move the seatback to the desired • To recline the seatback, tilt the vehicle is moving. The sudden position, then release the lever to top of the control rearward. movement could startle lock the seatback in place. andconfuse you, or make you 3. Push and pull on the seatback to • To bring the seatback forward, tilt push a pedal when you do not make sure it is locked. the top of the control forward. want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle is not To return the seatback to an upright position, do the following: moving. 1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the { CAUTION seatback and the seatback will return to the upright position. If either seatback is not locked, it 2. Push and pull on the seatback to could move forward in a sudden make sure it is locked. stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked. Seats and Restraint System 1-9

{ CAUTION Rear Seats

Sitting in a reclined position when Rear Seat Operation the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the safety belts cannot do their job when reclined like this. The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or other Do not have a seatback reclined if injuries. your vehicle is moving. The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash, the belt could go up over your abdomen. The A. Seat Adjustment Handle belt forces would be there, not at B. Reclining Seatback Strap your pelvic bones. This could C. Sliding Seat Lever cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear the safety belt properly. 1-10 Seats and Restraint System

Entering and Exiting the 3. Place folding armrests in the Third Row upright position. 4. Ensure that the safety belt is { CAUTION unfastened and in the stowed position. Using the third row seating 5. Pull the sliding seat lever (C) position while the second row is forward and move the seatback folded, or folded and tumbled, forward. The seat cushion could cause injury in a sudden will fold, and the entire seat will stop or crash. Be sure to return slide forward. the seat to the passenger seating position. Push and pull on the Returning the Seat to the seat to make sure it is locked into To access the third row: Seating Position place. 1. Remove objects on the floor in To return the second row seat to its front of or on the second row normal seating position: Notice: Folding a rear seat with seat, or in the seat tracks on 1. Remove objects on the floor the safety belts still fastened may the floor. behind the second row seat cause damage to the seat or the or in the seat tracks on the floor. safety belts. Always unbuckle the 2. Move the front center console safety belts and return them to armrest completely forward. 2. Pull the seatback rearward until it their normal stowed position See Center Console Storage on is locked in place. before folding a rear seat. page 2-50. Seats and Restraint System 1-11

3. Slide the seat rearward by Folding the Rear Seat Adjusting the Seats pushing on the seatback until To fold the second row seats: To adjust the second row seats, pull it is locked into place. 1. Remove anything on or under outward on the seat adjustment 4. Push down on the rear of the the seat. handle (A). Slide the seat forward or seat cushion until it is locked rearward to the desired position. in place. 2. Place the armrest in the upright Release the handle and push position, and unfasten the 5. Push and pull on the seatback and pull on the seat to make sure it safety belt. and seat cushion to make sure is locked. they are locked in place. 3. Pull forward on the reclining seatback strap (B) and push 6. Check that the safety belt is not down on the seatback. under the seat cushion. If the headrest touches the front Reclining the Seatbacks seat, slide the second row To recline the seatback: seat rearward. 1. Leaning forward in the seat, pull To return the seatback to the the reclining seatback strap (B). seating position, lift the upper corner of the seatback and push it 2. Move the seatback to the desired rearward until it locks into place. position, then release the strap Push and pull on the seatback to lock the seatback in place. to make sure it is locked. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. 1-12 Seats and Restraint System

Third Row Seats To fold the seatback: 1. Remove anything on or under { CAUTION the seat.

Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded, or pushed forward in the entry position, could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place. 3. Pull up on the release lever located on the back of the The third row seats can be folded seat. The headrest moves forward or removed. forward automatically. 2. Disconnect the rear safety belt 4. Push the seatback forward Notice: Folding a rear seat with mini-latch, using a key in the to lay ﬂat. the safety belts still fastened may slot on the mini-buckle, let cause damage to the seat or the the belt retract into the headliner. safety belts. Always unbuckle the Stow the mini-latch in the safety belts and return them to holder located in the headliner. their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat. Seats and Restraint System 1-13

To return the seatback to the Removing the Third Row seating position: { CAUTION Seats 1. Raise the seatback into place by A safety belt that is improperly 1. Remove the cargo management using the pullstrap from the rear routed, not properly attached, or system, if it is in the vehicle. See of the vehicle, or by pushing twisted will not provide the Cargo Management System it into place from inside the protection needed in a crash. The on page 2-53. vehicle. person wearing the belt could be 2. Remove anything on or under 2. The headrest must be locked seriously injured. After raising the the seat. into place before sitting in rear seatback, always check to be the seat. Notice: Folding a rear seat with sure that the safety belts are the safety belts still fastened may properly routed and attached, and cause damage to the seat or the { CAUTION are not twisted. safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to If either seatback is not locked, it 4. Reconnect the center safety belt their normal stowed position could move forward in a sudden mini-latch to the mini-buckle. Do before folding a rear seat. stop or crash. That could cause not let it twist. injury to the person sitting there. 3. Fold the seatback down. See 5. Pull on the safety belt to be sure “Folding the Seatback” earlier Always push and pull on the the mini-latch is secure. in this section. seatbacks to be sure they are locked. 4. Remove the rear bolts located on the ﬂoor on each side of the seat. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked in place. 1-14 Seats and Restraint System

5. Remove the seat by tilting it 2. Place the seat on the vehicle Safety Belts slightly upward, and then pulling it floor so that the front seat out of the rear of the vehicle in hooks are on the vehicle bars. one motion. Safety Belts: They Are 3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to for Everyone 6. Replace the bolts in the floor 55 Y (41 lb ft). Pull up on the holes for storage. seat to make sure it is locked This section of the manual describes in place. how to use safety belts properly. Installing the Third Row Seats It also describes some things not to 4. Raise the seatback to its upright do with safety belts. 1. Before installing the seat the position. Push and pull on the seatback must be folded seatback to make sure it is forward. See “Folding the locked into place. { CAUTION Seatback” earlier in this section. 5. Push the headrest up into Do not let anyone ride where a The seats must be placed in position. Push and pull on safety belt cannot be worn the proper locations to attach the headrest to make sure it is correctly. The wider seat must be locked into place. properly. In a crash, if you or your installed on the driver side and passenger(s) are not wearing the narrower seat on the 6. Reconnect the center safety belt safety belts, the injuries can be passenger side. Remove the mini-latch to the mini-buckle. Do much worse. You can hit things bolts from the holes in the floor not let it twist. inside the vehicle harder or be before installing the seats. ejected from the vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s) are restrained properly too. Seats and Restraint System 1-15

In most states and in all Canadian Why Safety Belts Work { CAUTION provinces, the law requires When you ride in or on anything, wearing safety belts. Here is why: It is extremely dangerous to ride you go as fast as it goes. in a cargo area, inside or outside You never know if you will be of a vehicle. In a collision, people in a crash. If you do have a crash, riding in these areas are more you do not know if it will be a serious one. likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride A few crashes are mild, and some in any area of your vehicle that is crashes can be so serious that even not equipped with seats and buckled up, a person would not safety belts. Be sure everyone in survive. But most crashes are your vehicle is in a seat and using in between. In many of them, people a safety belt properly. who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without safety belts they could have been This vehicle has indicators as a badly hurt or killed. reminder to buckle the safety belts. Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose See Safety Belt Reminders on After more than 40 years of safety it is just a seat on wheels. page 3-32 for additional information. belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter... a lot! 1-16 Seats and Restraint System

Put someone on it. The person keeps going until or the instrument panel... stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider does not stop. Seats and Restraint System 1-17

Questions and Answers About most protection. That is true not Safety Belts only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle collisions. after a crash if I am wearing a safety belt? Q: If I am a good driver, and I A: You could be — whether you are never drive far from home, wearing a safety belt or not. But why should I wear safety belts? your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, A: You may be an excellent driver, so you can unbuckle and get out, but if you are in a crash — even is much greater if you are one that is not your fault — you belted. And you can unbuckle a and your passenger(s) can be or the safety belts! safety belt, even if you are hurt. Being a good driver does not With safety belts, you slow down as upside down. protect you from things beyond the vehicle does. You get more your control, such as bad drivers. time to stop. You stop over more Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why distance, and your strongest bones should I have to wear safety Most accidents occur within take the forces. That is why belts? 25 miles (40 km) of home. And safety belts make such good sense. the greatest number of serious A: Airbags are supplemental injuries and deaths occur at systems only; so they work with speeds of less than 40 mph safety belts — not instead of (65 km/h). them. Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants Safety belts are for everyone. still have to buckle up to get the 1-18 Seats and Restraint System

How to Wear Safety Belts First, before you or your this applies force to the strong passenger(s) wear a safety belt, pelvic bones and you would be less Properly there is important information likely to slide under the lap belt. This section is only for people of you should know. If you slid under it, the belt would adult size. apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even Be aware that there are special fatal injuries. The shoulder belt things to know about safety should go over the shoulder belts and children. And there are and across the chest. These parts different rules for smaller children of the body are best able to take belt and infants. If a child will be riding in restraining forces. the vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-28 or Infants and Young The shoulder belt locks if there is a Children on page 1-30. Follow those sudden stop or crash. rules for everyone’s protection. It is very important for all occupants to buckle up. Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often Sit up straight and always keep your in crashes than those who are feet on the ﬂoor in front of you. wearing safety belts. The lap part of the belt should be Occupants who are not buckled up worn low and snug on the hips, just can be thrown out of the vehicle touching the thighs. In a crash, in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts. Seats and Restraint System 1-19

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this? { CAUTION

You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It A: The lap belt is too loose. It will will not give as much protection not give nearly as much this way. protection this way.

{ CAUTION

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should ﬁt snugly against your body. 1-20 Seats and Restraint System

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this? { CAUTION

You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.

A: The belt is buckled in the wrong A: The belt is over an armrest. buckle. Seats and Restraint System 1-21

Q: What is wrong with this? { CAUTION { CAUTION

You can be seriously injured if You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest you wear the shoulder belt under like this. The belt would be much your arm. In a crash, your body too high. In a crash, you can slide would move too far forward, which under the belt. The belt force would increase the chance of would then be applied on the head and neck injury. Also, the abdomen, not on the pelvic belt would apply too much force bones, and that could cause to the ribs, which are not as serious or fatal injuries. Be sure strong as shoulder bones. You the belt goes under the armrests. could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen. A: The shoulder belt is worn under The shoulder belt should go over the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder and across the the shoulder at all times. chest. 1-22 Seats and Restraint System

Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this? { CAUTION

You can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. You might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal A: The belt is behind the body. injuries. The shoulder belt should A: The belt is twisted across go over the shoulder and across the body. the chest. { CAUTION

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to ﬁx it. Seats and Restraint System 1-23

Lap-Shoulder Belt All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt. If you are using a rear seating position with a detachable safety belt and the safety belt is not attached, see Third Row Seats on page 1-12 for instruction on reconnecting the safety belt to the mini-buckle. The following instructions explain how to wear a lap-shoulder belt 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull 3. Push the latch plate into the properly. the belt across you. Do not let buckle until it clicks. 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is it get twisted. 4. Pull up on the latch plate to adjustable, so you can sit up The lap-shoulder belt may lock if make sure it is secure. If the belt straight. To see how, see “Seats” you pull the belt across you is not long enough, see Safety in the Index. very quickly. If this happens, let Belt Extender on page 1-28. the belt go back slightly to Position the release button on unlock it. Then pull the belt the buckle so that the safety belt across you more slowly. could be quickly unbuckled if If the shoulder portion of a necessary. passenger belt is pulled out all the way, the child restraint locking feature may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt go back all the way and start again. 1-24 Seats and Restraint System

5. If equipped with a shoulder belt Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster height adjuster, move it to the The vehicle has a shoulder belt height that is right for you. height adjuster for the driver See “Shoulder Belt Height and right front passenger seating Adjustment” later in this section positions. for instructions on use and important safety information. Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away from the face and neck, but not falling off of the shoulder. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce To unlatch the belt, push the button the effectiveness of the safety on the buckle. The belt should belt in a crash. return to its stowed position. Slide the latch plate up the safety belt webbing when the safety belt is not in use. The latch plate should rest on the stitching on the 6. To make the lap part tight, pull safety belt, near the guide loop on up on the shoulder belt. the side wall. It may be necessary to pull the Before a door is closed, be sure the stitching on the safety belt safety belt is out of the way. If a through the latch plate to fully door is slammed against a safety tighten the lap belt on smaller belt, damage can occur to both the occupants. safety belt and the vehicle. Seats and Restraint System 1-25

Safety Belt Pretensioners Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners activate in a crash, This vehicle has safety belt they will need to be replaced, pretensioners for the front outboard and probably other new parts for the occupants. Although the safety vehicle’s safety belt system. See belt pretensioners cannot be seen, Replacing Restraint System they are part of the safety belt Parts After a Crash on page 1-62. assembly. They can help tighten the safety belts during the early Rear Safety Belt Comfort stages of a moderate to severe Guides frontal, near frontal, or rear crash if the threshold conditions for Rear shoulder belt comfort guides pretensioner activation are met. may provide added safety belt And, for vehicles with side impact comfort for older children who have To move it down, push down on the airbags, safety belt pretensioners outgrown booster seats and for button (A) and move the height can help tighten the safety belts in a some adults. When installed on a adjuster to the desired position. You side crash or a rollover event. shoulder belt, the comfort guide can move the height adjuster up by positions the shoulder belt away pushing up on the shoulder belt from the neck and head. guide. After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to move it down without pushing the button to make sure it has locked into position. 1-26 Seats and Restraint System

There is a guide for each outboard comfort guide, you will ﬁrst need passenger position in the second row to move the headrest forward seat and all passenger positions in by pulling on the handle behind the third row. Here is how to install a the seatback. The comfort comfort guide to the safety belt: guide will now be accessible.

2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.

Outboard Positions Third Row Center Position 1. For the outboard positions, Pull the comfort guide out of its remove the guide from its storage storage location and then return clip on the interior body. the headrest to its upright For the third row center position, position. locate the comfort guide which The elastic cord on the comfort is located in a storage pocket, at guide is adjustable. You can the top of the seat, under the make it longer or shorter headrest on the driver’s side of by squeezing both ends of the the vehicle. To access the plastic adjuster. Seats and Restraint System 1-27

{ CAUTION

A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. 3. Be sure that the belt is not 4. Buckle, position, and release the twisted and it lies ﬂat. The elastic safety belt as described cord must be under the belt previously in this section. Make and the guide on top. sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder. To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the belt edges together so that the safety belt can be removed from the guide. Slide the guide into its storage location or on its storage clip. 1-28 Seats and Restraint System

Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is Child Restraints to protect the mother. When a Pregnancy safety belt is worn properly, Safety belts work for everyone, it is more likely that the fetus will not Older Children including pregnant women. Like all be hurt in a crash. For pregnant occupants, they are more likely women, as for anyone, the key to to be seriously injured if they do not making safety belts effective is wear safety belts. wearing them properly. Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it. But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender Older children who have outgrown will be long enough for you. To booster seats should wear the help avoid personal injury, do not let vehicle’s safety belts. someone else use it, and use it A pregnant woman should wear a only for the seat it is made to ﬁt. The lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion extender has been designed for should be worn as low as possible, adults. Never use it for securing below the rounding, throughout child seats. To wear it, attach it to the pregnancy. the regular safety belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender. Seats and Restraint System 1-29

The manufacturer’s instructions that • Can proper safety belt fit be According to accident statistics, come with the booster seat, state maintained for the length of children and infants are safer when the weight and height limitations for the trip? If yes, continue. If no, properly restrained in a child that booster. Use a booster seat return to the booster seat. restraint system or infant restraint with a lap-shoulder belt until system secured in a rear seating the child passes the below fit test: Q: What is the proper way to position. wear safety belts? • Sit all the way back on the In a crash, children who are not seat. Do the knees bend at the A: An older child should wear a buckled up can strike other people seat edge? If yes, continue. lap-shoulder belt and get the who are buckled up, or can be If no, return to the booster seat. additional restraint a shoulder thrown out of the vehicle. Older • Buckle the lap-shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder children need to use safety belt. Does the shoulder belt rest belt should not cross the face or belts properly. on the shoulder? If yes, neck. The lap belt should fit continue. If no, try using the rear snugly below the hips, just safety belt comfort guide. See touching the top of the thighs. “Rear Safety Belt Comfort This applies belt force to Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt the child’s pelvic bones in a on page 1-23 for more crash. It should never be worn information. If the shoulder belt over the abdomen, which still does not rest on the shoulder, could cause severe or even fatal then return to the booster seat. internal injuries in a crash. • Does the lap belt fit low and snug Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort on the hips, touching the thighs? Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt If yes, continue. If no, return on page 1-23. to the booster seat. 1-30 Seats and Restraint System

{ CAUTION { CAUTION

Never do this. Never do this. Never allow two children to wear Never allow a child to wear the the same safety belt. The safety safety belt with the shoulder belt belt can not properly spread the behind their back. A child can be impact forces. In a crash, the two seriously injured by not wearing children can be crushed together the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a and seriously injured. A safety crash, the child would not be belt must be used by only one restrained by the shoulder belt. person at a time. The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. The child Infants and Young might also slide under the lap Children belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. Everyone in a vehicle needs That could cause serious or fatal protection! This includes infants and injuries. The shoulder belt should all other children. Neither the go over the shoulder and across distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the the chest. need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle. Seats and Restraint System 1-31

{ CAUTION { CAUTION

Children can be seriously injured Never do this. or strangled if a shoulder belt is Never hold an infant or a child wrapped around their neck and while riding in a vehicle. Due to the safety belt continues to crash forces, an infant or a child tighten. Never leave children will become so heavy it is not unattended in a vehicle and never possible to hold it during a crash. allow children to play with the For example, in a crash at only safety belts. 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant will suddenly become a Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer 240 lb (110 kg) force on a protection for adults and older person’s arms. An infant should children, but not for young children be secured in an appropriate and infants. Neither the vehicle’s restraint. safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have the protection provided by appropriate child restraints. Children who are not restrained properly can strike other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle. 1-32 Seats and Restraint System

For most basic types of child { CAUTION restraints, there are many different models available. When Never do this. purchasing a child restraint, Children who are up against, or be sure it is designed to be used very close to, any airbag when it in a motor vehicle. If it is, the inﬂates can be seriously injured or restraint will have a label saying killed. Never put a rear-facing that it meets federal motor child restraint in the right front vehicle safety standards. The seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint manufacturer’s restraint in a rear seat. It is instructions that come with the alsobetter to secure a restraint state the weight forward-facing child restraint in a and height limitations for a rear seat. If you must secure a Q: What are the different types of add-on child restraints? particular child restraint. In forward-facing child restraint in addition, there are many kinds of the right front seat, always move A: Add-on child restraints, which are restraints available for children the front passenger seat as far purchased by the vehicle’s with special needs. back as it will go. owner, are available in four basic types. Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child’s weight, height, and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used. Seats and Restraint System 1-33

Child Restraint Systems { CAUTION { CAUTION

To reduce the risk of neck and A young child’s hip bones are still head injury during a crash, infants so small that the vehicle’s regular need complete support. This is safety belt may not remain low on because an infant’s neck is not the hip bones, as it should. fully developed and its head Instead, it may settle up around weighs so much compared with the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the rest of its body. In a crash, an the belt would apply force on a infant in a rear-facing child body area that is unprotected by restraint settles into the restraint, any bony structure. This alone so the crash forces can be could cause serious or fatal distributed across the strongest injuries. To reduce the risk of part of an infant’s body, the back serious or fatal injuries during a (A) Rear-Facing Infant Seat and shoulders. Infants should crash, young children should A rear-facing infant seat (A) provides always be secured in rear-facing always be secured in appropriate restraint with the seating surface child restraints. child restraints. against the back of the infant. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint. 1-34 Seats and Restraint System

Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in the Vehicle

{ CAUTION

A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH system, following the (B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats instructions that came with that A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child child restraint and the instructions provides restraint for the child’s body restraint designed to improve the ﬁt in this manual. with the harness. of the vehicle’s safety belt system. A booster seat can also help a child To help reduce the chance of injury, to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by Seats and Restraint System 1-35 the LATCH system. See Lower Keep in mind that an unsecured Where to Put the Anchors and Tethers for Children child restraint can move around in a (LATCH) on page 1-37 for more collision or sudden stop and Restraint information. A child can be injure people in the vehicle. Be sure According to accident statistics, endangered in a crash if the child to properly secure any child children and infants are safer when restraint is not properly secured restraint in the vehicle — even properly restrained in a child in the vehicle. when no child is in it. restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating When securing an add-on child Securing the Child Within the position. restraint, refer to the instructions that Child Restraint come with the restraint which may We recommend that children and be on the restraint itself or in a { child restraints be secured in a rear booklet, or both, and to this manual. CAUTION seat, including: an infant or a child The child restraint instructions are riding in a rear-facing child restraint; important, so if they are not A child can be seriously injured or a child riding in a forward-facing child available, obtain a replacement killed in a crash if the child is not seat; an older child riding in a booster copy from the manufacturer. properly secured in the child seat; and children, who are large restraint. Secure the child properly enough, using safety belts. following the instructions that came with that child restraint. 1-36 Seats and Restraint System

A label on the sun visor says, When securing a child restraint in a “Never put a rear-facing child CAUTION (Continued) rear seating position, study the restraint in the front.” This is instructions that came with the child because the risk to the rear-facing Even if the passenger sensing restraint to make sure it is compatible child is so great, if the airbag system has turned off the right with this vehicle. deploys. front passenger frontal airbag, no Wherever a child restraint is system is fail-safe. No one can installed, be sure to secure the child { CAUTION guarantee that an airbag will not restraint properly. deploy under some unusual A child in a rear-facing child circumstance, even though it is Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can be seriously injured or restraint can move around in a turned off.Secure rear-facing child collision or sudden stop and injure killed if the right front passenger restraints in a rear seat, even if the people in the vehicle. Be sure to airbag inflates. This is because the airbag is off. If you secure a properly secure any child restraint in back of the rear-facing child forward-facing child restraint in the the vehicle — even when no child is restraint would be very close to the right front seat, always move the in it. inflating airbag. A child in a front passenger seat as far back as forward-facing child restraint can it will go. It is better to secure the be seriously injured or killed if the child restraint in a rear seat. right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is See Passenger Sensing System in a forward position. on page 1-55 for additional information. (Continued) Seats and Restraint System 1-37

Lower Anchors and In order to use the LATCH system seating position that will Tethers for Children in your vehicle, you need a child accommodate a child restraint with restraint that has LATCH lower attachments (B). (LATCH) attachments. The child restraint Top Tether Anchor The LATCH system holds a child manufacturer will provide you with restraint during driving or in a crash. instructions on how to use the This system is designed to make child restraint and its attachments. installation of a child restraint easier. The following explains how to attach The LATCH system uses anchors a child restraint with these in the vehicle and attachments attachments in your vehicle. on the child restraint that are made Not all vehicle seating positions or for use with the LATCH system. child restraints have lower anchors Make sure that a LATCH-compatible and attachments or top tether child restraint is properly installed anchors and attachments. using the anchors, or use the Lower Anchors vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint, following the instructions that came with that restraint, A top tether (A, C) anchors the top and also the instructions in this of the child restraint to the manual. When installing a vehicle. A top tether anchor is built child restraint with a top tether, you into the vehicle. The top tether must also use either the lower attachment (B) on the child restraint anchors or the safety belts to connects to the top tether anchor Lower anchors (A) are metal bars properly secure the child restraint. A in the vehicle in order to reduce the built into the vehicle. There are child restraint must never be forward movement and rotation two lower anchors for each LATCH attached using only the top tether of the child restraint during driving and anchor. or in a crash. 1-38 Seats and Restraint System

Your child restraint may have a Lower Anchor and Top Tether single tether (A) or a dual tether (C). Anchor Locations Either will have a single attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the anchor. Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached. Others require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether Second Row — 60/40 Bench be attached. Be sure to read and i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating follow the instructions for your Second Row — Bucket child restraint. positions with top tether anchors. i If the child restraint does not have a (Top Tether Anchor): Seating j (Lower Anchor): Seating positions top tether, one can be obtained, positions with top tether anchors. with two lower anchors. in kit form, for many child restraints. j Ask the child restraint manufacturer (Lower Anchor): Seating positions whether or not a kit is available. with two lower anchors. Seats and Restraint System 1-39

The top tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of the seatback for each seating position in the second row. Open the cover to access the anchors. Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where To assist you in locating the top the child restraint will be placed. tether anchors, the top tether anchor symbol is located on the cover or near the anchor.

Third Row i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors.

Third Row Seat The third row has one top tether anchor located at the bottom rear of To assist you in locating the lower Second Row — Bucket Shown, the center seatback. This anchor anchors, each second row Bench Similar should be used for the center seating anchor position has a label, near position only. Never install two top the crease between the seatback tethers using the same top tether and the seat cushion. anchor. 1-40 Seats and Restraint System

Do not secure a child restraint in a Securing a Child Restraint position without a top tether Designed for the LATCH System CAUTION (Continued) anchor if a national or local law cause the anchor or attachment to requires that the top tether be { CAUTION attached, or if the instructions that come loose or even break during come with the child restraint say that If a LATCH-type child restraint is a crash. A child or others could the top tether must be attached. not attached to anchors, the child be injured. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a Accident statistics show that children restraint will not be able to protect crash, attach only one child are safer if they are restrained in the child correctly. In a crash, the restraint per anchor. the rear rather than the front child could be seriously injured or seat. See Where to Put the Restraint killed. Install a LATCH-type child on page 1-35 for additional restraint properly using the { information. anchors, or use the vehicle’s CAUTION safety belts to secure the restraint, following the instructions that came Children can be seriously injured with the child restraint and the or strangled if a shoulder belt is instructions in this manual. wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any unused safety { belts behind the child restraint so CAUTION children cannot reach them. Pull Do not attach more than one child the shoulder belt all the way out restraint to a single anchor. of the retractor to set the lock, if Attaching more than one child your vehicle has one, after the restraint to a single anchor could child restraint has been installed. (Continued) Seats and Restraint System 1-41

Notice: Do not let the LATCH 1.2. Recline the seatback to the Refer to the child restraint attachments rub against the full reclined position. instructions and the following vehicle’s safety belts. This may Make sure the second row steps: damage these parts. If necessary, bench seatbacks are aligned 2.1. Find the top tether anchor. move buckled safety belts to avoid at the same angle before 2.2. If the anchor is covered, rubbing the LATCH attachments. placing the child restraint on ﬂip open the cover to Do not fold the empty rear seat the seat. Make sure the third expose the anchor. with a safety belt buckled. This row bench seatbacks are 2.3. Route, attach and tighten could damage the safety belt or both upright before placing the top tether according to the seat. Unbuckle and return the the child restraint on your child restraint safety belt to its stowed position, the seat. instructions and the before folding the seat. 1.3. Put the child restraint on following instructions: 1. Attach and tighten the lower the seat. attachments to the lower anchors. 1.4. Attach and tighten the lower If the child restraint does not have attachments on the child lower attachments or the desired restraint to the lower seating position does not have anchors. lower anchors, secure the child 2. If the child restraint manufacturer restraint with the top tether and recommends that the top tether the safety belts. Refer to your be attached, attach and tighten child restraint manufacturer the top tether to the top tether instructions and the instructions in anchor, if the vehicle has one. this manual. 1.1. Find the lower anchors If the position you are using for the desired seating does not have a headrest or position. head restraint and you are using a single tether, route the tether over the seatback. 1-42 Seats and Restraint System

If the position you are using If the position you are using If the position you are using does not have a headrest has a ﬁxed headrest or has a ﬁxed headrest or or head restraint and head restraint and you are head restraint and you are you are using a dual tether, using a dual tether, using a single tether, route the tether over the route the tether around the route the tether over the seatback. headrest or head restraint. headrest or head restraint. 3. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. Seats and Restraint System 1-43

Securing a Child In Canada, the law requires that Restraint in a Rear Seat forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether Position be attached. When securing a child restraint in a If the child restraint does not have rear seating position, study the the LATCH system, you will be using instructions that came with the child the safety belt to secure the child restraint to make sure it is restraint in this position. Be sure to compatible with this vehicle. follow the instructions that came If the child restraint has the LATCH with the child restraint. Secure the system, see Lower Anchors and child in the child restraint when Tethers for Children (LATCH) and as the instructions say. on page 1-37 for how and where to If more than one child restraint 3. Push the latch plate into the install the child restraint using needs to be installed in the buckle until it clicks. LATCH. If a child restraint is secured rear seat, be sure to read Where to Position the release button on in the vehicle using a safety belt Put the Restraint on page 1-35. the buckle so that the safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower could be quickly unbuckled if Anchors and Tethers for Children 1. Put the child restraint on the seat. necessary. (LATCH) on page 1-37 for top tether 2. Pick up the latch plate, and anchor locations. run the lap and shoulder portions Do not secure a child seat in a of the vehicle’s safety belt position without a top tether anchor through or around the restraint. if a national or local law requires The child restraint instructions that the top tether be anchored, or if will show you how. the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored. 1-44 Seats and Restraint System

6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-37 for more information. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, 4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt 5. To tighten the belt, push down unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and all the way out of the retractor to on the child restraint, pull the let it return to the stowed position. set the lock. shoulder portion of the belt If the top tether is attached to a top to tighten the lap portion of the tether anchor, disconnect it. belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. Seats and Restraint System 1-45

Securing a Child { Restraint in the Right CAUTION CAUTION (Continued) Front Seat Position A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints The vehicle has airbags. A rear seat restraint can be seriously injured or in a rear seat, even if the airbag is is a safer place to secure a killed if the right front passenger off. If you secure a forward-facing forward-facing child restraint. See airbag inflates. This is because the child restraint in the right front seat, Where to Put the Restraint on back of the rear-facing child always move the front passenger page 1-35. restraint would be very close to the seat as far back as it will go. It is inflating airbag. A child in a In addition, the vehicle has a better to secure the child restraint forward-facing child restraint can in a rear seat. passenger sensing system which is be seriously injured or killed if the designed to turn off the right right front passenger airbag See Passenger Sensing System front passenger frontal airbag and inflates and the passenger seat is on page 1-55 for additional seat-mounted side impact airbag in a forward position. information. under certain conditions. See Passenger Sensing System on Even if the passenger sensing page 1-55 and Passenger Airbag system has turned off the right If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower Anchors and Status Indicator on page 3-34 front passenger frontal airbag, no Tethers for Children (LATCH) for more information, including system is fail-safe. No one can important safety information. on page 1-37 for how and where to guarantee that an airbag will not install the child restraint using A label on the sun visor says, deploy under some unusual LATCH. If a child restraint is secured “Never put a rear-facing child seat circumstance, even though it is using a safety belt and it uses a in the front.” This is because the risk turned off. top tether, see Lower Anchors and to the rear-facing child is so great, (Continued) Tethers for Children (LATCH) if the airbag deploys. on page 1-37 for top tether anchor locations. 1-46 Seats and Restraint System

Do not secure a child seat in a when the vehicle is started. See Position the release button on position without a top tether anchor Passenger Airbag Status the buckle so that the safety belt if a national or local law requires Indicator on page 3-34. could be quickly unbuckled if that the top tether be anchored, or if 2. Put the child restraint on the seat. necessary. the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run strap must be anchored. the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt In Canada, the law requires that through or around the restraint. forward-facing child restraints have The child restraint instructions a top tether, and that the tether will show you how. be attached. You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. 1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt forward-facing child restraint. all the way out of the retractor to When the passenger sensing set the lock. system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off indicator on 4. Push the latch plate into the the passenger airbag status buckle until it clicks. indicator should light and stay lit Seats and Restraint System 1-47

If the airbags are off, the off indicator Airbag System in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on The vehicle has the following when the vehicle is started. airbags: If a child restraint has been installed • A frontal airbag for the driver. and the on indicator is lit, see “If • A frontal airbag for the right front the On Indicator is Lit for a passenger. Child Restraint” under Passenger Sensing System on page 1-55 • A seat-mounted side impact for more information. airbag for the driver. • A seat-mounted side impact To remove the child restraint, airbag for the right front unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and passenger. 6. To tighten the belt, push down on let it return to the stowed position. the child restraint, pull the • A roof-rail airbag for the driver, shoulder portion of the belt to passenger seated directly tighten the lap portion of the belt behind the driver, and the third and feed the shoulder belt back row outboard passenger position. into the retractor. When installing • A roof-rail airbag for the right a forward-facing child restraint, it front passenger, passenger may be helpful to use your knee seated directly behind the right to push down on the child front passenger, and the third row restraint as you tighten the belt. outboard passenger position. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. 1-48 Seats and Restraint System

All of the airbags in the vehicle will Here are the most important things have the word AIRBAG embossed to know about the airbag system: { CAUTION in the trim or on an attached label near the deployment opening. { Airbags inflate with great force, CAUTION faster than the blink of an eye. For frontal airbags, the word Anyone who is up against, or very You can be severely injured or AIRBAG will appear on the middle close to, any airbag when it part of the steering wheel for killed in a crash if you are not inflates can be seriously injured or the driver and on the instrument wearing your safety belt — even if killed. Do not sit unnecessarily panel for the right front passenger. you have airbags. Airbags are close to the airbag, as you would designed to work with safety With seat-mounted side impact be if you were sitting on the edge belts, but do not replace them. airbags, the word AIRBAG of your seat or leaning forward. Also, airbags are not designed to will appear on the side of the Safety belts help keep you in deploy in every crash. In some seatback closest to the door. position before and during a crashes safety belts are your only crash. Always wear your safety With roof-rail airbags, the word restraint. See When Should an belt, even with airbags. The driver AIRBAG will appear along the Airbag Inflate? on page 1-51. headliner or trim. should sit as far back as possible Wearing your safety belt during a while still maintaining control of Airbags are designed to supplement crash helps reduce your chance the vehicle. the protection provided by safety of hitting things inside the vehicle Occupants should not lean on or belts. Even though today’s airbags or being ejected from it. Airbags sleep against the door or side are also designed to help reduce are “supplemental restraints” to windows in seating positions with the risk of injury from the force of an the safety belts. Everyone in your inflating bag, all airbags must seat-mounted side impact airbags vehicle should wear a safety belt inflate very quickly to do their job. and/or roof-rail airbags. properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that person. Seats and Restraint System 1-49

Where Are the Airbags? { CAUTION

Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inﬂates can be seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults There is an airbag readiness light and older children, but not for on the instrument panel cluster, young children and infants. which shows the airbag symbol. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt The system checks the airbag system nor its airbag system is electrical system for malfunctions. designed for them. Young children The light tells you if there is an and infants need the protection electrical problem. See Airbag that a child restraint system can Readiness Light on page 3-33 for The driver frontal airbag is in the provide. Always secure children more information. middle of the steering wheel. properly in your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children on page 1-28 or Infants and Young Children on page 1-30. 1-50 Seats and Restraint System

Driver Side shown, Passenger Driver Side shown, Passenger The right front passenger frontal Side similar Side similar airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger side. The seat-mounted side impact The roof-rail airbags for the driver, airbags for the driver and right front right front passenger, passengers passenger are in the side of the behind the driver and right front seatbacks closest to the door. passenger, and the third row outboard passengers are in the ceiling above the side windows. Seats and Restraint System 1-51

{ When Should an Airbag Frontal airbags may inflate at CAUTION Inflate? different crash speeds. For example: • If the vehicle hits a stationary If something is between an Frontal airbags are designed to occupant and an airbag, the object, the airbags could inflate at inflate in moderate to severe frontal a different crash speed than if the airbag might not inflate properly or or near-frontal crashes to help vehicle hits a moving object. it might force the object into that reduce the potential for severe person causing severe injury or injuries mainly to the driver’s or right • If the vehicle hits an object that even death. The path of an front passenger’s head and chest. deforms, the airbags could inflate inflating airbag must be kept However, they are only designed to at a different crash speed than if clear. Do not put anything inflate if the impact exceeds a the vehicle hits an object that between an occupant and an predetermined deployment does not deform. airbag, and do not attach or put threshold. Deployment thresholds • If the vehicle hits a narrow object anything on the steering wheel are used to predict how severe (like a pole), the airbags could hub or on or near any other a crash is likely to be in time for the inflate at a different crash speed airbag covering. airbags to inflate and help restrain than if the vehicle hits a wide the occupants. object (like a wall). Do not use seat accessories that block the inflation path of a Whether the frontal airbags will or • If the vehicle goes into an object seat-mounted side impact airbag. should deploy is not based on at an angle, the airbags could how fast your vehicle is traveling. It inflate at a different crash speed Never secure anything to the roof depends largely on what you hit, than if the vehicle goes straight of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags the direction of the impact, and how into the object. by routing a rope or tie down quickly your vehicle slows down. through any door or window Thresholds can also vary with opening. If you do, the path of an specific vehicle design. inflating roof-rail airbag will be Frontal airbags are not intended to blocked. inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts. 1-52 Seats and Restraint System

In addition, the vehicle has Seat-mounted side impact airbags a rollover event, roof-rail airbag dual-stage frontal airbags. are not intended to inflate in deployment is determined by Dual-stage airbags adjust the frontal impacts, near-frontal impacts, the direction of the roll. restraint according to crash severity. rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-rail The vehicle has electronic frontal airbags are not intended to inflate in What Makes an Airbag sensors, which help the sensing rear impacts. A seat-mounted Inflate? system distinguish between a side impact airbag is intended to moderate frontal impact and a more deploy on the side of the vehicle that In a deployment event, the sensing severe frontal impact. For moderate is struck. Both roof-rail airbags system sends an electrical signal frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags will deploy when either side of the triggering a release of gas from the inflate at a level less than full vehicle is struck, or if the sensing inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the deployment. For more severe frontal system predicts that the vehicle airbag causing the bag to break out impacts, full deployment occurs. is about to roll over, or in a severe of the cover and deploy. The inflator, frontal impact. the airbag, and related hardware are The vehicle has seat-mounted side all part of the airbag module. impact and roof-rail airbags. See In any particular crash, no one can Airbag System on page 1-47. say whether an airbag should Frontal airbag modules are located Seat-mounted side impact and have inflated simply because of the inside the steering wheel and roof-rail airbags are intended damage to a vehicle or because instrument panel. For vehicles with to inflate in moderate to severe side of what the repair costs were. seat-mounted side impact airbags, crashes. In addition, these roof-rail For frontal airbags, inflation is there are airbag modules in the side airbags are intended to inflate during determined by what the vehicle hits, of the front seatbacks closest to a rollover or in a severe frontal the angle of the impact, and how the door. For vehicles with roof-rail impact. Seat-mounted side impact quickly the vehicle slows down. For airbags, there are airbag modules and roof-rail airbags will inflate if the seat-mounted side impact and in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the crash severity is above the roof-rail airbags, deployment side windows that have occupant system’s designed threshold level. is determined by the location and seating positions. The threshold level can vary severity of the side impact. In with specific vehicle design. Seats and Restraint System 1-53

How Does an Airbag Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are What Will You See After designed to help contain the head Restrain? and chest of occupants in the an Airbag Inflates? In moderate to severe frontal or near outboard seating positions in the After the frontal airbags and frontal collisions, even belted first, second, and third rows. The seat-mounted side impact airbags occupants can contact the steering rollover capable roof-rail airbags are inflate, they quickly deflate, so wheel or the instrument panel. In designed to help reduce the risk of quickly that some people may not moderate to severe side collisions, full or partial ejection in rollover even realize an airbag inflated. even belted occupants can contact events, although no system can Roof-rail airbags may still be at least the inside of the vehicle. prevent all such ejections. partially inflated for some time after they deploy. Some components of Airbags supplement the protection But airbags would not help in many the airbag module may be hot for provided by safety belts. types of collisions, primarily several minutes. For location of the because the occupant’s motion is Frontal airbags distribute the airbag modules, see What Makes an not toward those airbags. See When force of the impact more evenly over Airbag Inflate? on page 1-52. Should an Airbag Inflate? on the occupant’s upper body, stopping page 1-51 for more information. the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted side impact and Airbags should never be regarded roof-rail airbags distribute the force of as anything more than a supplement the impact more evenly over the to safety belts. occupant’s upper body. 1-54 Seats and Restraint System

The parts of the airbag that come In many crashes severe enough to into contact with you may be warm, CAUTION (Continued) inflate the airbag, windshields but not too hot to touch. There are broken by vehicle deformation. may be some smoke and dust breathing problems but cannot get Additional windshield breakage coming from the vents in the out of the vehicle after an airbag may also occur from the right front deflated airbags. Airbag inflation inflates, then get fresh air by passenger airbag. opening a window or a door. If does not prevent the driver • Airbags are designed to inflate from seeing out of the windshield or you experience breathing only once. After an airbag being able to steer the vehicle, problems following an airbag inflates, you will need some new nor does it prevent people from deployment, you should seek parts for the airbag system. If leaving the vehicle. medical attention. you do not get them, the airbag system will not be there to { CAUTION The vehicle has a feature that may help protect you in another crash. automatically unlock the doors, A new system will include When an airbag inflates, there turn the interior lamps on, and turn airbag modules and possibly may be dust in the air. This dust the hazard warning flashers on other parts. The service manual could cause breathing problems when the airbags inflate. You can for your vehicle covers the for people with a history of lock the doors, turn the interior need to replace other parts. asthma or other breathing trouble. lamps off, and turn the hazard • The vehicle has a crash sensing To avoid this, everyone in the warning flashers off by using the and diagnostic module which vehicle should get out as soon as controls for those features. records information after a crash. it is safe to do so. If you have See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on page 7-16 (Continued) and Event Data Recorders on page 7-17. Seats and Restraint System 1-55

• Let only qualiﬁed technicians The passenger sensing system turns work on the airbag systems. off the right front passenger frontal Improper service can mean that airbag under certain conditions. The an airbag system will not driver airbag, seat-mounted side work properly. See your impact airbags and the roof-rail dealer/retailer for service. airbags are not affected by the passenger sensing system. Canada Passenger Sensing The passenger sensing system System The words ON and OFF, or the works with sensors that are part of the right front passenger seat. The vehicle has a passenger symbol for on and off, are visible The sensors are designed to detect sensing system for the right front during the system check. If you are the presence of a properly-seated passenger position. The passenger using remote start, if equipped, occupant and determine if the airbag status indicator will be to start the vehicle from a distance, right front passenger frontal airbag visible on the instrument panel when you may not see the system should be enabled (may inﬂate) the vehicle is started. check. When the system check is complete, either the word ON or not. or OFF, or the symbol for on or off, According to accident statistics, will be visible. See Passenger children are safer when properly Airbag Status Indicator on secured in a rear seat in the correct page 3-34. child restraint for their weight and size.

United States 1-56 Seats and Restraint System

We recommend that children be The passenger sensing system is secured in a rear seat, including: an CAUTION (Continued) designed to turn off the right infant or a child riding in a front passenger frontal airbag if: forward-facing child restraint can rear-facing child restraint; a child The right front passenger seat is be seriously injured or killed if the • riding in a forward-facing child seat; unoccupied. an older child riding in a booster right front passenger airbag seat; and children, who are inflates and the passenger seat is • The system determines that an large enough, using safety belts. in a forward position. infant is present in a child restraint. A label on the sun visor says, Even if the passenger sensing “Never put a rear-facing child seat system has turned off the right • A right front passenger takes in the front.” This is because the risk front passenger frontal airbag, no his/her weight off of the seat to the rear-facing child is so great, system is fail-safe. No one can for a period of time. if the airbag deploys. guarantee that an airbag will not • Or, if there is a critical problem deploy under some unusual with the airbag system or the { CAUTION circumstance, even though the passenger sensing system. airbag is turned off. When the passenger sensing A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints system has turned off the right front restraint can be seriously injured or in a rear seat, even if the airbag is passenger frontal airbag, the off killed if the right front passenger off. If you secure a forward-facing indicator will light and stay lit airbag inflates. This is because the child restraint in the right front seat, to remind you that the airbag is off. back of the rear-facing child always move the front passenger See Passenger Airbag Status restraint would be very close to the seat as far back as it will go. It is Indicator on page 3-34. inflating airbag. A child in a better to secure the child restraint (Continued) in a rear seat. Seats and Restraint System 1-57

The passenger sensing system is Everyone in the vehicle who If the On Indicator is Lit for a designed to turn on (may inﬂate) the has outgrown child restraints Child Restraint right front passenger frontal airbag should wear a safety belt anytime the system senses that a properly — whether or not there If a child restraint has been installed person of adult size is sitting properly is an airbag for that person. and the on indicator is lit: in the right front passenger seat. 1. Turn the vehicle off. When the passenger sensing { CAUTION 2. Remove the child restraint from system has allowed the airbag to be the vehicle. enabled, the on indicator will light If the airbag readiness light ever 3. Remove any additional items and stay lit to remind you that comes on and stays on, it means from the seat such as blankets, the airbag is active. that something may be wrong with cushions, seat covers, seat the airbag system. To help avoid For some children, including heaters, or seat massagers. injury to yourself or others, have children in child restraints, and for 4. Reinstall the child restraint very small adults, the passenger the vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag Readiness Light on following the directions provided sensing system may or may not turn by the child restraint page 3-33 for more information, off the right front passenger frontal manufacturer and refer to including important safety airbag, depending upon the person’s Securing a Child Restraint in the seating posture and body build. information. Right Front Seat Position on page 1-45. 1-58 Seats and Restraint System

5. If, after reinstalling the child If the Off Indicator is Lit for an If this happens, use the following restraint and restarting the Adult-Size Occupant steps to allow the system to detect vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, that person and enable the right front turn the vehicle off. Then passenger frontal airbag: slightly recline the vehicle 1. Turn the vehicle off. seatback and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to 2. Remove any additional material make sure that the vehicle from the seat, such as blankets, seatback is not pushing the child cushions, seat covers, seat restraint into the seat cushion. heaters, or seat massagers. Also make sure the child restraint 3. Place the seatback in the fully is not trapped under the vehicle upright position. head restraint. If this happens, 4. Have the person sit upright in the adjust the head restraint. seat, centered on the seat See Head Restraints on cushion, with legs comfortably page 1-2. If a person of adult-size is sitting in extended. 6. Restart the vehicle. the right front passenger seat, but 5. Restart the vehicle and have the The passenger sensing system the off indicator is lit, it could be person remain in this position for may or may not turn off the because that person is not sitting two to three minutes after the airbag for a child in a child properly in the seat. on indicator is lit. restraint depending upon the child’s seating posture and body build. It is better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat. Seats and Restraint System 1-59

Additional Factors Affecting A wet seat can affect the The on indicator may be lit if an System Operation performance of the passenger object, such as a briefcase, sensing system. Here is how: handbag, grocery bag, laptop or Safety belts help keep the passenger other electronic device, is put on an in position on the seat during vehicle • The passenger sensing system may turn off the passenger airbag unoccupied seat. If this is not desired maneuvers and braking, which helps remove the object from the seat. the passenger sensing system when liquid is soaked into the maintain the passenger airbag seat. If this happens, the off status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child indicator will be lit, and the airbag { CAUTION Restraints” in the Index for additional readiness light on the instrument information about the importance of panel will also be lit. Stowing of articles under the proper restraint use. • Liquid pooled on the seat that has passenger seat or between the not soaked in may make it more passenger seat cushion and A thick layer of additional material, seatback may interfere with the such as a blanket or cushion, or likely that the passenger sensing proper operation of the passenger aftermarket equipment such as seat system will enable (turn on) the sensing system. covers, seat heaters, and seat passenger airbag while a child massagers can affect how well the restraint or child occupant is on passenger sensing system the seat. If the passenger airbag operates. We recommend that you is turned on, the on indicator will not use seat covers or other be lit. aftermarket equipment except when If the passenger seat gets wet, dry approved by GM for your speciﬁc the seat immediately. If the airbag vehicle. See Adding Equipment readiness light is lit, do not install a to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on child restraint or allow anyone to page 1-60 for more information occupy the seat. See Airbag about modiﬁcations that can affect Readiness Light on page 3-33 for how the system operates. important safety information. 1-60 Seats and Restraint System

Servicing Your steering wheel, instrument panel, Airbag-Equipped Vehicle CAUTION (Continued) roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner or pillar garnish Airbags affect how the vehicle They are probably part of the trim, front sensors, side impact should be serviced. There are parts airbag system. Be sure to follow sensors, rollover sensor module, of the airbag system in several proper service procedures, and or airbag wiring can affect the places around the vehicle. Your make sure the person performing operation of the airbag system. dealer/retailer and the service work for you is qualified to do so. manual have information about In addition, the vehicle has a servicing the vehicle and the airbag passenger sensing system system. To purchase a service Adding Equipment to for the right front passenger manual, see Service Publications Your Airbag-Equipped position, which includes sensors Ordering Information on page 7-15. Vehicle that are part of the passenger seat. The passenger sensing { CAUTION Q: Is there anything I might add system may not operate properly to or change about the if the original seat trim is For up to 10 seconds after the vehicle that could keep the replaced with non-GM covers, ignition is turned off and the airbags from working upholstery or trim, or with properly? battery is disconnected, an airbag GM covers, upholstery or trim can still inflate during improper A: Yes. If you add things that designed for a different vehicle. service. You can be injured if you change the vehicle’s frame, Any object, such as an are close to an airbag when it bumper system, height, front end aftermarket seat heater or a inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. or side sheet metal, they may comfort enhancing pad or device, keep the airbag system from installed under or on top of the (Continued) working properly. Changing or seat fabric, could also interfere moving any parts of the front with the operation of the seats, safety belts, the airbag passenger sensing system. This sensing and diagnostic module, could either prevent proper Seats and Restraint System 1-61 deployment of the passenger Q: Because I have a disability, I Restraint System airbag(s) or prevent the have to get my vehicle passenger sensing system from modified. How can I find out Check properly turning off the whether this will affect my passenger airbag(s). See airbag system? Checking the Restraint Passenger Sensing System on A: If you have questions, call Systems page 1-55. Customer Assistance. The phone Safety Belts If you have questions, call numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance. The phone Customer Assistance are in Step Now and then, check that the safety numbers and addresses for Two of the Customer Satisfaction belt reminder light, safety belts, Customer Assistance are in Step Procedure in this manual. See buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages are all working properly. Two of the Customer Satisfaction Customer Satisfaction Procedure Procedure in this manual. See on page 7-1. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts Customer Satisfaction Procedure In addition, your dealer/retailer and that might keep a safety belt system on page 7-1. the service manual have information from doing its job. See your about the location of the airbag If the vehicle has rollover dealer/retailer to have it repaired. sensors, sensing and diagnostic roof-rail airbags, see Different Torn or frayed safety belts may not module and airbag wiring. Size Tires and Wheels on protect you in a crash. They can page 5-56 for additional rip apart under impact forces. important information. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away. Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-32 for more information. 1-62 Seats and Restraint System

Keep safety belts clean and dry. Replacing Restraint See your dealer/retailer to have the See Care of Safety Belts on System Parts After a safety belt assemblies inspected page 5-86. or replaced. Crash Airbags If the vehicle has the LATCH system { and it was being used during a crash, The airbag system does not need CAUTION you may need new LATCH system regularly scheduled maintenance or parts. replacement. Make sure the A crash can damage the restraint airbag readiness light is working. systems in your vehicle. A New parts and repairs may be See Airbag Readiness Light damaged restraint system may necessary even if the safety belt or on page 3-33 for more information. not properly protect the person LATCH system (if equipped), using it, resulting in serious injury was not being used at the time of Notice: If an airbag covering or even death in a crash. To help the crash. is damaged, opened, or broken, make sure your restraint systems the airbag may not work properly. If an airbag inﬂates, you will need to Do not open or break the airbag are working properly after a crash, replace airbag system parts. See coverings. If there are any opened have them inspected and any the part on the airbag system earlier or broken airbag covers, have necessary replacements made as in this section. soon as possible. the airbag covering and/or airbag Have the safety belt pretensioners module replaced. For the checked if the vehicle has been in a location of the airbag modules, If the vehicle has been in a crash, do crash, if the airbag readiness light see What Makes an Airbag you need new safety belts or LATCH stays on after the vehicle is started, Inﬂate? on page 1-52. See your system (if equipped) parts? or while you are driving. See Airbag dealer/retailer for service. After a very minor crash, nothing Readiness Light on page 3-33. may be necessary. But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged. Features and Controls 2-1

Theft-Deterrent Systems Mirrors Features and Theft-Deterrent Systems ...... 2-16 Manual Rearview Mirror ...... 2-31 Content Theft-Deterrent ...... 2-16 Automatic Dimming Controls PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Rearview Mirror ...... 2-31 Immobilizer ...... 2-18 Outside Power Mirrors ...... 2-32 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Outside Power Foldaway Immobilizer Operation ...... 2-18 Mirrors ...... 2-33 Park Tilt Mirrors ...... 2-34 Keys Starting and Operating ...... 2-34 ...... 2-2 Outside Convex Mirror Keys Your Vehicle Outside Heated Mirrors ...... 2-34 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) New Vehicle Break-In ...... 2-20 System ...... 2-3 Ignition Positions ...... 2-20 Object Detection Systems Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Retained Accessory Ultrasonic Rear Parking System Operation ...... 2-4 Power (RAP) ...... 2-21 Assist (URPA) ...... 2-34 Remote Vehicle Start ...... 2-6 Starting the Engine ...... 2-22 Rear Vision Camera (RVC) .....2-37 Doors and Locks Engine Coolant Heater ...... 2-23 ® Automatic Transmission OnStar System Door Locks ...... 2-8 OnStar® System ...... 2-42 Power Door Locks ...... 2-8 Operation ...... 2-24 Delayed Locking ...... 2-8 Tow/Haul Mode ...... 2-26 ...... 2-27 Universal Home Remote Programmable Automatic Parking Brake System Door Locks ...... 2-9 Shifting Into Park ...... 2-28 Shifting Out of Park ...... 2-29 Universal Home Remote Rear Door Security Locks ...... 2-9 System ...... 2-45 Lockout Protection ...... 2-9 Parking Over Things That Burn ...... 2-29 Universal Home Remote Liftgate ...... 2-10 System Operation ...... 2-46 Power Liftgate ...... 2-11 Engine Exhaust ...... 2-30 Running the Vehicle While Windows Parked ...... 2-30 Windows ...... 2-14 Power Windows ...... 2-14 Sun Visors ...... 2-16 2-2 Features and Controls

Storage Areas Keys Glove Box ...... 2-50 Cupholders ...... 2-50 Instrument Panel Storage ...... 2-50 { CAUTION Center Console Storage ...... 2-50 Second Row Center Leaving children in a vehicle with Console ...... 2-50 the ignition key is dangerous for ...... 2-51 Floor Mats many reasons, children or others Luggage Carrier ...... 2-52 Rear Seat Armrest ...... 2-52 could be badly injured or even Convenience Net ...... 2-52 killed. They could operate the Cargo Cover ...... 2-53 power windows or other controls Cargo Tie Downs ...... 2-53 or even make the vehicle move. Cargo Management The windows will function with the ...... 2-53 System keys in the ignition and children The key is used for the ignition and Sunroof could be seriously injured or killed all door locks. Sunroof ...... 2-54 if caught in the path of a closing The key has a bar-coded key tag window. Do not leave the keys in that the dealer/retailer or qualiﬁed a vehicle with children. locksmith can use to make new keys. Store this information in a safe place, not in the vehicle. Features and Controls 2-3

See your dealer/retailer if a This device complies with Part 15 of Changes or modiﬁcations to this replacement key or additional key the FCC Rules. Operation is subject system by other than an authorized is needed. to the following two conditions: service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. Notice: If you ever lock your 1. This device may not cause keys in the vehicle, you may have interference. If there is a decrease in the RKE to damage the vehicle to get in. 2. This device must accept any operating range, try this: Be sure you have spare keys. interference received, including • Check the distance. The If you are locked out of the vehicle, interference that may cause transmitter may be too far from call the Roadside Assistance undesired operation of the the vehicle. Stand closer Center. See Roadside Assistance device. during rainy or snowy weather. Program on page 7-6. This device complies with • Check the location. Other vehicles RSS-210 of Industry Canada. or objects may be blocking the Remote Keyless Entry Operation is subject to the following signal. Take a few steps to the left (RKE) System two conditions: or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again. The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) 1. This device may not cause system operates on a radio interference. • Check the transmitter’s battery. frequency subject to Federal 2. This device must accept any See “Battery Replacement” later Communications Commission (FCC) interference received, including in this section. Rules and with Industry Canada. interference that may cause • If the transmitter is still not undesired operation of the working correctly, see your device. dealer/retailer or a qualiﬁed technician for service. 2-4 Features and Controls

Remote Keyless Entry / (Remote Vehicle Start): The interior lamps come on and (RKE) System Operation For vehicles with this feature, stay on for 20 seconds or until the see Remote Vehicle Start on ignition is turned on. The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) page 2-6 for additional information. transmitter functions work up If enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps flash twice to indicate to 195 feet (60 m) away from the Q (Lock): Press to lock all vehicle. unlocking has occurred. See DIC the doors. Vehicle Customization (With DIC There are other conditions which If enabled through the Driver Buttons) on page 3-65. can affect the performance of Information Center (DIC), the K the transmitter. See Remote Keyless parking lamps flash once to indicate Pressing on the RKE transmitter Entry (RKE) System on page 2-3. locking has occurred. If enabled disarms the content theft-deterrent through the DIC, the horn sounds system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-16. when Q is pressed again within five seconds. See DIC Vehicle & (Power Liftgate): Press and Customization (With DIC Buttons) hold for about one second to open on page 3-65 for additional and close the liftgate. The taillamps information. flash and a chime sounds to indicate Pressing Q may arm the content when the liftgate is opening and theft-deterrent system. See Content closing. Theft-Deterrent on page 2-16. L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): K (Unlock): Press once to unlock Press and release to locate the vehicle. The parking lamps flash only the driver door. If K is With Remote Start and Liftgate and the horn sounds three times. pressed again within five seconds, (Without Remote Start or all remaining doors unlock. Liftgate Similar) Features and Controls 2-5

Press and hold L for more than Any lost or stolen transmitters will two seconds to activate the no longer work once the new panic alarm. The parking lamps transmitter is programmed. ﬂash and the horn sounds Each vehicle can have up to repeatedly for 30 seconds. eight transmitters programmed to it. The alarm turns off when the See “Relearn Remote Key” under ignition is moved to ON/RUN or L DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-45 is pressed again. The ignition must or DIC Operation and Displays be in LOCK/OFF for the panic (Without DIC Buttons) on page 3-50 alarm to work. for instructions on how to program Programming Transmitters transmitters to this vehicle. to the Vehicle Battery Replacement 1. Separate the transmitter with a Only RKE transmitters programmed Replace the battery if the REPLACE ﬂat, thin object inserted into the to this vehicle will work. If a BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY notch on the side. transmitter is lost or stolen, a message displays in the DIC. replacement can be purchased 2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object. and programmed through your Notice: When replacing the dealer/retailer. When the battery, do not touch any of the 3. Insert the new battery, positive replacement transmitter is circuitry on the transmitter. side facing down. Replace with programmed to this vehicle using Static from your body could a CR2032 or equivalent battery. the DIC, all remaining transmitters damage the transmitter. 4. Snap the transmitter back must also be reprogrammed. together. 2-6 Features and Controls

Remote Vehicle Start Laws in some communities may / (Remote Start): This button is restrict the use of remote starters. This vehicle may have a remote located on the RKE transmitter if the For example, some laws may vehicle has remote start. starting feature that starts the engine require a person using the remote from outside of the vehicle. start to have the vehicle in view To start the vehicle: If the vehicle has an automatic when doing so. Check local 1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle. regulations for any requirements on climate control system, the climate 2. Press and release Q, then control system defaults to a heating remote starting of vehicles. immediately press and hold / or cooling mode depending on the Do not use the remote start until the parking lamps ﬂash. If the outside temperatures. If the vehicle feature if the vehicle is low on fuel. vehicle’s lights can not be seen, does not have an automatic climate The vehicle could run out of fuel. control system, the system turns on press and hold / for at least at the setting the vehicle was set to If the vehicle has the remote start four seconds. The vehicle’s doors when the vehicle was last turned off. feature, the RKE transmitter lock. When the vehicle starts, the functions have an increased range of If the vehicle has an automatic parking lamps turn on and remain operation. However, the range may on while the vehicle is running. climate control system and heated be less while the vehicle is running. seats, the heated seats turn on Pressing / again, after the during colder outside temperatures There are other conditions which vehicle has started, shuts the and shut off when the key is turned to can affect the performance of vehicle off. ON/RUN. See Heated Seats on the transmitter, see Remote Keyless page 1-5 for more information. Entry (RKE) System on page 2-3 3. If it is the ﬁrst remote start since for additional information. the vehicle has been driven, The rear window defogger and repeat these steps while the heated mirrors, if the vehicle engine is still running, to extend has them, turn on during colder the time by 10 minutes for the outside temperatures and turn off engine to continue to run. Remote when the key is turned to ON/RUN. start can be extended one time. Features and Controls 2-7

After entering the vehicle during a 10 minutes within the first 10 minute The engine turns off during a remote start, insert and turn the key remote start time frame, and remote start if the coolant to the ON/RUN position to drive before the engine stops. temperature gets too high or if the the vehicle. oil pressure gets low. For example, if Q and then / are If the vehicle is left running it pressed again after the vehicle Vehicles that have the remote automatically shuts off after has been running for five minutes, vehicle start feature are shipped 10 minutes unless a time extension 10 minutes are added, allowing from the factory with the remote has been done. the engine to run for 15 minutes. vehicle start system enabled. The system may be enabled or To manually shut off a remote start: The additional 10 minutes are disabled through the DIC if the • Aim the RKE transmitter at the considered a second remote start. vehicle has DIC buttons. See vehicle and press / until the The vehicle must be started with the “REMOTE START” under DIC parking lamps turn off. key once two remote starts, or a Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-65 for additional • Turn on the hazard warning single remote start with one time extension has been done. information. If the vehicle does flashers. not have DIC buttons, see your • Turn the ignition switch on and The vehicle can be started using the dealer/retailer to enable or disable then off. remote start feature again after the remote start system. the key is removed from the ignition. The vehicle can be started using the remote start feature two separate The vehicle cannot be started times between driving sequences. using the remote start feature if the The engine runs for 10 minutes after key is in the ignition, the hood is each remote start. Or, the engine open, or if there is an emission run time can be extended another control system malfunction. 2-8 Features and Controls

Power Door Locks Doors and Locks CAUTION (Continued) The power door lock switches are Door Locks • Young children who get into located on the front doors. { unlocked vehicles may be " (Unlock): Press to unlock CAUTION unable to get out. A child can the doors. be overcome by extreme heat Unlocked doors can be and can suffer permanent Q (Lock): Remove the key from dangerous. injuries or even death from the ignition and press to lock • Passengers, especially heat stroke. Always lock the the doors. children, can easily open the vehicle whenever leaving it. doors and fall out of a moving • Outsiders can easily enter Delayed Locking vehicle. When a door is through an unlocked door locked, the handle will not when you slow down or stop When locking the doors with the open it. The chance of being your vehicle. Locking your power lock switch and a door or thrown out of the vehicle in a doors can help prevent this the liftgate is open, the doors crash is increased if the from happening. will lock ﬁve seconds after the doors are not locked. So, all last door is closed. You will hear passengers should wear To lock or unlock a door, use the three chimes to signal that the safety belts properly and the key from the outside or the door lock delayed locking feature is in use. doors should be locked from the inside. Pressing the power lock switch twice whenever the vehicle is or the lock button on the RKE driven. transmitter twice will override the (Continued) delayed locking feature and immediately lock all the doors. Features and Controls 2-9

This feature will not operate if the Rear Door Security To set the locks, insert a key into key is in the ignition. the slot and turn it to the horizontal Locks position. The door can only be This feature can be programmed The vehicle has rear door security opened from the outside with the by using the Driver Information locks to prevent passengers door unlocked. To return the door to Center (DIC). See “DELAY from opening the rear doors from normal operation, turn the slot to DOOR LOCK” under DIC Vehicle the inside. the vertical position. Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-65. Lockout Protection Programmable Automatic This feature protects you from Door Locks locking the key in the vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a Vehicles with an automatic front door is open. lock/unlock feature enable you to program the vehicle’s power If the driver side power door lock door locks. This feature can be switch is pressed when the driver’s programmed through the Driver door is open and the key is in Information Center (DIC). See DIC the ignition, all of the doors will lock Vehicle Customization (With DIC and then the driver door will unlock. Buttons) on page 3-65 for more If the passenger side power door information. Open the rear doors to access the lock switch is pressed when the front security locks on the inside edge passenger door is open and the of each door. key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock and then the front passenger door will unlock. 2-10 Features and Controls

Liftgate To open the liftgate, press the CAUTION (Continued) touchpad on the underside of the { liftgate handle. The vehicle must be CAUTION • Adjust the Climate Control in P (Park) to open the liftgate. system to a setting that To close the liftgate, use the pull cup Exhaust gases can enter the brings in only outside air and or strap. vehicle if it is driven with the set the fan speed to the The liftgate has an electric latch. liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with highest setting. See Climate If the battery is disconnected or has any objects that pass through Control System in the Index. low voltage, the liftgate will not the seal between the body and • If the vehicle is equipped with the trunk/hatch or liftgate. open. The liftgate will resume a power liftgate, disable the operation when the battery is Engine exhaust contains Carbon power liftgate function. Monoxide (CO) which cannot be reconnected and charged. seen or smelled. It can cause For more information about If the battery is properly connected unconsciousness and even death. carbon monoxide, see Engine and has adequate voltage, and Exhaust on page 2-30. If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate still will not function, the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: the vehicle should be taken If the vehicle has a power liftgate, to a dealers/retailer for service. • Close all of the windows. see Power Liftgate on page 2-11. • Fully open the air outlets on or To unlock the liftgate, use the power under the instrument panel. door lock switch or press the door (Continued) unlock button on the RKE transmitter twice. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-4. Features and Controls 2-11

Power Liftgate CAUTION (Continued) { CAUTION Power Liftgate Operation • Adjust the Climate Control You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the power { CAUTION system to a setting that brings in only outside air and liftgate. Make sure there is no one Exhaust gases can enter the set the fan speed to the in the way of the liftgate as it is vehicle if it is driven with the highest setting. See Climate opening and closing. liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with Control System in the Index. any objects that pass through the • If the vehicle is equipped with Notice: If you open the liftgate seal between the body and the a power liftgate, disable the without checking for overhead trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine power liftgate function. obstructions such as a garage exhaust contains Carbon For more information about door, you could damage the Monoxide (CO) which cannot be carbon monoxide, see Engine liftgate or the liftgate glass. seen or smelled. It can cause Exhaust on page 2-30. Always check to make sure the unconsciousness and even death. area above and behind the liftgate is clear before opening it. If the vehicle must be driven with The vehicle may have a power the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: liftgate. The vehicle must be The power liftgate can be power in P (Park) to use this feature. opened and closed in the • Close all of the windows. following ways: • Fully open the air outlets on or The taillamps will ﬂash and a chime under the instrument panel. will sound when the power liftgate • Press and hold the power liftgate is used. button on the RKE transmitter (Continued) until the liftgate starts moving. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-4 for more information. 2-12 Features and Controls

If the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) while the power function is in progress, the liftgate power function will continue to completion. If the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park) and the vehicle accelerates before the power liftgate latches closed, the liftgate may reverse to the open position. Cargo could fall out of the vehicle. The power liftgate must be closed and latched before driving. If the liftgate is power opened and Power Liftgate Button on Power Liftgate Button near the support struts have lost pressure, Center Console Liftgate Latch the lights will ﬂash and a chime will sound. The liftgate will stay open • Press the liftgate button on the The liftgate can also be closed temporarily, then slowly close. center console. by pressing the power liftgate button See your dealer/retailer for service • Press the touchpad switch on the next to the liftgate latch. Press the before using the liftgate if this occurs. outside liftgate handle. button a second time during liftgate operation to reverse the Obstacle Detection Features Pressing the buttons or touchpad operation. A warning chime will sound and the switch a second time while the The power liftgate may be liftgate will automatically reverse liftgate is moving reverses the direction to the full closed or open direction. temporarily disabled under extreme temperatures or under low battery position if the liftgate encounters an conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate obstacle during a power open or can still be operated manually. close cycle. After removing the obstruction, the power liftgate operation can be used again. Features and Controls 2-13

If the liftgate comes across more Manual Operation of Power To open the liftgate, press the obstacles on the same power cycle, Liftgate touchpad on the handle on the power function deactivates, and the outside of the liftgate and lift the you must manually open or close gate open. To close the liftgate, the liftgate. A message displays, use the pull cup to lower the liftgate LIFTGATE OPEN, to indicate that and close. The liftgate latch will the liftgate is open. See Driver power close. Always close the Information Center (DIC) on liftgate before driving. page 3-44 for more information. If the RKE button or the power close After removing the obstructions, button on the liftgate is pressed while manually open the liftgate to the full power operation is disabled, the open position or close the liftgate to lights will ﬂash three times, but the the fully closed and latched position. liftgate will not move. The liftgate resumes normal power operation. It is not recommended that you drive with the liftgate open. Pinch sensors are located on the To change the liftgate to manual However, if you must drive with the side edges of the liftgate. If an object operation, press the switch on liftgate open, the liftgate should is caught between the liftgate and the the center console to OFF. be set to manual operation by vehicle and presses against this pressing the OFF switch on the sensor, the liftgate will reverse With the power liftgate disabled center console. direction and open fully. The liftgate and all of the doors unlocked, will remain open until it is activated the liftgate can be manually opened again or closed manually. Do not and closed. force the liftgate open or closed during a power cycle. 2-14 Features and Controls

Windows Power Windows

{ CAUTION { CAUTION

Leaving children, helpless adults, Leaving children in a vehicle with or pets in a vehicle with the the keys is dangerous for many windows closed is dangerous. reasons, children or others could They can be overcome by be badly injured or even killed. the extreme heat and suffer They could operate the power permanent injuries or even death windows or other controls or from heat stroke. Never leave a even make the vehicle move. child, a helpless adult, or a pet The windows will function and alone in a vehicle, especially with they could be seriously injured or the windows closed in warm or killed if caught in the path of a hot weather. closing window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children. When there are children in the rear seat use the window lockout button to prevent unintentional operation of the windows. Features and Controls 2-15

Press the switch to lower the Programming the Power window. Pull up on the front edge of Windows the switch to raise the window. If the battery on the vehicle has Express-Down Windows been recharged, disconnected, or replaced, windows with the The express-down feature allows express-up feature need to be the windows to be lowered without reprogrammed for this feature to holding the switch. Press the work. To program the window: window switch fully and release it to activate the express-down feature. 1. Close all doors with the ignition The express mode can be canceled in the ACC/ACCESSORY, by pressing or pulling the switch. ON/RUN position, or when Retained Accessory Uplevel shown, base similar Express-Up Window Power (RAP) is active. The power window controls are The express-up feature allows the See Retained Accessory located on each of the side doors. windows to be raised all the Power (RAP) on page 2-21. The driver door also has switches way without holding the switch up. 2. Press and continue to hold the that control the passenger and Pull the switch up fully and release it window switch until the window rear windows. The power windows to activate the express-up feature. is fully open. work with the ignition in ACC/ The express-up mode can be 3. Pull up and hold the window ACCESSORY, ON/RUN or when canceled by pressing or pulling switch to close the window. Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is the switch. Continue to hold it brieﬂy after active. See Retained Accessory the window is fully closed. Power (RAP) on page 2-21. 4. Repeat for each window that has the express-up feature. 2-16 Features and Controls

Anti-Pinch Feature Sun Visors Theft-Deterrent The anti-pinch feature is on windows Pull the sun visor down to block Systems with the express-up feature. If an glare. Detach the sun visor from the object is in the way of the window as center mount and slide it along Vehicle theft is big business, it is express-closing, or in certain the rod from side-to-side to cover especially in some cities. weather conditions like severe the driver or passenger side of This vehicle has theft-deterrent icing, the window will stop and the front window. Swing the features, however, they do not open to a factory preset position. sun visor to the side to cover the make it impossible to steal. The window functions normally once side window. It can be moved along the obstruction is removed. the rod from side-to-side in this Content Theft-Deterrent position also. Window Lockout This vehicle may have a content Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror theft-deterrent alarm system. o (Window Lockout): The To activate the theft-deterrent window lockout switch is located The vehicle has lighted visor vanity system, do one of the following: with the power window switches mirrors on both the driver and on the driver door armrest. passenger sun visors. Pull the • Press Q on the Remote Keyless This feature prevents the rear sun visor down and lift the mirror Entry (RKE) transmitter or the passenger windows from operating cover to turn the lamps on. power door lock switch when any the windows, except from the door is open. driver position. Press the switch to turn the lockout feature on or off. An indicator light will come on to show the lockout feature is on.

The security light ﬂashes. Features and Controls 2-17

When the door is closed, the The horn chirps and the lights flash. Testing the Alarm security light stops flashing and If the key is not placed in the To test the alarm: stays on solid for approximately ignition and turned to START or the 30 seconds. The content theft door is not unlocked by pressing Q 1. From inside the vehicle, lower the deterrent alarm is not armed until during the ten second pre-alarm, the driver side window and open the the security light goes off. alarm goes off. The headlamps flash driver door. If the delayed locking feature is and the horn sounds for about 2. Press Q. active, the alarm is not activated two minutes, then turns off to save 3. Get out of the vehicle, close the until all doors are closed and the the battery power. door and wait for the security security light goes off. The vehicle can be started with the light to go out. Q • Press when the driver door is correct ignition key if the alarm 4. Then reach in through the closed. The security light comes has been set off. window, unlock the door with on solid for approximately To avoid setting off the alarm by the manual door lock and open 30 seconds and then goes off. accident: the door. This should set off The content theft deterrent alarm the alarm. is not armed until the security light • Lock the vehicle with the door goes off. key after the doors are closed. If the alarm does not sound when it should, but the vehicle’s headlamps The theft-deterrent system will not • Unlock the door with the RKE transmitter. Unlocking a door flash, check to see if the horn activate if the doors are locked works. The horn fuse may be blown. with the vehicle’s key or the manual any other way sets off the alarm if the system has been armed. To replace the fuse, see Fuses door lock. and Circuit Breakers on page 5-92. K If a locked door is opened Press or place the key in If the alarm does not sound or the without using the RKE transmitter, the ignition and turn it to START to vehicle’s headlamps do not flash, a ten second pre-alarm occurs. turn off the alarm. see your dealer/retailer for service. 2-18 Features and Controls

PASS-Key® III+ Electronic This device complies with PASS-Key® III+ Electronic RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Immobilizer Operation is subject to the following Immobilizer Operation The PASS-Key III+ system operates two conditions: This vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ on a radio frequency subject to 1. This device may not cause (Personalized Automotive Security Federal Communications interference. System) theft-deterrent system. Commission (FCC) Rules and with PASS-Key® III+ is a passive Industry Canada. 2. This device must accept any theft-deterrent system. interference received, including This device complies with Part 15 interference that may cause The system is automatically armed of the FCC Rules. Operation is undesired operation of the when the key is removed from the subject to the following two device. ignition. conditions: Changes or modiﬁcations to this The system is automatically disarmed 1. This device may not cause system by other than an authorized when the key is turned to ON/RUN. harmful interference. service facility could void You do not have to manually arm or 2. This device must accept any authorization to use this equipment. disarm the system. interference received, including PASS-Key III+ uses a radio The security light comes on if there is interference that may cause frequency transponder in the key a problem with arming or disarming undesired operation. that matches a decoder in the the theft-deterrent system. vehicle. When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses an incorrect key, the vehicle does not start. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high number of electrical key codes. Features and Controls 2-19

If the engine does not start and the additional keys only. If all the 4. Insert the key to be programmed security light on the instrument panel currently programmed keys are lost and turn it to the ON/RUN comes on when trying to start the or do not operate, you must see position within ﬁve seconds of vehicle, there may be a problem with your dealer/retailer or a locksmith the original key being turned your theft-deterrent system. Turn the who can service PASS-Key® III+ to to the LOCK/OFF position. ignition off and try again. have keys made and programmed The security light turns off once to the system. If the engine still does not start, and the key has been programmed. the key appears to be undamaged, See your dealer/retailer or a 5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 try another ignition key and check locksmith who can service if additional keys are to be ® the fuses. See Fuses and Circuit PASS-Key III+ to get a new key programmed. Breakers on page 5-92. If the engine blank that is cut exactly as the ® still does not start with the other ignition key that operates the If the PASS-Key III+ key is lost or key, the vehicle needs service. If the system. damaged, see your dealer/retailer or vehicle does start, the ﬁrst key may a locksmith to have a new key made. To program the new key: be faulty. See your dealer/retailer The SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT ® who can service the PASS-Key III+ 1. Verify that the new key has SYSTEM message displays on to have a new key made. In an a 1 stamped on it. the Driver Information Center (DIC) emergency, contact Roadside 2. Insert the already programmed when there is a problem with the Assistance. See Roadside theft-deterrent system. See DIC Assistance Program on page 7-6. key in the ignition and start the engine. If the engine does not Warnings and Messages on It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ start, see your dealer/retailer for page 3-56 for additional information. decoder to learn the transponder service. Do not leave the key or device value of a new or replacement key. 3. After the engine has started, that disarms or deactivates the theft Up to 10 keys may be programmed turn the key to LOCK/OFF, deterrent system in the vehicle. to the vehicle. The following and remove the key. procedure is for programming 2-20 Features and Controls

Starting and • Avoid making hard stops for Ignition Positions the first 200 miles (322 km) Operating Your or so. During this time the Vehicle new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new New Vehicle Break-In linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Notice: The vehicle does Follow this breaking-in not need an elaborate break-in. guideline every time you get But it will perform better in new brake linings. the long run if you follow these • Do not tow a trailer during guidelines: break-in. See Towing a • If you have all-wheel drive, Trailer on page 4-26 for the keep your speed at 55 mph trailer towing capabilities The ignition switch has four different (88 km/h) or less for the of your vehicle and more positions. first 500 miles (805 km). information. In order to shift out of P (Park), • Do not drive at any one Following break-in, engine speed the ignition must be in ON/RUN or constant speed, fast or slow, and load can be gradually ACC/ACCESSORY and the for the first 500 miles (805 km). increased. brake pedal must be applied. Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to Notice: Using a tool to force the brake or slow the vehicle. key to turn in the ignition could cause damage to the switch or break the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer. Features and Controls 2-21

( (LOCK/OFF): This position R (ON/RUN): This position can be Retained Accessory locks the ignition and transmission. used to operate the electrical Power (RAP) The key can be removed in accessories and to display some LOCK/OFF. instrument panel warning and These vehicle accessories can be indicator lights. The switch stays in used for up to 10 minutes after The shift lever must be in P (Park) this position when the engine is the ignition key is turned off: to turn the ignition switch to running. The transmission is • Audio System LOCK/OFF. also unlocked in this position. • Power Windows The steering can bind with the If you leave the key in the wheels turned off center. If this ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN • Sunroof (if equipped) happens, move the steering wheel position with the engine off, Power to the windows and sunroof from right to left while turning the battery could be drained. You will work up to 10 minutes or the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. may not be able to start the vehicle until a door is opened. If this doesn’t work, then the vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain needs service. for an extended period of time. The radio continues to work for 10 minutes or until the driver’s door ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is / (START): This is the position is opened. the position in which you can that starts the engine. When For an additional 10 minutes of operate the electrical accessories or the engine starts, release the key. operation, close all the doors and items plugged into the accessory The ignition switch will return to turn the key to ON/RUN and power outlets. This position unlocks ON/RUN for driving. the ignition and steering wheel. then back to LOCK/OFF. Use this position if the vehicle must All these features will work when be pushed or towed. the key is in the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY positions. 2-22 Features and Controls

Starting the Engine The vehicle has a Notice: Cranking the engine for Computer-Controlled long periods of time, by returning Move the shift lever to P (Park) or Cranking System. This feature the key to the START position N (Neutral). The engine will not start assists in starting the engine immediately after cranking has in any other position. To restart the and protects components. ended, can overheat and damage engine when the vehicle is already If the ignition key is turned to the cranking motor, and drain the moving, use N (Neutral) only. the START position, and battery. Wait at least 15 seconds Notice: Do not try to shift to then released when the engine between each try, to let the P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. begins cranking, the engine cranking motor cool down. If you do, you could damage will continue cranking for a 2. If the engine does not start the transmission. Shift to P (Park) few seconds or until the vehicle after 5-10 seconds, especially only when the vehicle is stopped. starts. If the engine does not in very cold weather (below 0°F start and the key is held in or −18°C), it could be ﬂooded Starting Procedure START, cranking will be stopped with too much gasoline. 1. With your foot off the after 15 seconds to prevent Try pushing the accelerator accelerator pedal, turn the cranking motor damage. pedal all the way to the ﬂoor ignition to START. When the To prevent gear damage, this and holding it there as you hold engine starts, let go of the key. system also prevents cranking if the key in START for up to a The idle speed will slow down the engine is already running. maximum of 15 seconds. as the engine warms. Do not Engine cranking can be stopped Wait at least 15 seconds race the engine immediately after by turning the ignition switch between each try, to allow the starting it. Operate the engine to the ACC/ACCESSORY cranking motor to cool down. and transmission gently to allow or LOCK/OFF position. When the engine starts, let go the oil to warm up and lubricate of the key and accelerator. all moving parts. Features and Controls 2-23

If the vehicle starts briefly but Engine Coolant Heater then stops again, repeat these { CAUTION steps. This clears the extra The engine coolant heater can gasoline from the engine. Do not provide easier starting and better Plugging the cord into an race the engine immediately fuel economy during engine ungrounded outlet could cause an after starting it. Operate the warm-up in cold weather conditions electrical shock. Also, the wrong − engine and transmission gently at or below 0°F ( 18°C). Vehicles kind of extension cord could until the oil warms up and with an engine coolant heater should overheat and cause a fire. You lubricates all moving parts. be plugged in at least four hours could be seriously injured. Plug before starting. Some models the cord into a properly grounded Notice: The engine is designed may have an internal thermostat three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. to work with the electronics in the cord which will prevent If the cord will not reach, use a in the vehicle. If you add electrical engine coolant heater operation at heavy-duty three-prong extension parts or accessories, you could temperatures above 0°F (−18°C). change the way the engine cord rated for at least 15 amps. operates. Before adding electrical To Use the Engine Coolant equipment, check with your Heater 4. Before starting the engine, be dealer/retailer. If you do not, 1. Turn off the engine. sure to unplug and store the the engine might not perform cord as it was before to keep it properly. Any resulting damage 2. Open the hood and unwrap the away from moving engine would not be covered by the electrical cord. The cord is parts. If you do not, it could be vehicle warranty. located on the driver side of the damaged. engine compartment. It is routed around the windshield The length of time the heater should washer fluid reservoir. remain plugged in depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer 3. Plug the cord into a normal, in the area where you will be grounded 110-volt AC outlet. parking the vehicle for the best advice on this. 2-24 Features and Controls

Automatic Transmission control system. You must fully apply { CAUTION the regular brake ﬁrst and then Operation press the shift lever button before The automatic transmission has a It is dangerous to get out of the shifting from P (Park) when the shift lever located on the console vehicle if the shift lever is not fully ignition key is in ON/RUN. If you between the seats. in P (Park) with the parking brake cannot shift out of P (Park), ﬁrmly set. The vehicle can roll. ease pressure on the shift lever, Do not leave the vehicle when the then push the shift lever all the way engine is running unless you have into P (Park) as you maintain to. If you have left the engine brake application. Then press the shift lever button and move the shift running, the vehicle can move lever into another gear. See suddenly. You or others could be Shifting Out of Park on page 2-29. injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on R (Reverse): Use this gear to fairly level ground, always set the back up. parking brake and move the shift Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into while the vehicle is moving Park on page 2-28. If you are forward could damage the pulling a trailer, see Towing a transmission. The repairs would P (Park): This position locks the Trailer on page 4-26. front wheels. It is the best position not be covered by the vehicle to use when starting the engine warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) because the vehicle cannot move Make sure the shift lever is fully only after the vehicle is stopped. easily. in P (Park) before starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock Features and Controls 2-25

To rock the vehicle back and forth Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) Notice: If the vehicle seems to to get out of snow, ice or sand or N (Neutral) with the engine accelerate slowly or not shift without damaging the transmission, running at high speed may gears when you go faster, and you see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in damage the transmission. The continue to drive the vehicle that Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on repairs would not be covered by way, you could damage the page 4-17. the vehicle warranty. Be sure the transmission. Have the vehicle engine is not running at high serviced right away. You can N (Neutral): In this position, the speed when shifting the vehicle. drive in L (Low) when you are engine does not connect with driving less than 35 mph (56 km/h) the wheels. To restart the engine D (Drive): This position is for and D (Drive) for higher speeds when the vehicle is already moving, normal driving. It provides the best until then. use N (Neutral) only. Also, use fuel economy. If you need more N (Neutral) when the vehicle power for passing, and you are: L (Low): This position gives you is being towed. • Going less than 35 mph access to gear ranges. This provides (56 km/h), push the accelerator more engine braking but lower fuel { CAUTION pedal about halfway down. economy than D (Drive). You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep • Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or snow or mud. Shifting into a drive gear while the more, push the accelerator all engine is running at high speed is the way down. dangerous. Unless your foot is ﬁrmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed. 2-26 Features and Controls

Electronic Range Select Displays (With DIC Buttons) on Automatic Engine Grade braking is (ERS) Mode page 3-45 or DIC Operation and not available when the ERS is active. Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on It is available in D (Drive) for both ERS mode allows you to choose page 3-50 for more information. normal and Tow/Haul mode. the top-gear limit of the transmission The number displayed in the DIC While using the ERS, cruise control and the vehicle’s speed while is the highest gear that the and the tow/haul mode can be used. driving down hill or towing a trailer. transmission will be allowed to See Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-26 The vehicle has an electronic shift operate in. This means that all gears for more information. position indicator within the below that number are available. instrument panel cluster. When using For example, when 4 (Fourth) is Tow/Haul Mode the ERS Mode a number will display shown next to the L, 1 (First) next to the L, indicating the current through 4 (Fourth) gears are _ (Tow/Haul): The vehicle may gear that has been selected. automatically shifted by the vehicle. have a Tow/Haul mode. To use this feature: The transmission will not shift into 5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) button is The button is located on the 1. Move the shift lever to L (Low). used or you shift back into D (Drive). instrument panel under the climate 2. Press the plus/minus button controls. located on the shift lever, to While in L (Low), the transmission will prevent shifting to a lower Push the button to activate the increase or decrease the gear system. Push it again to deactivate range available. gear range if the engine speed is too high. You have a brief period of the system. You can use this When you shift from D (Drive) to time to slow the vehicle. If vehicle feature to assist when towing or L (Low), the transmission will shift to speed is not reduced within the time hauling a heavy load. a pre-determined lower gear range. allowed, the lower gear range shift When Tow/Haul is activated the The highest gear available for this will not be completed. You must Tow/Haul symbol will come on the pre-determined range is displayed further slow the vehicle, then press instrument panel cluster. See next to the L in the DIC. See Driver the − (Minus) button to the desired “Tow/Haul Mode” under Towing a Information Center (DIC) on lower gear range. Trailer on page 4-26 for more page 3-44 and DIC Operation and information. Features and Controls 2-27

Automatic Engine Grade Parking Brake Notice: Driving with the parking Braking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear Automatic Engine Grade Braking or damage to brake system parts. assists when driving on a downhill Make sure that the parking brake grade. It maintains vehicle speed by is fully released and the brake automatically implementing a shift warning light is off before driving. schedule that uses the engine and the transmission to slow the vehicle. To release the parking brake, hold The system will automatically the regular brake pedal down, command downshifts to reduce then push down momentarily on the vehicle speed, until the brake pedal parking brake pedal until you feel is no longer being pressed. the pedal release. Slowly pull your foot up off the park brake While in the Electronic Range pedal. If the parking brake is Select (ERS) mode, grade braking To set the parking brake, hold the not released when you begin to is deactivated, allowing the driver drive, the brake system warning light to select a range and limiting regular brake pedal down, then push the parking brake pedal down. will be on and a chime will sound the highest gear available. Grade warning you that the parking braking is available for normal If the ignition is on, the brake system brake is still on. driving and in Tow/Haul mode. warning light will come on. See If you are towing a trailer and are See Automatic Transmission Brake System Warning Light on page 3-36. parking on a hill, see Towing a Operation on page 2-24. Trailer on page 4-26. 2-28 Features and Controls

Shifting Into Park 3. Turn the ignition key to If you have to leave the vehicle LOCK/OFF. with the engine running, be sure the vehicle is in P (Park) and { CAUTION 4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave the vehicle the parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you have It can be dangerous to get out of with the ignition key in your hand, the vehicle is in P (Park). moved the shift lever into P (Park), the vehicle if the shift lever is not hold the regular brake pedal down. fully in P (Park) with the parking Then, see if you can move the brake firmly set. The vehicle can Leaving the Vehicle with the Engine Running shift lever away from P (Park) roll. If you have left the engine without first pushing the button. running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be { CAUTION If you can, it means that the shift injured. To be sure the vehicle will lever was not fully locked in P (Park). not move, even when you are on It can be dangerous to leave the fairly level ground, use the steps vehicle with the engine running. Torque Lock that follow. If you are pulling a The vehicle could move suddenly Torque lock is when the weight of trailer, see Towing a Trailer on if the shift lever is not fully in the vehicle puts too much force page 4-26. P (Park) with the parking brake on the parking pawl in the firmly set. And, if you leave the transmission. This happens when 1. Hold the brake pedal down vehicle with the engine running, parking on a hill and shifting and set the parking brake. it could overheat and even catch the transmission into P (Park) is See Parking Brake on page 2-27 fire. You or others could be not done properly and then it for more information. injured. Do not leave the vehicle is difficult to shift out of P (Park). 2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) with the engine running. by holding in the button on the shift lever and pushing the shift lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle. Features and Controls 2-29

To prevent torque lock, set the The shift lock release is always If you still cannot move the shift parking brake and then shift functional except in the case of lever from P (Park), see your into P (Park). To ﬁnd out how, an uncharged or low voltage dealer/retailer. see “Shifting Into Park” listed (less than 9 volt) battery. previously. If the vehicle has an uncharged Parking Over Things If torque lock does occur, your battery or a battery with low voltage, That Burn vehicle may need to be pushed try charging or jump starting the uphill by another vehicle to relieve battery. See Jump Starting on { CAUTION the parking pawl pressure, so page 5-30 for more information. you can shift out of P (Park). To shift out of P (Park): Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under the 1. Apply the brake pedal. Shifting Out of Park vehicle and ignite. Do not park The vehicle is equipped with an 2. Press the shift lever button. over papers, leaves, dry grass, or electronic shift lock release system. 3. Move the shift lever to the other things that can burn. The shift lock release is designed to: desired position. • Prevent ignition key removal If you still are unable to shift out unless the shift lever is in P (Park) of P (Park): with the shift lever button fully 1. Fully release the shift lever released, and button. • Prevent movement of the shift 2. While holding down the brake lever out of P (Park), unless pedal, press the shift lever the ignition is in ON/RUN or button again. ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is applied. 3. Move the shift lever to the desired position. 2-30 Features and Controls

Engine Exhaust Running the Vehicle CAUTION (Continued) { While Parked CAUTION • The vehicle’s exhaust system It is better not to park with the has been modified, damaged engine running. But if you ever have Engine exhaust contains Carbon or improperly repaired. to, here are some things to know. Monoxide (CO) which cannot be There are holes or openings seen or smelled. Exposure to CO • can cause unconsciousness and in the vehicle body from { CAUTION damage or after-market even death. modifications that are not Idling a vehicle in an enclosed Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: completely sealed. area with poor ventilation is • The vehicle idles in areas If unusual fumes are detected or dangerous. Engine exhaust may with poor ventilation (parking if it is suspected that exhaust is enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust garages, tunnels, deep snow coming into the vehicle: contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) that may block underbody • Drive it only with the windows which cannot be seen or smelled. airflow or tail pipes). completely down. It can cause unconsciousness The exhaust smells or and even death. Never run the • • Have the vehicle repaired sounds strange or different. engine in an enclosed area that immediately. • The exhaust system leaks has no fresh air ventilation. due to corrosion or damage. Never park the vehicle with the For more information, see Engine engine running in an enclosed Exhaust on page 2-30. (Continued) area such as a garage or a building that has no fresh air ventilation. Features and Controls 2-31

{ Mirrors Automatic Dimming CAUTION Rearview Mirror It can be dangerous to get out of Manual Rearview Mirror The vehicle may have an automatic the vehicle if the automatic Adjust the inside rearview mirror dimming inside rearview mirror. transmission shift lever is not fully to see clearly behind your vehicle. ® in P (Park) with the parking brake Vehicles with OnStar have Hold the mirror in the center to move three additional control buttons for ﬁrmly set. The vehicle can roll. it up or down and side to side. the OnStar® system. See your Do not leave the vehicle when the Use the day/night adjustment to help dealer/retailer for more information engine is running unless you have prevent glare from the headlamps about OnStar® and how to subscribe to. If you have left the engine behind you. Move the lever to the to it. See OnStar¨ System on running, the vehicle can move right for nighttime use and to page 2-42 for more information about suddenly. You or others could be the left for daytime use. the services OnStar® provides. injured. To be sure the vehicle will ® Vehicles with OnStar have O not move, even when you are on three additional control buttons (On/Off): Press to turn the fairly level ground, always set the located at the bottom of the mirror. dimming feature on or off. parking brake and move the shift See your dealer/retailer for more The vehicle may also have a Rear lever to P (Park). information about OnStar and ¨ Vision Camera (RVC). See Rear how to subscribe to it. See OnStar Vision Camera (RVC) on page 2-37 Follow the proper steps to be System on page 2-42 for more for more information. sure the vehicle will not move. information on the services OnStar See Shifting Into Park on page 2-28. provides. If the vehicle has RVC, the O button If parking on a hill and pulling a will not be available. trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-26. 2-32 Features and Controls

Automatic Dimming Mirror Outside Power Mirrors 3. Adjust each outside mirror so Operation that a little of the vehicle and the area behind it can be seen. Automatic dimming reduces the glare from the headlamps of 4. Press either (A) or (B) again to the vehicle behind you. The dimming deselect the mirror. feature comes on and the indicator Manually fold the mirrors inward to light illuminates each time the prevent damage when going ignition is turned to start. through an automatic car wash. Cleaning the Mirror To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward, Do not spray glass cleaner directly to return it to the original position. on the mirror. Use a soft towel dampened with water. Using hood-mounted air deflectors and add-on convex mirror Controls for the outside power attachments could decrease mirror mirrors are located on the driver performance. door armrest. Turn Signal Indicator To adjust each mirror: The vehicle may have a turn signal 1. Press (A) or (B) to select the indicator lamp that is built into driver or passenger side mirror. the mirror housing. The turn signal 2. Press one of the four arrows lamp flashes with the use of the located on the control pad to vehicle’s turn signal and hazard adjust the mirror. flashers. Features and Controls 2-33

Outside Power Foldaway Resetting the Power Foldaway Automatic Dimming Feature Mirrors Mirrors The driver outside mirror adjusts for Reset the power foldaway mirrors if: the glare of the headlamps behind you. See Automatic Dimming • The mirrors are accidentally Rearview Mirror on page 2-31 for obstructed while folding. information on how to turn this • They are accidentally manually feature on. folded/unfolded. Turn Signal Indicator • The mirrors vibrate at normal driving speeds. The vehicle may have a turn signal indicator lamp that is built into the Fold and unfold the mirrors one time mirror housing. The turn signal lamp using the mirror controls to reset ﬂashes with the use of the vehicle’s them to their normal position. turn signal and hazard ﬂashers. A popping noise may be heard during the resetting of the power Vehicles with outside power foldaway mirrors. This sound foldaway mirrors have the controls is normal after a manual folding located on the driver door armrest. operation. Mirror Adjustment 1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out to the driving position. 2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded position. 2-34 Features and Controls

Park Tilt Mirrors Outside Convex Mirror Object Detection If the vehicle has the memory Systems package, the outside mirrors have a { CAUTION park tilt feature. This feature tilts Ultrasonic Rear Parking the outside mirrors to a preselected A convex mirror can make things position when the vehicle is in (like other vehicles) look farther Assist (URPA) R (Reverse). This allows the driver away than they really are. If you For vehicles with the Ultrasonic to view the curb for parallel parking. cut too sharply into the right lane, Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, The passenger and/or driver you could hit a vehicle on the it operates at speeds less than mirror returns to its original position right. Check the inside mirror or 5 mph (8 km/h), and assists the when the vehicle is shifted out of glance over your shoulder before driver with parking and avoiding R (Reverse), or the ignition is changing lanes. objects while in R (Reverse). turned off or to OFF/LOCK. The sensors on the rear bumper are The passenger side mirror is convex used to detect the distance to an This feature can be turned on or off object up to 8 feet (2.5 m) behind through the Driver Information shaped. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from the vehicle, and at least 10 inches Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle (25.4 cm) off the ground. Customization (With DIC Buttons) the driver seat. on page 3-65 and Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 1-6 for more Outside Heated Mirrors information. For vehicles with heated mirrors: < (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the mirrors. See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3-22 for more information. Features and Controls 2-35

How the System Works { CAUTION URPA comes on automatically The Ultrasonic Rear Parking when the shift lever is moved into Assist (URPA) system does not R (Reverse). The rear display briefly replace driver vision. It cannot illuminates to indicate the system detect: is working. • objects that are below the URPA operates only at speeds less bumper, underneath the than 5 mph (8 km/h). If the vehicle vehicle, or if they are too is above this speed, the red light on close or far from the vehicle the rear display flashes. • children, pedestrians, To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) off the bicyclists, or pets. The display is located in the ground and below liftgate level. If you do not use proper care headliner and can be seen by Objects must also be within 8 feet before and while backing; vehicle looking over your right shoulder. (2.5 m) from the rear bumper. damage, injury, or death could URPA uses three color-coded lights This distance may be less during occur. Even with URPA, always to provide distance and system warmer or humid weather. check behind the vehicle before information. backing up. While backing, be A single beep sounds the first time sure to look for objects and check an object is detected. Beeping the vehicle’s mirrors. may occur beginning at 23 inches (0.6 m). Beeping occurs for a short time when the vehicle is closer than 23 inches (0.6 m) and again at 1 foot (0.3 m) from the object. 2-36 Features and Controls

The following describes how the URPA display lights appear as the vehicle • A trailer was attached to the gets closer to a detected object: vehicle, or a bicycle or an object was hanging out of the Description English Metric liftgate during the last drive cycle, amber light 8 ft 2.5 m the red light may illuminate in the rear display. Once the amber/amber lights 40 in 1.0 m attached object is removed, amber/amber/red lights 23 in 0.6 m URPA will return to normal operation. amber/amber/red lights ﬂashing 1 ft 0.3 m • A tow bar is attached to the vehicle. The system can be disabled ASSIST OFF displays on the DIC through the Driver Information and a red light will be shown on the • The vehicle’s bumper is Center (DIC). See “Park Assist” rear URPA display when the shift damaged. Take the vehicle to under DIC Operation and Displays lever is moved into R (Reverse). your dealer/retailer to repair (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-45 This may occur under the following the system. or DIC Operation and Displays conditions: • Other conditions may affect (Without DIC Buttons) on page 3-50 • The driver disables the system. system performance, such for more information. as vibrations from a jackhammer • The ultrasonic sensors are When the System Does Not or the compression of air not clean. Keep the vehicle’s rear brakes on a very large truck. Seem to Work Properly bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, If the URPA system does not ice and slush. For cleaning If the system is still disabled, after activate due to a temporary instructions, see Washing Your driving forward at least 15 mph condition, the message PARK Vehicle on page 5-87. (25 km/h), take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer. Features and Controls 2-37

Rear Vision Vehicles Without Navigation Camera (RVC) CAUTION (Continued) System The vehicle may have a Rear Vision Do not back the vehicle by only The rear vision camera system is Camera system. Read this entire looking at the rear vision camera designed to help the driver when backing up by displaying a view section before using it. screen, or use the screen during of the area behind the vehicle. When longer, higher speed backing the key is in the ON/RUN position { CAUTION maneuvers or where there could and the driver shifts the vehicle be cross-traffic. Your judged into R (Reverse), the video image The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) distances using the screen will automatically appears on the system does not replace driver differ from actual distances. inside rear view mirror. Once the vision. RVC does not: So if you do not use proper care driver shifts out of R (Reverse), • Detect objects that are before backing up, you could hit a the video image automatically outside the camera’s ﬁeld of vehicle, child, pedestrian, bicyclist, disappears from the inside rearview view, below the bumper, or or pet, resulting in vehicle mirror. underneath the vehicle. damage, injury, or death. Even Turning the Rear Vision Camera • Detect children, pedestrians, though the vehicle has the RVC System Off or On bicyclists, or pets. system, always check carefully before backing up by checking To turn off the rear vision camera (Continued) behind and around the vehicle. system, press and hold z, located on the inside rearview mirror, until the left indicator light turns off. The rear vision camera display is now disabled. 2-38 Features and Controls

To turn the rear vision camera Turning the Rear Vision Camera system on again, press and hold z System On or Off until the left indicator light illuminates. To turn the rear vision camera The rear vision camera system system on or off: display is now enabled and the display will appear in the mirror 1. Shift into P (Park). normally. 2. Press the MENU button to enter Vehicles With Navigation the conﬁgure menu options, then System press the MENU hard key to select Display or touch the The rear vision camera system Display screen button. 4. Select the Video screen button. is designed to help the driver when 3. Select the Rear Camera Options When the Video screen button is backing up by displaying a view highlighted the RVC system is on. of the area behind the vehicle. screen button. The Rear Camera When the driver shifts the vehicle Options screen displays. The delay that is received after into R (Reverse), the video image shifting out of R (Reverse) is automatically appears on the approximately 10 seconds. navigation screen. Once the The delay can be cancelled by driver shifts out of R (Reverse), performing one of the following: the navigation screen will go back • Pressing a hard key on the to the last screen that had been navigation system. displayed, after a delay. • Shifting in to P (Park). • Reach a vehicle speed of 5 mph (8 km/h). Features and Controls 2-39

There is a message on the rear Symbols To turn the symbols on or off: vision camera screen that states The navigation system may have a 1. Make sure that URPA has not “Check Surroundings for Safety”. feature that lets the driver view been disabled. Adjusting the Brightness and symbols on the navigation screen 2. Shift into P (Park). Contrast of the Screen while using the rear vision camera. The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist 3. Press the MENU hard key to To adjust the brightness and (URPA) system must not be enter the conﬁgure menu contrast of the screen, press the disabled to use the caution symbols. options, then press the MENU MENU button while the rear vision If URPA has been disabled and hard key repeatedly until Display camera image is on the display. the symbols have been turned on, is selected or touch the Display Any adjustments made will the Rear Parking Assist Symbols screen button. only affect the rear vision camera Unavailable error message may 4. Select the Rear Camera Options screen. display. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking screen button. The Rear Camera Assist (URPA) on page 2-34. ] (Brightness): Touch the + (plus) Options screen will display. or – (minus) screen buttons to The symbols appear when an object 5. Touch the Symbols screen increase or decrease the brightness has been detected by the URPA button. The screen button will be of the screen. system. The symbol may cover the highlighted when on. object when viewing the navigation _ (Contrast): Touch the + (plus) screen. or – (minus) screen buttons to increase or decrease the contrast of the screen. 2-40 Features and Controls

Rear Vision Camera Error Rear Vision Camera Location The following illustration shows Messages the ﬁeld of view that the camera provides. Service Rear Vision Camera System: This message can display when the system is not receiving information it requires from other vehicle systems. If any other problem occurs or if a problem persists, see your dealer/retailer.

The camera is located above the license plate. The area displayed by the camera is limited and does not display objects that are close to either corner or under the bumper. The area displayed can vary depending on vehicle orientation or road conditions. The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance. A. View displayed by the camera. B. Corner of the rear bumper. Features and Controls 2-41

When the System Does Not The rear vision camera system During any of these fault conditions, Seem To Work Properly display in the rearview mirror may the display will be blank and the turn off or not appear as expected indicator will continue to flash The rear vision camera system due to one of the following as long as the vehicle is in might not work properly or display a conditions. If this occurs the left R (Reverse) or until the conditions clear image if: indicator light on the mirror will flash. return to normal. • The RVC is turned off. See • A slow flash may indicate a Pressing and holding z when the “Turning the Rear Camera System loss of video signal, or no On or Off” earlier in this section. left indicator light is flashing will video signal present during the turn off the video display along with • It is dark. reverse cycle. the left indicator light. • The sun or the beam of headlights • A fast flash may indicate that the is shining directly into the display has been on for the camera lens. maximum allowable time during a • Ice, snow, mud, or anything else reverse cycle, or the display has builds up on the camera lens. reached an Over Temperature Clean the lens, rinse it with water, limit. and wipe it with a soft cloth. The fast flash conditions are used to protect the video device from • The back of the vehicle is in an high temperature conditions. accident, the position and Once conditions return to normal mounting angle of the camera can the device will reset and the green change or the camera can be indicator will stop flashing. affected. Be sure to have the camera and its position and mounting angle checked at your dealer/retailer. • There are extreme temperature changes. 2-42 Features and Controls

OnStar® System vehicles. OnStar Turn-by-Turn For more information visit Navigation service, with one trial onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca route, is available on most vehicles. (Canada), or press the OnStar Press the OnStar button to have button to speak with an advisor. an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Not all OnStar services are available Service. on all vehicles. To check if this OnStar service is provided subject vehicle is able to provide the OnStar uses several innovative to the OnStar Terms and Conditions services described below, or for a technologies and live advisors to included in the OnStar Subscriber full description of OnStar services provide a wide range of safety, glove box literature. and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s Guide in the glove security, information, and Some services such as Remote box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) or convenience services. If the airbags Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle onstar.ca (Canada), contact deploy, the system is designed to Location Assistance may not be OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR make an automatic call to OnStar available until the owner of the (1-888-466-7827) or TTY Emergency advisors who can vehicle registers with OnStar. 1-877-248-2080, or press the request emergency services be sent After the ﬁrst prepaid year, contact OnStar button to speak with an to your location. If the keys are OnStar to select a monthly or OnStar advisor 24 hours a locked in the vehicle, call OnStar annual subscription payment plan. day, 7 days a week. at 1-888-4-ONSTAR to have a If a payment plan is not selected, signal sent to unlock the doors. the OnStar system and all services, OnStar Hands-Free Calling, including airbag notiﬁcation and including 30 trial minutes good for emergency services, may be 60 days, is available on most deactivated and no longer available. Features and Controls 2-43

OnStar Services Available with OnStar Services Included with plan in Canada, depending on the Safe & Sound Plan Directions & Connections Plan eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar Owner’s Guide in • Automatic Notification of • All Safe and Sound Plan Services the vehicle’s glove box, visit Airbag Deployment • OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation onstar.com or onstar.ca, or speak • Advanced Automatic Crash (If equipped) or Driving with an OnStar advisor by pressing Notification (AACN) (If equipped) Directions - Advisor delivered the OnStar button or calling • Link to Emergency Services • RideAssist 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827). • Roadside Assistance • Information and Convenience OnStar Turn-by-Turn • Stolen Vehicle Location Services Navigation Assistance OnStar Hands-Free Calling Vehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation system • Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows Alert can provide voice-guided driving eligible OnStar subscribers to directions. Press the OnStar button • OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email make and receive calls using voice to have an OnStar advisor locate • GM Goodwrench On Demand commands. Hands-Free Calling a business or address and download Diagnostics is fully integrated into the vehicle, driving directions to the vehicle. and can be used with OnStar Voice-guided directions to the • OnStar Hands-Free Calling with Pre-Paid Minute Packages. Most desired destination will play 30 trial minutes vehicles include 30 trial minutes through the audio system speakers. • OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only) good for 60 days. Hands-Free See the OnStar Owner’s Guide Calling can also be linked to a for more information. Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a Bell Mobility service 2-44 Features and Controls

OnStar Virtual Advisor How OnStar Service Works a place where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of The OnStar system can record and area has coverage, network capacity OnStar Hands-Free Calling that uses transmit vehicle information. This and reception when the service is minutes to access location-based information is automatically sent to needed, and technology that is weather, local traffic reports, and an OnStar Call Center when the compatible with the OnStar service. stock quotes. Press the phone button OnStar button is pressed, the Not all services are available and give a few simple voice emergency button is pressed, or if everywhere, particularly in remote or commands to browse through the the airbags or AACN system deploy. enclosed areas, or at all times. various topics. See the OnStar This information usually includes the Owner’s Guide for more information. vehicle’s GPS location and, in the Location information about This feature is only available in the event of a crash, additional the vehicle is only available if the continental U.S. information regarding the crash that GPS satellite signals are the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the unobstructed and available. OnStar Steering Wheel direction from which the vehicle was The vehicle must have a working Controls hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature electrical system, including adequate of OnStar Hands-Free Calling is This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute battery power, for the OnStar used, the vehicle also sends OnStar button that can be used to equipment to operate. There are the vehicle’s GPS location so they interact with OnStar Hands-Free other problems OnStar cannot can provide services where it is Calling. See Audio Steering Wheel control that may prevent OnStar from located. Controls on page 3-125 for more providing OnStar service at any information. OnStar service cannot work unless particular time or place. Some On some vehicles, the mute button the vehicle is in a place where examples are damage to important can be used to dial numbers into OnStar has an agreement with a parts of the vehicle in a crash, hills, voice mail systems, or to dial phone wireless service provider for service tall buildings, tunnels, weather or extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s in that area. OnStar service also wireless phone network congestion. Guide for more information. cannot work unless the vehicle is in Features and Controls 2-45

Your Responsibility Universal Home This device complies with Increase the volume of the radio if RSS-210 of Industry Canada. the OnStar advisor cannot be heard. Remote System Operation is subject to the If the light next to the OnStar The Universal Home Remote following two conditions: buttons is red, the system may not System provides a way to 1. This device may not cause be functioning properly. Press replace up to three hand-held interference. the OnStar button and request a Radio-Frequency (RF) transmitters 2. This device must accept any vehicle diagnostic. If the light used to activate devices such interference received, including appears clear (no light is appearing), as garage door openers, security interference that may cause your OnStar subscription has systems, and home lighting. undesired operation of the expired and all services have been This device complies with Part 15 of device. deactivated. Press the OnStar the FCC Rules. Operation is subject button to conﬁrm that the OnStar Changes or modiﬁcations to this to the following two conditions: equipment is active. system by other than an authorized 1. This device may not cause service facility could void harmful interference. authorization to use this equipment. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 2-46 Features and Controls

Universal Home Remote Do not use the Universal Home When programming a garage door, Remote with any garage door park outside of the garage. Park System Operation opener that does not have the stop directly in line with and facing and reverse feature. This includes the garage door opener motor-head any garage door opener model or gate motor-head. Be sure that manufactured before April 1, 1982. people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate that is being Read the instructions completely programmed. before attempting to program the Universal Home Remote. It is recommended that a new Because of the steps involved, battery be installed in your If there is one triangular Light it may be helpful to have another hand-held transmitter for quicker Emitting Diode (LED) indicator light person available to assist you in the and more accurate transmission of above the Universal Home Remote programming the Universal Home the radio-frequency signal. buttons, follow the instructions Remote. below. Programming the Universal Keep the original hand-held This system provides a way to Home Remote System transmitter for use in other vehicles replace up to three remote control as well as for future Universal For questions or help programming transmitters used to activate devices Home Remote programming. the Universal Home Remote such as garage door openers, It is also recommended that upon System, call 1-800-355-3515 or security systems, and home the sale of the vehicle, the go to www.homelink.com. automation devices. programmed Universal Home Programming a garage door opener Remote buttons should be erased involves time-sensitive actions, for security purposes. See “Erasing so read the entire procedure before Universal Home Remote Buttons” starting. Otherwise, the device later in this section. will time out and the procedure will have to be repeated. Features and Controls 2-47

To program up to three devices: 2. Hold the end of your hand-held 4. The indicator light on the transmitter about 1 to 3 inches Universal Home Remote (3 to 8 cm) away from the will flash slowly at first and then Universal Home Remote buttons rapidly after Universal Home while keeping the indicator light in Remote successfully receives view. The hand-held transmitter the frequency signal from was supplied by the manufacturer the hand-held transmitter. of your garage door opener Release both buttons. receiver (motor head unit). 5. Press and hold the newly-trained 3. At the same time, press and hold Universal Home Remote button both the Universal Home Remote and observe the indicator light. button to be used to control If the indicator light stays on the garage door and the continuously, the programming is hand-held transmitter button. 1. From inside the vehicle, press complete and the garage door Do not release the Universal should move when the Universal and hold down the two outside Home Remote button or buttons at the same time, Home Remote button is pressed the hand-held transmitter button and released. There is no releasing only when the until Step 4 has been completed. Universal Home Remote indicator need to continue programming light begins to flash, after Some entry gates and garage Steps 6 through 8. 20 seconds. This step will erase door openers may require If the Universal Home Remote the factory settings or all substitution of Step 3 with the indicator light blinks rapidly previously programmed buttons. procedure noted in “Gate for two seconds and then Operator and Canadian Do not hold down the buttons turns to a constant light, Programming” later in this continue with the programming for longer than 30 seconds section. and do not repeat this step to Steps 6 through 8. program the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons. 2-48 Features and Controls

It may be helpful to have another 8. Immediately return to the vehicle. Gate Operator and Canadian person assist with the remaining Firmly press and hold the Programming steps. Universal Home Remote button, chosen in Step 3 to control If you have questions or need help the garage door, for two seconds, programming the Universal and then release it. If the Home Remote System, call garage door does not move, 1-800-355-3515 or go to press and hold the same button www.homelink.com. a second time for two seconds, Canadian radio-frequency laws and then release it. Again, if require transmitter signals to time the door does not move, press out or quit after several seconds of and hold the same button a third transmission. This may not be 6. After Steps 1 through 5 have time for two seconds, and then long enough for Universal Home been completed, locate inside release. Remote to pick up the signal during the garage the garage door The Universal Home Remote programming. Similarly, some opener receiver (motor-head should now activate the U.S. gate operators are unit). Locate the “Learn” or garage door. manufactured to time out in the “Smart” button. The name and same manner. To program the remaining two color of the button may vary Universal Home Remote buttons, If you live in Canada, or you are by manufacturer. begin with Step 2 of “Programming having difficulty programming a gate 7. Firmly press and release the the Universal Home Remote operator or garage door opener “Learn” or “Smart” button. System.” Do not repeat Step 1, by using the “Programming After you press this button, as this will erase all previous Universal Home Remote” you will have 30 seconds programming from the Universal procedures, regardless of where to complete Step 8. Home Remote buttons. Features and Controls 2-49 you live, replace Step 3 under Erasing Universal Home Reprogramming a Single “Programming Universal Home Remote Buttons Universal Home Remote Remote” with the following: The programmed buttons should be Button Continue to press and hold the erased when the vehicle is sold To reprogram any of the three Universal Home Remote button or the lease ends. Universal Home Remote buttons, while you press and release every repeat the programming instructions To erase all programmed buttons on two seconds (cycle) the hand-held earlier in this section, beginning the Universal Home Remote device: transmitter button until the frequency with Step 2. signal has been successfully accepted by the Universal Home For help or information on the Remote. The Universal Home Universal Home Remote System, Remote indicator light will flash call the customer assistance phone slowly at first and then rapidly. number under Customer Assistance Proceed with Step 4 under Offices on page 7-5. “Programming Universal Home Remote” to complete. Using Universal Home Remote Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote button for at least half of a second. The indicator light will come on 1. Press and hold down the while the signal is being transmitted. two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds. 2. Release both buttons. 2-50 Features and Controls

Storage Areas Center Console Storage Second Row Center Console Glove Box Lift the glove box handle up to open it. Use the key to lock and unlock the glove box. Cupholders There are two cupholders, with removable liners, located in front of the center console. There may be cupholders located in the second row seat armrest. To access, pull the armrest down. There are additional Pull up on the lever, located on the cupholders located on each side of front of the center console armrest, For vehicles with a second row the third row seat and in each door. to slide it forward and backward. center console, open each area to There may be cupholders located at To open the armrest storage area, access the storage compartment the rear of the center console. press the button located on the front inside. To access, pull the handle down. of the armrest. There is additional storage under the armrest. Move the Instrument Panel Storage armrest all the way to the rear position, slide the cover back and This vehicle has an instrument remove the tray. panel storage area located above the radio. To open the cover, press the button. Features and Controls 2-51

Floor Mats { CAUTION If the floor mat has a snap retainer, Never open more than one of the a grommet in the driver side floor three latches at a time to help mat attaches to a hook on the floor avoid personal injury and damage of the vehicle to secure the floor to the console. mat. To remove the floor mat, pull the mat towards the rear of the vehicle until the grommet can be Notice: Slide the front console removed from the hook. as far forward as it will go before folding the second row console If the floor mat has a knob retainer, forward to help prevent damage a grommet in the floor mat to the consoles. attaches to a knob on the floor of To access the upper storage area, the vehicle to secure the floor press the upper button (B) and mat. To remove the floor mat, turn lift up. To access the lower storage the knob till it is aligned with the area, press the lower button (C) slot in the floor mat grommet and lift up. The top of the console and pull the floor mat up. To can be folded forward for increased reinstall, center the slot in the floor storage area. Lift up on handle mat grommet with the knob on on the rear of the console (A) and the floor and set the mat in place. pull forward. Then turn the knob until it is perpendicular to the slot in the grommet to lock the mat in place. 2-52 Features and Controls

Luggage Carrier If you have the luggage carrier, Rear Seat Armrest you can load things on top of your { vehicle. Crossrails are not standard Vehicles with a rear seat armrest, CAUTION on this vehicle and must be have two cupholders. Pull the purchased at your dealer/retailer. armrest down from the rear If something is carried on top seatback to access the cupholders. of the vehicle that is longer Notice: Loading cargo on or wider than the luggage the luggage carrier that weighs Convenience Net carrier — like paneling, plywood, more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or or a mattress — the wind can hangs over the rear or sides of Use the convenience net, located catch it while the vehicle is being the vehicle can damage the in the rear, to store small loads driven. This can cause a driver vehicle. Load cargo so that it as far forward as possible. The net should not be used to to lose control. The item being rests as far forward as possible store heavy loads. carried could be violently torn off, and against the side rails, making and this could cause a collision, sure to fasten it securely. and damage the vehicle. Items Do not exceed the maximum may be carried inside. Never vehicle capacity when loading your carry something longer or wider vehicle. For more information on than the luggage carrier on top of vehicle capacity and loading, the vehicle. see Loading the Vehicle on page 4-18. To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving, check to make sure the cargo is still securely fastened. Features and Controls 2-53

Cargo Cover Cargo Management There is an additional storage compartment on each side of the For vehicles with a cargo cover, System system. To open, unlatch and lift it can be used to cover items in This vehicle has one of these cargo the panel up. the rear of the vehicle. To install management systems located in To remove the cargo management the cover, place the loops on the rear of the vehicle. each corner of the cover on the system: four hooks in the rear of the 1. Open the cover. It remains open vehicle. The cover should be when lifted. stored securely when not in use. 2. Remove the side panels and Cargo Tie Downs place inside. 3. Loosen the retaining nuts on Four cargo tie-downs are located each side of the system by in the rear compartment of the turning them counterclockwise. vehicle. The tie-downs can be used to secure small loads. 4. Close the cover. 5. Pull up on the system by using Cargo Management System with the built in handles and remove a Removable Storage Area it from the vehicle.

To open, pull the handle toward the rear of the vehicle and lift the cover up. 2-54 Features and Controls

{ CAUTION Sunroof The vehicle may have a sunroof An improperly latched and closed over the front seats and a rear cargo cover, or cargo cover left in sunroof over the second row seats. the open position, could be The rear sunroof does not open. thrown about the vehicle during a The switches to operate the collision or sudden maneuver. front sunroof and rear sunshade Someone could be injured. are located on the headliner Be sure to return the cover to the above the rearview mirror. closed position and latch before The ignition must be in ON/RUN driving. If the cover is removed, or ACC/ACCESSORY to operate always store it outside of the the sunroof. See Ignition Positions Cargo Management System with on page 2-20. a Removable Cover vehicle. When it is replaced, always be sure that it is securely To remove the cargo management reattached. cover: 1. Open the cover. It remains open 3. Remove the cover from the when lifted. vehicle and store outside of the vehicle. 2. Pull the cover up making sure to unhook the hinges at the rear of the cover. Features and Controls 2-55

Press and release the front of the driver side switch to express-close the sunroof. The front sunshade must be opened and closed manually. Push up on the sunshade handle to open the sunshade. Notice: The rear sunshade could be damaged if you attempt to open or close it manually. Do not manually open or close the rear sunshade. Vent: From the closed position, To open the rear sunshade, press and hold the front of the driver located over the second row seats, side switch to vent the sunroof. press and release the rear of Press and hold the rear of the driver the passenger side switch. side switch to close the sunroof. Press and release the front of the switch to close the sunshade. Express-open/Express-close: From the closed position, press and release the rear of the driver side switch to express-open the sunroof. 2-56 Features and Controls

✍ NOTES Instrument Panel 3-1

Instrument Panel Warning Lights, Gages, Instrument Panel Brightness ...... 3-13 and Indicators Courtesy Lamps ...... 3-13 Warning Lights, Gages, Dome Lamps ...... 3-14 and Indicators ...... 3-30 Dome Lamp Override ...... 3-14 Instrument Panel Cluster ...... 3-31 ...... 3-14 Instrument Panel Overview Entry Lighting Speedometer and Delayed Entry Lighting ...... 3-14 Odometer ...... 3-32 Instrument Panel Overview .....3-4 ...... 3-15 ...... 3-5 Delayed Exit Lighting Tachometer ...... 3-32 Hazard Warning Flashers Parade Dimming ...... 3-15 Horn ...... 3-5 Safety Belt Reminders ...... 3-32 Reading Lamps ...... 3-15 Airbag Readiness Light ...... 3-33 Tilt and Telescopic Steering Electric Power Wheel ...... 3-6 Passenger Airbag Status Management ...... 3-15 Indicator ...... 3-34 Turn Signal/Multifunction Battery Run-Down Lever ...... 3-6 Charging System Light ...... 3-35 Protection ...... 3-16 Voltmeter Gage ...... 3-35 Turn and Lane-Change Accessory Power Outlet(s) ....3-17 Signals ...... 3-6 Brake System Warning Power Outlet 115 Volt Light ...... 3-36 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Alternating Current ...... 3-18 Changer ...... 3-7 Antilock Brake System Flash-to-Pass ...... 3-7 (ABS) Warning Light ...... 3-37 Climate Controls StabiliTrak® Indicator Light .....3-37 Windshield Wipers ...... 3-7 Climate Control System ...... 3-19 Windshield Washer ...... 3-8 Engine Coolant Temperature Dual Automatic Climate ...... 3-38 Rear Window Wiper/Washer ....3-9 ...... 3-22 Warning Light Control System Engine Coolant Cruise Control ...... 3-9 Outlet Adjustment ...... 3-27 Exterior Lamps ...... 3-11 Temperature Gage ...... 3-38 Rear Air Conditioning and Tire Pressure Light ...... 3-39 Delayed Headlamps ...... 3-12 Heating System ...... 3-28 Daytime Running Malfunction Rear Air Conditioning and Indicator Lamp ...... 3-39 Lamps (DRL)/Automatic Heating System and Headlamp System ...... 3-12 Oil Pressure Light ...... 3-42 Electronic Climate ...... 3-43 Fog Lamps ...... 3-13 ...... 3-29 Security Light Controls Fog Lamp Light ...... 3-43 3-2 Instrument Panel

Cruise Control Light ...... 3-43 Audio System(s) Highbeam On Light ...... 3-43 Audio System(s) ...... 3-74 Tow/Haul Mode Light ...... 3-43 Setting the Clock ...... 3-74 Fuel Gage ...... 3-44 Radio(s) ...... 3-75 Using an MP3 Driver Information (Radio with CD) ...... 3-92 Center (DIC) Using an MP3 Driver Information (Radio with CD and Center (DIC) ...... 3-44 DVD Player) ...... 3-97 DIC Operation and Displays XM Radio Messages ...... 3-102 (With DIC Buttons) ...... 3-45 Navigation/Radio System .....3-103 DIC Operation and Displays Bluetooth® ...... 3-103 (Without DIC Buttons) ...... 3-50 Rear Seat Entertainment DIC Compass ...... 3-54 (RSE) System ...... 3-114 DIC Warnings and Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ...... 3-123 Messages ...... 3-56 Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 3-125 DIC Vehicle Customization Audio Steering Wheel (With DIC Buttons) ...... 3-65 Controls ...... 3-125 Radio Reception ...... 3-126 Multi-Band Antenna ...... 3-127 Instrument Panel 3-3

✍ NOTES 3-4 Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel Overview Instrument Panel 3-5

The main components of the M. Audio Steering Wheel Controls Hazard Warning Flashers instrument panel are listed here: on page 3-125. | A. Outlet Adjustment on page 3-27. N. Hazard Warning Flashers on Hazard Warning Flasher: Press this button located on the instrument B. Turn Signal/Multifunction page 3-5. panel below the audio system, to Lever on page 3-6. O. Center Console Shift Lever. make the front and rear turn signal See “Console Shift Lever” under C. Instrument Panel Cluster on lamps flash on and off. This warns Shifting Into Park on page 2-28. page 3-31. others that you are having trouble. D. Driver Information Center (DIC) P. Rear Window Wiper/Washer Press again to turn the flashers off. on page 3-44. on page 3-9. Traction Control System (TCS) Disable Button The turn signals do not work while E. Instrument Panel Storage on (If Equipped). See StabiliTrak¨ the hazard warning flashers are on. page 2-50. System on page 4-5. Tow/Haul F. Audio System(s) on page 3-74. Mode on page 2-26 (If Equipped). Horn Navigation/Radio System on Power Liftgate on page 2-11 Press near or on the horn symbols page 3-103 (If Equipped). (If Equipped). on the steering wheel pad to G. Exterior Lamps on page 3-11. Q. Accessory Power Outlet(s) on sound the horn. H. Hood Release on page 5-11. page 3-17. I. Dome Lamp Override on R. Heated Seats on page 1-5. page 3-14. Instrument Panel S. Dual Automatic Climate Control Brightness on page 3-13. System on page 3-22. J. Cruise Control on page 3-9. T. Passenger Air Bag Status K. Tilt and Telescopic Steering Indicator. See Passenger Wheel on page 3-6. Sensing System on page 1-55. L. Horn on page 3-5. U. Glove Box on page 2-50. 3-6 Instrument Panel

Tilt and Telescopic Turn Signal/Multifunction Turn and Lane-Change Steering Wheel Lever Signals The steering wheel can be adjusted.

An arrow on the instrument panel cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change. The lever on the left side of the Move the lever all the way up or steering column includes the down to signal a turn. following: Raise or lower the lever until the G : Turn and Lane-Change arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change. Hold it there until the Signals lane change is completed. If the 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam lever is briefly pressed and released, The adjustment lever is located on Changer the turn signal flashes three times. the left side of the steering column. The lever returns to its starting N : Windshield Wipers position whenever it is released. Pull the lever down to move the steering wheel up or down and in L : Windshield Washer If after signaling a turn or lane or out. Pull the lever up to lock change the arrow flashes rapidly the steering wheel in place. Flash-to-Pass Feature. or does not come on, a signal bulb Information for these features is on might be burned out. Do not adjust the steering wheel the pages following. while driving. Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb For information on the headlamps, is not burned out, check the fuse. see Exterior Lamps on page 3-11. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-92. Instrument Panel 3-7

Turn Signal On Chime Flash-to-Pass 9 (Off): Turns the wipers off. If either one of the turn signals are With the turn signal lever in the 6 left on and the vehicle has been low-beam position, pull the lever (Delay): Adjusts the delay time. driven more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), toward you momentarily to switch The delay between wiping cycles a chime will sound. to high-beam, to signal that you are becomes shorter as the band going to pass. is moved to the top of the lever. Headlamp High/ If the headlamps are on, they will 1 (Low Speed): For steady wiping Low-Beam Changer return to low-beam when the lever is at low speed. released. 23Headlamp High/Low Beam 2 (High Speed): For steady wiping For vehicles with High Intensity at high speed. Changer: Push the turn signal/ Discharge (HID) headlamps, multifunction lever away from you the ﬂash-to-pass feature does not Clear ice and snow from the wiper to turn the high beams on. work while the Daytime Running blades before using them. If the Pull the lever towards you to return to Lamps (DRL) are on. blades are frozen to the windshield, low beams. gently loosen or thaw them. If they Windshield Wipers become damaged, install new blades or blade inserts. See Windshield The windshield wiper/washer lever Wiper Blade Replacement on is located on the right side of page 5-38. the steering column. Turn the band with the wiper symbol Heavy snow or ice can overload to control the windshield wipers. the wipers. A circuit breaker stops them until the motor cools. This indicator light turns on in 8 (Mist): Turn the band to mist the instrument panel cluster when for a single wiping cycle and then the high beam headlamps are on. release. The wipers stop after one wipe. Hold the band on 8 longer, for more wipe cycles. 3-8 Instrument Panel

Windshield Washer Heated Windshield Washer cycle can take up to 40 seconds to occur, depending on outside J For vehicles with the heated (Washer Fluid): Press the windshield washer fluid system, temperature. After the first wash/ button located at the end of the it helps to clear ice, snow, tree sap, wipe cycle, it can take up to turn signal/multifunction lever, to or bugs from the windshield. This 20 seconds for each of the remaining spray washer fluid on the windshield. feature only works with the front cycles. The system turns off The wipers clear the windshield and wiper system. automatically after four wipe cycles either stop or return to the preset or the button can be pressed again to speed. The ignition key must be in turn it off. ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN for Under certain outside temperature this to work. See Windshield Washer conditions, steam might flow out Fluid on page 5-26 Windshield of the washer nozzles for a short Washer Fluid. period of time before washer fluid { is sprayed. This is normal. CAUTION The button is located to the left HEATING WASH FLUID WASH of the steering column below the WIPES PENDING is displayed on In freezing weather, do not use instrument panel brightness the DIC when the washer system is your washer until the windshield is control knob. heating the fluid. WASHER FLUID warmed. Otherwise the washer Press the heated washer fluid button LOW ADD FLUID is displayed when fluid can form ice on the to activate the heated windshield the washer fluid is low. See DIC windshield, blocking your vision. washer fluid system. This activation Warnings and Messages on begins four heated wash/wipe page 3-56. WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID cycles. The first heated wash/wipe is displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the washer fluid is low. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56. Instrument Panel 3-9

Rear Window Cruise Control Wiper/Washer With cruise control, a speed of about The rear wiper and rear wash 25 mph (40 km/h) or more can be button is located on the instrument maintained without keeping your panel below the climate control foot on the accelerator. Cruise system. control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h). Z (Rear Wiper): Press to turn the When the brakes are applied, the rear wiper on and off. The wiper cruise control is disengaged. speed cannot be changed. Y (Wash): Press to spray washer { CAUTION fluid on the rear window. The window The cruise control buttons are wiper will also come on. Release the Cruise control can be dangerous located on left side of the steering button when enough fluid has been where you cannot drive safely at wheel. sprayed on the window. The rear a steady speed. So, do not use T wiper will run a few more cycles the cruise control on winding (On/Off): Press to turn cruise after it is released. If the rear wiper roads or in heavy traffic. control on and off. The indicator comes on when cruise control is on. function was already on, prior to Cruise control can be dangerous pressing the wash button, it stays on slippery roads. On such roads, + RES (Resume/Accelerate): on until the wiper button is pressed fast changes in tire traction can Press to make the vehicle accelerate again. cause excessive wheel slip, and or resume to a previously set speed. The rear window washer uses the you could lose control. Do not use SET– : Press to set the speed or same fluid that is in the windshield cruise control on slippery roads. make the vehicle decelerate. washer reservoir. See Windshield [ Washer Fluid on page 5-26. (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise control. 3-10 Instrument Panel

Setting Cruise Control Resuming a Set Speed Reducing Speed While Using Cruise control will not work if the If the cruise control is set at a Cruise Control parking brake is set, or if the master desired speed and then the brakes There are two ways to reduce the cylinder brake fluid level is low. are applied, the cruise control is vehicle speed while using cruise The cruise control light on the disengaged. But it does not need control: instrument panel cluster comes on to be reset. • Press and hold the SET– button after the cruise control has been Once the vehicle speed is 25 mph on the steering wheel until the set to the desired speed. (40 km/h) or greater, press the lower speed desired is reached, { +RES button on the steering wheel. then release it. CAUTION The vehicle returns to the previously • To slow down in very small set speed and stays there. amounts, press the SET– button If you leave your cruise control briefly. Each time this is done, on when you are not using cruise, Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control the vehicle goes about 1 mph you might hit a button and go into (1.6 km/h) slower. cruise when you do not want to. There are two ways to increase the You could be startled and even vehicle speed while using cruise Passing Another Vehicle While lose control. Keep the cruise control: Using Cruise Control control switch off until you want • Press and hold the +RES button Use the accelerator pedal to to use cruise control. on the steering wheel until the increase vehicle speed. When you desired speed is reached, take your foot off the pedal, the 1. Press the I button. then release it. vehicle will slow down to the previously set cruise speed. 2. Get up to the speed desired. • To increase vehicle speed in 3. Press and release the SET– small increments, press the button located on the steering +RES button briefly. Each time wheel. this is done, the vehicle goes 4. Take your foot off the about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster. accelerator. Instrument Panel 3-11

Using Cruise Control on Hills Exterior Lamps The exterior lamps control has four How well the cruise control will work positions: on hills depends upon the vehicle O (Off): Turns the automatic light speed, load, and the steepness of control on or off. the hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to step on the AUTO (Automatic): Automatically accelerator pedal to maintain the turns on the headlamps at normal vehicle speed. When going downhill, brightness, together with the you might have to brake or shift to a following: lower gear to keep the vehicle speed • Parking Lamps down. When the brakes are applied the cruise control is disengaged. • Taillamps Ending Cruise Control • License Plate Lamps • Instrument Panel Lights There are three ways to end cruise The exterior lamps control is located control: on the instrument panel to the left ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the • Step lightly on the brake pedal. of the steering wheel. parking lamps together with the • Press the [ button. It controls the following systems: following: • Headlamps • Taillamps • Press the T button. • Taillamps • License Plate Lamps Erasing Speed Memory • Parking Lamps • Instrument Panel Lights The cruise control set speed License Plate Lamps memory is erased when the cruise • control or the ignition is turned off. • Instrument Panel Lights • Fog Lamps (If Equipped) 3-12 Instrument Panel

2 (Headlamps): Turns on Delayed Headlamps Daytime Running the headlamps together with Delayed headlamps provide a Lamps (DRL)/Automatic the following lamps listed below. period of exterior lighting as you Headlamp System A warning chime sounds if the leave the area around your vehicle. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can driver door is opened when the This feature is activated when the make it easier for others to see the ignition switch is off and the headlamps are on due to the front of your vehicle during the day. headlamps are on. automatic headlamps control feature, Fully functional daytime running • Parking Lamps and when the ignition is turned off. lamps are required on all vehicles The headlamps remain on until the • Taillamps ﬁrst sold in Canada. exterior lamps control is moved to • License Plate Lamps the parking lamps position or until The DRL system makes either the • Instrument Panel Lights the pre-selected delayed headlamp low-beam headlamps come on at a lighting period has ended. reduced brightness or the DRL lights, # (Fog Lamps) (If Equipped): for vehicles with High Intensity If the ignition is turned off with the Discharge (HID) headlamps when Turns on the fog lamps. headlamps switch in the parking the following conditions are met: See Fog Lamps on page 3-13. lamps or headlamps position, the delayed headlamps cycle will not • The ignition is in the ON/RUN occur. position. To disable the delayed headlamps • The exterior lamps control is feature or change the time of delay, in AUTO. see DIC Vehicle Customization (With • The engine is running. DIC Buttons) on page 3-65. Instrument Panel 3-13

When the DRL are on, the regular Fog Lamps Instrument Panel headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker, and other lamps will not be on. # (Fog Lamps): For vehicles Brightness The instrument panel and cluster with fog lamps, the button is located D (Instrument Panel Brightness): will also not be lit. on the exterior lamps control. The knob with this symbol on it is For vehicles with HID headlamps, The exterior lamps control is located located next to the exterior lamps if the DRL are on and the left or right on the instrument panel to the left control to the left of the steering turn signal lamp is turned on, the of the steering column. wheel. Push the knob in all the way left or right DRL will go off. The ignition must be in the ON/RUN until it extends out and then turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise The headlamps automatically position for the fog lamps to come on. to brighten or dim the lights. Push the change from DRL to the regular knob back in when ﬁnished. headlamps depending on the Press # to turn the fog lamps darkness of the surroundings. on or off. A light will come on in Courtesy Lamps The other lamps that come on the instrument panel cluster. with the headlamps will also When a door is opened, the come on. When the headlamps are changed courtesy lamps automatically to high-beam, the fog lamps come on. They make it easier When it is bright enough outside, also go off. the headlamps will go off and when entering and exiting the the DRL will come on. Some localities have laws that vehicle. The lamps can also be require the headlamps to be turned on manually by fully turning The regular headlamp system on along with the fog lamps. the instrument panel brightness should be turned on when needed. control clockwise. Do not cover the light sensor on The reading lamps, located on the top of the instrument panel because headliner above the rearview mirror, it works with the DRL. can be turned on or off independent of the automatic courtesy lamps, when the doors are closed. 3-14 Instrument Panel

Dome Lamps Entry Lighting Delayed Entry Lighting The dome lamps automatically For vehicles with courtesy lamps, Delayed entry lighting illuminates come on when a door is opened, they come on and stay on for a set the interior for a period of time after unless the dome lamp override time whenever the unlock symbol all the doors have been closed. button is pressed in. is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the The ignition must be off for delayed The lamps can also be turned on vehicle has one. entry lighting to work. Immediately and off by turning the instrument If a door is opened, the lamps stay after all the doors have been closed, panel brightness control clockwise on while it is open and then turn off the delayed entry lighting feature to the farthest position. automatically about 20 seconds after continues to work until one of the door is closed. If the unlock the following occurs: Dome Lamp Override symbol is pressed and no door is • The ignition is in ON/RUN. opened, the lamps turn off after The dome lamp override button is The doors are locked. about 20 seconds. • located next to the exterior lamps • An illumination period of about control. Entry lighting includes a feature called theater dimming. With theater 25 seconds has elapsed. The dome lamp override sets the dimming, the lamps do not turn off at If during the illumination period dome lamps to remain off or come on the end of the delay time. Instead, a door is opened, the timed automatically when a door is opened. they slowly dim and then go out. illumination period is canceled The delay time is canceled if the E (Dome Lamp Override): Press and the interior lamps remain on. ignition key is turned to ON/RUN the button in and the dome lamps or the power door lock switch is remain off when a door is opened. pressed. The lamps will dim Press the button again to return it right away. to the extended position so that the dome lamps come on when When the ignition is on, illuminated a door is opened. entry is inactive, which means the courtesy lamps will not come on unless a door is opened. Instrument Panel 3-15

Delayed Exit Lighting Parade Dimming When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is raised slightly This feature illuminates the interior Parade mode automatically prohibits to quickly bring the charge back up. for a period of time after the key the dimming of the instrument panel When the state of charge is high, the is removed from the ignition. displays during the daylight while voltage is lowered slightly to prevent the headlamps are on so that the The ignition must be off for delayed overcharging. If the vehicle has a displays are still able to be seen. exit lighting to work. When the voltmeter gage or a voltage key is removed, interior illumination display on the Driver Information activates and remains on until Reading Lamps Center (DIC), you may see the one of the following occurs: The vehicle has reading lamps that voltage move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an alert • The ignition is in ON/RUN. also act as the dome lamp. Press the button to turn them on and off. will be displayed. • The power door locks are The battery can be discharged at activated. Electric Power idle if the electrical loads are very • An illumination period of Management high. This is true for all vehicles. This 20 seconds has elapsed. is because the generator (alternator) The vehicle has Electric Power may not be spinning fast enough at If during the illumination period Management (EPM) that estimates a door is opened, the timed idle to produce all the power that is the battery’s temperature and needed for very high electrical loads. illumination period will be canceled state of charge. It then adjusts and the interior lamps will remain the voltage for best performance on because a door is open. and extended life of the battery. 3-16 Instrument Panel

A high electrical load occurs when Normally, these actions occur Battery Run-Down several of the following are on, in steps or levels, without being such as: headlamps, high beams, noticeable. In rare cases at the Protection fog lamps, rear window defogger, highest levels of corrective action, This feature helps prevent the climate control fan at high speed, this action may be noticeable to the battery from being drained, if the heated seats, engine cooling fans, driver. If so, a Driver Information interior courtesy lamps, reading/ trailer loads, and loads plugged into Center (DIC) message might be map lamps, visor vanity lamps or accessory power outlets. displayed, such as BATTERY trunk lamp are accidentally left on. SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY If any of these lamps are left on, EPM works to prevent excessive VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. they automatically turn off after discharge of the battery. It does this If this message is displayed, it is 10 minutes, if the ignition is off. by balancing the generator’s output recommended that the driver reduce The lamps will not come back on and the vehicle’s electrical needs. the electrical loads as much as again until one of the following It can increase engine idle speed to possible. See DIC Warnings and occurs: generate more power, whenever Messages on page 3-56. needed. It can temporarily reduce • The ignition is turned on. the power demands of some • The exterior lamps control is accessories. turned off, then on again. The headlamps will timeout after 10 minutes, if they are manually turned on with the ignition on or off. Instrument Panel 3-17

Accessory Power the battery. Power is always not be covered by the vehicle supplied to the outlets. Always warranty. Do not use equipment Outlet(s) unplug electrical equipment when exceeding maximum amperage The vehicle has three 12-volt not in use and do not plug in rating of 20 amperes. Check outlets which can be used to plug equipment that exceeds the with your dealer/retailer before in electrical equipment, such as a maximum 20 ampere rating. adding electrical equipment. cellular telephone, a compact disc Certain accessory plugs may When adding electrical equipment, player, etc. not be compatible to the accessory be sure to follow the proper The power outlets are located on the power outlet and could result in installation instructions included instrument panel below the climate blown vehicle and adapter fuses. with the equipment. controls, at the rear of the center If a problem is experienced, see console, and in the rear cargo area. your dealer/retailer for additional Notice: Improper use of the Lift the cover to access the outlet. information on the power accessory power outlet can cause damage Close the cover when not using the outlets. not covered by the warranty. outlet. Do not hang any type of Notice: Adding any electrical accessory or accessory bracket Notice: Leaving electrical equipment to the vehicle can from the plug because the equipment plugged in for an damage it or keep other power outlets are designed for extended period of time while components from working as accessory power plugs only. the vehicle is off will drain they should. The repairs would 3-18 Instrument Panel

Power Outlet 115 Volt An indicator light on the outlet turns The power outlet is not designed for on to show it is in use. The light the following electrical equipment Alternating Current comes on when the ignition is in and may not work properly if these For vehicles with this power outlet, ON/RUN and equipment requiring items are plugged into the power it can be used to plug in electrical less than 150 watts is plugged into outlet: equipment that uses a maximum the outlet, and no system fault is • Equipment with high limit of 150 watts. detected. initial peak wattage such as: The indicator light does not come compressor-driven refrigerators on when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF and electric power tools. or if no equipment is plugged into • Other equipment requiring the outlet. an extremely stable If equipment is connected using power supply such as: more than 150 watts or a system microcomputer-controlled fault is detected, a protection circuit electric blankets, touch sensor shuts off the power supply and the lamps, etc. indicator light turns off. To reset See High Voltage Devices and the circuit, unplug the item and Wiring on page 5-91. plug it back in or turn the Remote Accessory Power (RAP) off and then back on. See Retained Accessory The power outlet is located on the Power (RAP) on page 2-21. The rear of the center console. power restarts when equipment using 150 watts or less is plugged into the outlet and a system fault is not detected. Instrument Panel 3-19

Climate Controls Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise Climate Control System to increase or decrease the temperature of the air ﬂowing The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with this from the system. system. Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to change the current airﬂow mode. By positioning the right knob between two modes, a combination of those two modes is selected.

H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument panel and ﬂoor outlets. Some air is directed A. Fan Control 9 (Off): Turn the fan control all the towards the windshield and side window outlets. Cooler air is directed B. Temperature Control way counterclockwise to turn the to the upper outlets and warmer air front climate control system off. C. Air Delivery Mode Control to the ﬂoor outlets. D. Air Conditioning 9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise E. REAR (Rear Climate Control) or counterclockwise to increase F. Recirculation or decrease the fan speed. G. Rear Window Defogger 3-20 Instrument Panel

6 (Floor): Air is directed to the 0 (Defrost): This mode quickly For quicker cool down on hot days: floor outlets, with some of the air clears the windshield of fog or frost. 1. Open the windows to let hot directed to the windshield, side Air is directed to the windshield air escape. window, and second row floor and side window vents, with some outlets. In this mode, the system to the floor vents. In this mode, 2. Select H mode. automatically selects outside air. outside air is pulled inside the 3. Select #. Recirculation cannot be selected vehicle. Recirculation cannot be while in floor mode. selected while in the defrost mode. 4. Select the coolest temperature. The air conditioning system runs 5. Select the highest fan speed. - (Defog): This mode clears the automatically in this setting, unless windows of fog or moisture. Air is the outside temperature is less 6. Close the windows after the hot directed to the windshield, floor than 40°F (4°C). Do not drive air has escaped. outlets, and side window vents. the vehicle until all the windows 7. Once the vehicle’s interior When this mode is selected, the are clear. temperature is below the outside system turns off recirculation and temperature, select @ mode runs the air conditioning unless the # (Air Conditioning): Press to for faster cooling. outside temperature is less than turn the air conditioning system on 40°F (4°C). Recirculation cannot be or off. An indicator light comes on Using recirculation for long periods selected while in the defog mode. when A/C is on. The air conditioning of time could cause the air inside Do not drive the vehicle until all the system does not operate when of the vehicle to become too dry. windows are clear. the outside temperature is below To prevent this from happening, after 40°F (4°C). The indicator light the inside of the vehicle has cooled, flashes three times and turns off turn the recirculation mode off. when outside conditions affect air conditioning operation. This is normal. Instrument Panel 3-21

The air conditioning system The recirculation mode cannot be Rear Window Defogger removes moisture from the air, so used with ﬂoor, defrost, or defogging The rear window defogger uses a a small amount of water might drip modes. If recirculation is selected in warming grid to remove fog from the under the vehicle while idling or after these modes, the indicator ﬂashes rear window. turning off the engine. This is normal. three times and turns off. The air conditioning also comes on when < (Rear Window Defogger): @ (Recirculation): Press to turn this mode is activated unless the Press to turn the rear window the recirculation mode on or off. outside air temperature is less than defogger on or off. The rear An indicator light comes on when 40°F (4°C). While in recirculation window defogger stays on for about recirculation is on. When the engine mode the windows can fog when 10 minutes, before automatically is turned off, the recirculation mode the weather is cold and damp. turning off. The defogger will also automatically turns off and must be To clear the fog, select either the turn off when the engine is turned off. re-selected when the engine is defog or defrost mode and increase Do not drive the vehicle until all the turned on again. the fan speed. windows are clear. This mode recirculates and helps to REAR (Rear Climate Control): For vehicles with heated outside quickly cool the air inside the vehicle. Press to turn the rear heating rearview mirrors, fog or frost It can be used to prevent outside air and air conditioning on or off. is cleared from the surface of and odors from entering the vehicle. See Rear Air Conditioning and the mirror when < is pressed. Heating System on page 3-28 or Rear Air Conditioning and Heating Notice: Do not use anything System and Electronic Climate sharp on the inside of the rear Controls on page 3-29. window. If you do, you could cut or damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar to the defogger grid. 3-22 Instrument Panel

Dual Automatic Climate Control System Display Function The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with this Each time the temperature, mode, system. or fan control buttons are pressed, the climate control display shows that function along with the inside temperature setting. The outside temperature is displayed on the instrument panel cluster.

O (On/Off): Press to turn the climate control system on or off. While the system is off, outside air still enters through the ﬂoor outlets, but the air delivery mode can be adjusted. The climate control system will A. Fan Control H. Display also turn on if either the fan control, B. AUTO I. Power (On/Off) defrost, AUTO, or air conditioning buttons are pressed. C. Defrost J. Rear Window Defogger D. Recirculation K. Air Conditioning E. REAR (Rear Climate Control) L. PASS (Passenger) F. Air Delivery Mode Control M. Passenger Side Temperature G. Driver Side Temperature Control Control Instrument Panel 3-23

Automatic Operation 2. Set the temperature for the driver Temperature Control and passenger. AUTO (Automatic): The system The driver and passenger side automatically controls the inside To ﬁnd a comfortable setting, temperature buttons are used to temperature, the air delivery, start with a 73°F (22°C) adjust the temperature of the and the fan speed. temperature setting and allow air coming through the system. about 20 minutes for the system The temperature can be adjusted To use automatic mode: to regulate. Use the driver’s side even if the system is turned off since 1. Press the AUTO button. or passenger side temperature outside air still enters the vehicle, buttons to adjust the temperature When AUTO is selected, the unless the recirculation mode setting as necessary. The system current temperature(s) selected is selected. See “Recirculation” will remain at the selected setting. and AUTO is shown on the later in this section. Choosing the warmest or coolest display. The current air delivery temperatures does not cause Driver Side Temperature mode and fan speed also appear − the vehicle to heat or cool more Control: Press the + or buttons for approximately ﬁve seconds. quickly. to increase or decrease the driver When AUTO is selected, the side temperature. The driver side To avoid blowing cold air in air conditioning and air inlet temperature display will show the cold weather, the system delays are automatically controlled. temperature setting. turning on the fan until warm air is The air conditioning runs when available. Press the fan control to Passenger Side Temperature the outside temperature is over override this delay and select the Control: Press the + or − buttons 40°F (4°C). The system is fan speed. to increase or decrease the automatically set to outside passenger side temperature. air, unless it is hot outside and The passenger side display will then the air inlet changes to show the temperature setting. recirculation mode to help quickly cool the vehicle. The recirculation indicator light will come on. 3-24 Instrument Panel

PASS (Passenger): Press to H / G (Air Delivery Mode Control): 6 (Floor): Air is directed to the set the passenger temperature to Press to change the direction of the floor outlets, with some of the match the driver temperature setting. airflow in the vehicle. Repeatedly air directed to the windshield, The PASS indicator will turn off. press H or G until the desired mode side window, and second row floor When the passenger temperature appears on the display. Pressing a outlets. In this mode, the system setting is different than the driver uses outside air. setting, the PASS indicator mode button while the system is off changes the air delivery mode comes on. - (Defog): This mode clears the without turning the system on. windows of fog or moisture. Air is Manual Operation Press a mode button while in automatic control to place the directed to the windshield, floor The air delivery mode or fan speed system into manual control. outlets, and side window vents. can be manually adjusted. When this mode is selected, the The air delivery mode setting still system turns off recirculation and D / C (Fan Control): Press to displays, but the word AUTO no runs the air conditioning compressor increase or decrease the fan speed. longer displays, and the AUTO unless the outside temperature is D C button indicator light turns off. less than 40°F (4°C). Do not drive Pressing or while in automatic the vehicle until all the windows control places the fan speed H (Vent): Air is directed to the are clear. under manual control. instrument panel outlets. 0 (Defrost): Press to turn the The air delivery mode remains in ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided defrost on or off. This mode quickly automatic control. The fan setting between the instrument panel and clears the windshield of fog or frost. still displays, but the word AUTO floor outlets. Some air is directed Air is directed to the windshield, no longer displays, and the AUTO towards the windshield and side side window, and floor vents. button indicator light turns off. window outlets. Cooler air is directed In this mode, outside air is to the upper outlets and warmer air pulled inside the vehicle. to the floor outlets. Instrument Panel 3-25

The air conditioning system runs Air Conditioning On hot days, open the windows automatically in this setting, unless briefly to let hot inside air escape. the outside temperature is less than # (Air Conditioning): Press This helps reduce the time it 40°F (4°C). to turn the air conditioning (A/C) takes for the interior of the vehicle on and off. An indicator light comes to cool down. Do not drive the vehicle until all the on when A/C is on. windows are clear. The air conditioning system The A/C does not work when removes moisture from the air, While in defrost mode, if the PASS the outside temperature is below so a small amount of water might drip button is pressed, the PASS button 40°F (4°C). If # is pressed the under the vehicle while idling or after indicator flashes three times to show turning off the engine. This is normal. that the passenger climate control indicator flashes three times and turns off to show that the A/C mode system cannot be activated. If the @ (Recirculation): Press to passenger temperature buttons are is not available. If the A/C is on and the outside temperature drops below turn the recirculation mode on or off. adjusted while in defrost mode, the An indicator light comes on when driver temperature indicator will a temperature which is too cool for air conditioning to be effective, the recirculation is on. When the engine change. The passenger temperature is turned off, the recirculation mode will not be displayed. A/C indicator turns off to show that the A/C mode has been canceled. automatically turns off and must be re-selected when the engine is turned on again. 3-26 Instrument Panel

This mode recirculates and helps to Rear Window Defogger Sensors quickly cool the air inside the vehicle. The rear window defogger uses a It can be used to prevent outside air warming grid to remove fog from the and odors from entering the vehicle. rear window. The recirculation mode cannot be used with ﬂoor, defog, or defrosting < (Rear Window Defogger): modes. If recirculation is selected in Press to turn the rear window these modes, the indicator ﬂashes defogger on or off. The rear three times and turns off. The air window defogger stays on for conditioning compressor also comes about 10 minutes, before turning off. on when this mode is activated. The defogger also turns off when While in recirculation mode the the engine is turned off. Do not drive windows can fog when the weather the vehicle until all the windows is cold and damp. To clear the fog, are clear. select either the defog or defrost For vehicles with heated outside The solar sensor, located in the mode and increase the fan speed. rearview mirrors, fog or frost defrost grille in the middle of the instrument panel, monitors the solar REAR: Press to turn the rear is cleared from the surface of the mirror when the rear window heat. Do not cover the solar sensor heating and air conditioning on or the system will not work properly. or off. See Rear Air Conditioning defog button is pressed. and Heating System on page 3-28 Notice: Do not use a razor blade or Rear Air Conditioning and or sharp object to clear the inside Heating System and Electronic rear window. Do not adhere Climate Controls on page 3-29. anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass. These actions may damage the rear defogger. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Instrument Panel 3-27

The climate control system uses Operation Tips the information from these sensors • Clear away any ice, snow, or to maintain comfort settings by leaves from the air inlets at adjusting the temperature, fan the base of the windshield that speed, and the air delivery mode. can block the flow of air into The system may also supply cooler the vehicle. air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The recirculation mode will • Use of non-GM approved hood also be used as needed to maintain deflectors can adversely affect cool outlet temperatures. the performance of the system. • Keep the path under all seats Outlet Adjustment clear of objects to help circulate the air inside the vehicle Use the slider switch in the center The interior temperature sensor more effectively. located on the instrument panel to of the outlet, to change the direction the right of the steering column, of the air flow. Use the thumbwheel • If fogging reoccurs while in measures the temperature of the near the outlet to control the amount vent or bi-level modes with mild air inside the vehicle. of air flow or to shut off the airflow. temperature throughout the vehicle, turn on the air conditioner There is also an exterior Keep all outlets open whenever to reduce windshield fogging. temperature sensor located behind possible for best system the front grille. This sensor reads the performance. outside air temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle could cause a false reading in the displayed temperature. 3-28 Instrument Panel

Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System Fan Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn the knob to 9 to turn the fan off. Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the airﬂow temperature. Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn to the desired mode to change the airﬂow direction.

H (Vent): Air is directed through A. Fan Control An indicator comes on when the the overhead outlets. B. Temperature Control rear system is on. The system also ) turns on if any of the rear controls (Bi-Level): Air is directed C. Air Delivery Mode Control are adjusted. through the rear floor outlets, as well as the overhead outlets. For vehicles with the rear climate Mimic Mode: This mode matches control system, the controls the rear climate control to the front 6 (Floor): Air is directed through are located on the rear of the center climate control settings. It comes on the floor outlets. The rear system console. The system can also be when REAR is pressed. floor outlets are located under controlled with the front controls. the third row seats. Independent Mode: This mode Press the REAR button on the front directs rear seating airflow according climate control system to turn the to the settings of the rear controls. rear climate control system on or off. It comes on when any rear control is adjusted. Instrument Panel 3-29

Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Mimic Mode: This mode matches Electronic Climate Controls the rear climate control to the front climate control settings. It comes on when REAR is pressed. Independent Mode: This mode directs rear seating airﬂow according to the settings of the rear controls. It comes on when any rear control is adjusted.

DC(Fan Control): Press the fan up or down buttons to increase or decrease the fan speed. Temperature Control: Press + or − to increase or decrease the Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls air temperature. The temperature A. Fan Control Press the REAR button on the front settings will display in 0-12 B. Air Delivery Mode Control climate control system to turn the increments, going from the rear climate control system on or off. coolest (0) to the warmest (12) C. Temperature Control The system also turns on if any of the setting. rear controls, except for the C are For vehicles with the rear climate control system, the controls are pressed. An indicator comes on located on the rear of the center when the rear system is on. console. The system can also be turned off, by pressing and holding the C button. 3-30 Instrument Panel

N (Air Delivery Mode Control): Warning Lights, Gages can indicate when there may Press to manually change the be or is a problem with one of the direction of the airflow. Repeatedly Gages, and Indicators vehicle’s functions. Often gages press the button until the desired Warning lights and gages can and warning lights work together to mode appears on the display. signal that something is wrong indicate a problem with the vehicle. H before it becomes serious enough When one of the warning lights (Vent): Air is directed through to cause an expensive repair or comes on and stays on while driving, the overhead outlets. replacement. Paying attention to or when one of the gages shows the warning lights and gages could there may be a problem, check the ) (Bi-Level): Air is directed prevent injury. section that explains what to do. through the rear floor outlets, as Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting well as the overhead outlets. Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one to do repairs can be costly and even 6 (Floor): Air is directed through of the vehicle’s functions. Some dangerous. the floor outlets. The rear system warning lights come on briefly when floor outlets are located under the engine is started to indicate they the third row seats. are working. Instrument Panel 3-31

Instrument Panel Cluster The instrument cluster is designed show how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is going, about how much fuel has been used, and many other things needed drive safely and economically.

United States version shown, Canada similar 3-32 Instrument Panel

Speedometer and Safety Belt Reminders Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light Odometer Driver Safety Belt Reminder The speedometer shows the Light vehicle’s speed in both miles The driver safety belt reminder light per hour (mph) and kilometers on the instrument panel cluster. per hour (km/h). The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven, in either miles or kilometers. When the engine is started this light and the chime come on and stay This vehicle has a tamper-resistant on for several seconds to remind odometer. If the vehicle needs a new the passenger to fasten their safety odometer installed, the new one is belt. The light also begins to ﬂash. set to the mileage total of the old When the engine is started this odometer. If this is not possible, it is light and the chime come on and This cycle repeats if the passenger set at zero and a label is put on the stay on for several seconds to remains unbuckled and the vehicle is driver’s door to show the old mileage remind the driver to fasten the safety moving. belt. The light also begins to ﬂash. reading when the new odometer was If the passenger safety belt is installed. If the mileage is unknown, This cycle repeats if the driver buckled, neither the chime nor the the label should then indicate remains unbuckled and the vehicle light comes on. “previous mileage unknown”. is moving. The front passenger safety belt Tachometer If the driver safety belt is already warning light and chime may turn on buckled, neither the light nor chime if an object is put on the seat such as The tachometer displays the comes on. a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, engine speed in revolutions laptop or other electronic device. per minute (rpm). Instrument Panel 3-33

To turn off the warning light and or chime, remove the object from the { CAUTION seat or buckle the safety belt If the airbag readiness light stays Airbag Readiness Light on after the vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it means This light shows if there is an the airbag system might not be electrical problem. The system This light will come on and stay working properly. The airbags in check includes the airbag sensor, on for several seconds when the the vehicle might not inﬂate in a the pretensioners, the airbag vehicle is started. Then the light crash, or they could even inﬂate modules, the wiring and the crash should go out. without a crash. To help avoid sensing and diagnostic module. injury, have the vehicle serviced For more information on the airbag If the airbag readiness light stays right away. system, see Airbag System on on after the vehicle has been started page 1-47. or comes on when while driving, the airbag system may not work properly. Have the vehicle serviced right away. 3-34 Instrument Panel

Passenger Airbag Status When the vehicle is started, the If, after several seconds, both passenger airbag status indicator status indicator lights remain on, Indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol or if there are no lights at all, there The vehicle has a passenger for on and off, for several seconds may be a problem with the lights sensing system. See Passenger as a system check. If you are using or the passenger sensing system. Sensing System on page 1-55 remote start to start the vehicle from See your dealer/retailer for service. for important safety information. a distance, if equipped, you may not The instrument panel has a see the system check. Then, after { CAUTION passenger airbag status indicator. several more seconds, the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, If the airbag readiness light ever or either the on or off symbol to let comes on and stays on, it means you know the status of the right front that something may be wrong with passenger frontal airbag. the airbag system. To help avoid If the word ON or the on symbol is injury to yourself or others, have lit on the passenger airbag status the vehicle serviced right away. indicator, it means that the right front United States See Airbag Readiness Light on passenger frontal airbag is enabled page 3-33 for more information, (may inﬂate). including important safety If the word OFF or the off symbol information. is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger Canada frontal airbag. Instrument Panel 3-35

Charging System Light See DIC Warnings and Messages This is normal. Readings between on page 3-56 for more information. the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range. If a short distance must be driven with the light on, be sure to turn Readings in the low warning zone off all accessories, such as the may occur when a large number of radio and air conditioner. electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left Voltmeter Gage idling for an extended period. The charging system light comes on brieﬂy when the ignition is turned If there is a problem with the battery on, but the engine is not running, charging system, a SERVICE as a check to show the light is BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM working. It should go out when the message will appear in the Driver engine is started. Information Center (DIC) and/or the charging system light will come on. If the light stays on, or comes See DIC Warnings and Messages on while driving, there may be a When the engine is not running, on page 3-56 and Charging System problem with the electrical charging but the ignition is on, this gage Light on page 3-35 for more system. Have it checked by your shows the battery’s state of charge information. dealer/retailer. Driving while this in DC volts. light is on could drain the battery. However, readings in either warning When the engine is running, this zone may indicate a possible When this light comes on, the gage shows the condition of the problem in the electrical system. Driver Information Center (DIC) also charging system. The vehicle’s Have the vehicle serviced as soon displays the SERVICE BATTERY charging system regulates voltage as possible. CHARGING SYSTEM message. based on the state of charge of the battery. The voltmeter may ﬂuctuate. 3-36 Instrument Panel

Brake System Warning This light should come on briefly released. The pedal may be harder when the ignition key is turned to push or, the pedal may go closer Light to ON/RUN. If it does not come to the floor. It may take longer to This vehicle’s hydraulic brake on then, have it fixed so it will be stop. If the light is still on, have the system is divided into two parts. ready to warn if there is a problem. vehicle towed for service. See If one part is not working, the other Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-22. This light may also come on due part can still work and stop the to low brake fluid. See Brakes vehicle. For good braking both on page 5-27 for more information. { CAUTION parts need to be working. When the ignition is on, the brake If the warning light comes on, The brake system might not system warning light will also come there is a brake problem. Have the be working properly if the brake on when the parking brake is set. brake system inspected right away. system warning light is on. Driving The light will stay on if the parking with the brake system warning light brake does not release fully. If it stays on after the parking brake is on can lead to a crash. If the light fully released, it means there is a is still on after the vehicle has been brake problem. pulled off the road and carefully stopped, have the vehicle towed If the light comes on while driving, for service. pull off the road and stop carefully. United States Canada Make sure the parking brake is fully Instrument Panel 3-37

Antilock Brake System A chime may also sound when the StabiliTrak® Indicator light comes on steady. Then start (ABS) Warning Light the engine again to reset the system. Light If the ABS light stays on, or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also on, For vehicles with the Antilock Brake the vehicle does not have antilock This light comes on briefly while System (ABS), this light comes brakes and there is a problem with starting the engine. If it does not, on briefly when the engine is started. the regular brakes. See Brake have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. If the system is If the light does not come on, System Warning Light on page 3-36. working normally the indicator light have it fixed so it will be ready For vehicles with a Driver goes off. to warn if there is a problem. Information Center (DIC), see If it stays on, or comes on while If the ABS light stays on, turn the DIC Warnings and Messages on driving, there could be a problem ignition off. If the light comes on while page 3-56 for all brake related DIC with the StabiliTrak system and driving, stop as soon as it is safely messages. the vehicle might need service. possible and turn the ignition off. When this warning light is on, the system is off and will not limit wheel spin. 3-38 Instrument Panel

This light ﬂashes when the If this happens pull over and turn Engine Coolant StabiliTrak system is active. off the engine as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating on Temperature Gage If the StabiliTrak system warning page 5-23 for more information. light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when Notice: Driving with the engine the system is turned on, the vehicle coolant temperature warning light needs service. See StabiliTrak¨ on could cause the vehicle to System on page 4-5 for more overheat. See Engine Overheating information. on page 5-23. The vehicle’s engine could be damaged, and it might United States Canada Engine Coolant not be covered by the vehicle This gage shows the engine Temperature warranty. Never drive with the coolant temperature. Under normal Warning Light engine coolant temperature driving conditions the gage will read warning light on. 210°F (100 °C) or less. If the gage This light also comes on brieﬂy pointer is near 260°F (125 °C), the when starting the vehicle. If it does engine is too hot. not, see your dealer/retailer. It means that the engine coolant has overheated. If the vehicle has been operating under normal driving conditions, pull off the road, stop the The engine coolant temperature vehicle and turn off the engine as warning light comes on when soon as possible. the engine has overheated. See Engine Overheating on page 5-23 for more information. Instrument Panel 3-39

Tire Pressure Light When the Light is On Steady Malfunction This indicates that one or Indicator Lamp more of the tires are significantly underinflated. Check Engine Light A tire pressure message in the A computer system called OBD II Driver Information Center (DIC), (On-Board Diagnostics-Second can accompany the light. See Generation) monitors operation DIC Warnings and Messages on of the fuel, ignition, and emission If the vehicle has a tire pressure page 3-56 for more information. control systems. It ensures that monitoring system, the tire pressure Stop and check the tires as soon emissions are at acceptable levels light provides information about tire as it is safe to do so. If underinflated, for the life of the vehicle, helping to pressures and the Tire Pressure inflate to the proper pressure. produce a cleaner environment. Monitoring System. The light should See Tires on page 5-39 for come on briefly as the engine is more information. started. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/ When the Light Flashes First and retailer. Then is On Steady This indicates that there could be a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for This light comes on when the about a minute and stays on steady ignition is on, but the engine is not for the remainder of the ignition running, as a check to show it is cycle. This sequence repeats with working. If it does not, have the every ignition cycle. See Tire vehicle serviced by your dealer/ Pressure Monitor System on retailer. page 5-46 for more information. 3-40 Instrument Panel

If the check engine light comes Notice: Modifications made to This light comes on during a on and stays on, while the engine is the engine, transmission, exhaust, malfunction in one of two ways: running, this indicates that there is intake, or fuel system of the an OBD II problem and service is vehicle or the replacement of Light Flashing: A misfire condition required. the original tires with other has been detected. A misfire than those of the same Tire increases vehicle emissions and Malfunctions often are indicated by Performance Criteria (TPC) can could damage the emission control the system before any problem is affect the vehicle’s emission system on the vehicle. Diagnosis apparent. Being aware of the light controls and can cause this and service might be required. can prevent more serious damage light to come on. Modifications to the vehicle. This system assists The following can prevent more to these systems could lead to the service technician in correctly serious damage to the vehicle: costly repairs not covered by diagnosing any malfunction. the vehicle warranty. This • Reduce vehicle speed. Notice: If the vehicle is could also result in a failure • Avoid hard accelerations. continually driven with this to pass a required Emission • Avoid steep uphill grades. light on, after a while, the Inspection/Maintenance test. emission controls might not See Accessories and • If towing a trailer, reduce the work as well, the vehicle’s fuel Modifications on page 5-3. amount of cargo being hauled economy might not be as good, as soon as it is possible. and the engine might not run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Instrument Panel 3-41

If the light continues to flash, installed. A loose or missing fuel hesitation on acceleration, or when it is safe to do so, stop cap allows fuel to evaporate into stumbling on acceleration. the vehicle. Find a safe place to the atmosphere. A few driving These conditions might go away park the vehicle. Turn the key trips with the cap properly once the engine is warmed up. off, wait at least 10 seconds, and installed should turn the light off. If one or more of these conditions restart the engine. If the light is • If the vehicle has been driven occurs, change the fuel brand still flashing, follow the previous through a deep puddle of water, used. It will require at least one steps and see your dealer/retailer the vehicle’s electrical system full tank of the proper fuel to turn for service as soon as possible. might be wet. The condition is the light off. Light On Steady: An emission usually corrected when the See Gasoline Octane on control system malfunction has been electrical system dries out. page 5-5. detected on the vehicle. Diagnosis A few driving trips should turn If none of the above have made the and service might be required. the light off. light turn off, your dealer/retailer can An emission system malfunction • Make sure to fuel the vehicle check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer might be corrected by checking the with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality has the proper test equipment and following items: causes the engine not to run as diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical efficiently as designed and may • Make sure the fuel cap is fully or electrical problems that might cause: stalling after start-up, have developed. installed. See Filling the Tank on stalling when the vehicle is page 5-8. The diagnostic system changed into gear, misfiring, can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly 3-42 Instrument Panel

Emissions Inspection and inspection. This can happen Notice: Lack of proper engine Maintenance Programs if the battery has recently been oil maintenance can damage replaced or if the battery has run the engine. The repairs would Some state/provincial and local down. The diagnostic system not be covered by the vehicle governments have or might begin is designed to evaluate critical warranty. Always follow the programs to inspect the emission emission control systems during maintenance schedule in this control equipment on the vehicle. normal driving. This can take manual for changing engine oil. Failure to pass this inspection several days of routine driving. could prevent getting a vehicle If this has been done and the registration. vehicle still does not pass the Here are some things to know to inspection for lack of OBD II help the vehicle pass an inspection: system readiness, your dealer/ retailer can prepare the vehicle • The vehicle will not pass this for inspection. inspection if the check engine light is on with the engine running, The oil pressure light should come or if the key is in ON/RUN and the Oil Pressure Light on briefly as the engine is started. If it light is not on. does not come on have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. • The vehicle will not pass this { CAUTION inspection if the OBD II (on-board If the light comes on and stays on, it diagnostic) system determines Do not keep driving if the oil means that oil is not flowing through that critical emission control pressure is low. The engine can the engine properly. The vehicle systems have not been become so hot that it catches fire. could be low on oil and might have completely diagnosed by the Someone could be burned. Check some other system problem. system. The vehicle would the oil as soon as possible and be considered not ready for have the vehicle serviced. Instrument Panel 3-43

Security Light Cruise Control Light See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-7 for more information. Tow/Haul Mode Light

This light ﬂashes when the security system is activated. This light comes on whenever the cruise control is set. For more information, see Theft-Deterrent Systems on The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off. See Cruise page 2-16. This light comes on when the Control on page 3-9 for more Tow/Haul mode has been activated. Fog Lamp Light information. For more information, see Highbeam On Light Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-26.

On vehicles with fog lamps, this light comes on when the fog lamps are in use. The highbeam on light comes on The light goes out when the fog when the high-beam headlamps lamps are turned off. See Fog are in use. Lamps on page 3-13 for more information. 3-44 Instrument Panel

Fuel Gage When the fuel tank is low on fuel, Driver Information the FUEL LEVEL LOW message will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC) Center (DIC). For more information Your vehicle has a Driver see DIC Warnings and Messages Information Center (DIC). on page 3-56. The DIC displays information Here are some situations that may about your vehicle. It also displays United States Canada occur with the fuel gage. None of warning messages if a system these indicate a problem with the problem is detected. When the ignition is on, the fuel fuel gage. All messages will appear in the DIC gage shows how much fuel the • At the gas station, the fuel display located at the top of the vehicle has left in the tank. pump shuts off before the gage instrument panel cluster. An arrow on the fuel gage indicates reads full. the side of the vehicle the fuel • It takes a little more or less fuel to The DIC comes on when the door is on. fill up than the fuel gage indicated. ignition is on. After a short delay, the DIC will display the information The gage will first indicate empty For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was half full, that was last displayed before before the vehicle is out of fuel, the engine was turned off. the vehicles fuel tank should be but it actually took a little more or filled soon. less than half the tank’s capacity The DIC also displays a shift lever to fill the tank. position indicator on the bottom • The gage goes back to empty line of the display. See Automatic when the ignition is turned off. Transmission Operation on page 2-24 for more information. Instrument Panel 3-45

The outside air temperature and DIC Operation DIC Buttons compass, if equipped, also displays and Displays on the DIC when viewing the trip and fuel information. The outside air (With DIC Buttons) temperature automatically appears If your vehicle has DIC buttons, in the top right corner of the DIC the information below explains the display. If there is a problem with the operation of this system. system that controls the temperature The DIC has different displays display, the numbers will be replaced The buttons are the set/reset, with dashes. If this occurs, have which can be accessed by pressing the DIC buttons located on the customization, vehicle information, the vehicle serviced. The compass and trip/fuel buttons. The button will be shown in the bottom right instrument panel. See Instrument Panel Overview on page 3-4 functions are detailed in the corner of the DIC display. See DIC following pages. Compass on page 3-54 for more for more information. information. The DIC displays trip, fuel, and V (Set/Reset): Press this button to If your vehicle has DIC buttons, see vehicle system information, and set or reset certain functions and to “DIC Operation and Displays (With warning messages if a system turn off or acknowledge messages DIC Buttons)” later in this section problem is detected. on the DIC. and DIC Vehicle Customization The DIC also allows some features U (Customization): Press this (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-65 to be customized. See DIC Vehicle button to customize the feature for the displays available. Customization (With DIC Buttons) on settings on your vehicle. See DIC page 3-65 for more information. If your vehicle does not have Vehicle Customization (With DIC DIC buttons, see “DIC Operation If your vehicle has DIC buttons, Buttons) on page 3-65 for more and Displays (Without DIC Buttons)” you can also use the trip odometer information. later in this section for the displays reset stem to view the odometer available. and trip odometers. 3-46 Instrument Panel

T (Vehicle Information): Press Vehicle Information Menu under DIC Warnings and Messages this button to display the oil life, park Items on page 3-56. You should change assist on vehicles with this feature, T the oil as soon as you can. units, tire pressure readings on (Vehicle Information): Press See Engine Oil on page 5-13. vehicles with the Tire Pressure this button to scroll through the In addition to the engine oil life Monitor System (TPMS), Remote following menu items: system monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter OIL LIFE programming, and compass recommended in the Maintenance calibration and zone setting Press the vehicle information button Schedule in this manual. See on vehicles with this feature. until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays. Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-3 This display shows an estimate of for more information. 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this the oil’s remaining useful life. If you Remember, you must reset the button to display the odometer, see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on OIL LIFE display yourself after each trip odometers, fuel range, average the display, that means 99% of the oil change. It will not reset itself. economy, timer, fuel used, and current oil life remains. The engine Also, be careful not to reset the average speed. oil life system will alert you to change OIL LIFE display accidentally at any the oil on a schedule consistent with time other than when the oil has just your driving conditions. been changed. It cannot be reset When the remaining oil life is low, accurately until the next oil change. the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON To reset the engine oil life system, message will appear on the display. see Engine Oil Life System on See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” page 5-15. Instrument Panel 3-47

PARK ASSIST UNITS If a low or high tire pressure If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Press the vehicle information condition is detected by the system Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, button until UNITS displays. while driving, a message advising press the vehicle information button This display allows you to select you to check the pressure in a until PARK ASSIST displays. between English or Metric units of speciﬁc tire will appear in the This display allows the system to be measurement. Once in this display, display. See Inﬂation - Tire Pressure turned on or off. Once in this display, press the set/reset button to select on page 5-45 and DIC Warnings press the set/reset button to select between ENGLISH or METRIC units. and Messages on page 3-56 between ON or OFF. If you choose All of the vehicle information will for more information. ON, the system will be turned on. then be displayed in the unit of If the tire pressure display shows If you choose OFF, the system will measurement selected. dashes instead of a value, there be turned off. The URPA system may be a problem with your vehicle. automatically turns back on after FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES If this consistently occurs, see each vehicle start. When the URPA On vehicles with the Tire Pressure your dealer/retailer for service. system is turned off and the vehicle Monitor System (TPMS), the is shifted out of P (Park), the DIC pressure for each tire can be viewed RELEARN REMOTE KEY will display the PARK ASSIST OFF in the DIC. The tire pressure will be This display allows you to match message as a reminder that the shown in either pounds per square Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system has been turned off. inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press transmitters to your vehicle. See DIC Warnings and Messages the vehicle information button until This procedure will erase all on page 3-56 and Ultrasonic Rear the DIC displays FRONT TIRES previously learned transmitters. Parking Assist (URPA) on page 2-34 PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press Therefore, they must be relearned for more information. the vehicle information button again as additional transmitters. until the DIC displays REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. 3-48 Instrument Panel

To match an RKE transmitter to COMPASS ZONE SETTING To switch between English and your vehicle: This display will be available if the metric measurements, see “UNITS” 1. Press the vehicle information vehicle has a compass. See DIC earlier in this section. button until PRESS V TO Compass on page 3-54 for more TRIP A and TRIP B RELEARN REMOTE KEY information. Press the trip/fuel button until displays. COMPASS RECALIBRATION TRIP A or TRIP B displays. 2. Press the set/reset button until This display shows the current REMOTE KEY LEARNING This display will be available if the distance traveled in either miles (mi) ACTIVE is displayed. vehicle has a compass. See DIC or kilometers (km) since the last Compass on page 3-54 for more reset for each trip odometer. Both trip 3. Press and hold the lock and information. unlock buttons on the ﬁrst odometers can be used at the same transmitter at the same time Blank Display time. Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display the trip for about 15 seconds. This display shows no information. On vehicles with memory recall odometers. seats, the ﬁrst transmitter learned Trip/Fuel Menu Items Each trip odometer can be reset will match driver 1 and the to zero separately by pressing 3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button second will match driver 2. the set/reset button or the trip to scroll through the following A chime will sound indicating odometer reset stem while the menu items: that the transmitter is matched. desired trip odometer is displayed. 4. To match additional transmitters ODOMETER The trip odometer has a feature at this time, repeat Step 3. Press the trip/fuel button until called the retro-active reset. Each vehicle can have a ODOMETER displays. This display This can be used to set the trip maximum of eight transmitters shows the distance the vehicle has odometer to the number of miles matched to it. been driven in either miles (mi) or (kilometers) driven since the ignition 5. To exit the programming mode, kilometers (km). Pressing the trip was last turned on. This can be you must cycle the key to odometer reset stem will also display used if the trip odometer is not LOCK/OFF. the odometer. reset at the beginning of the trip. Instrument Panel 3-49

To use the retro-active reset feature, RANGE fuel tank. This is because different press and hold the set/reset button Press the trip/fuel button until driving conditions produce different for at least four seconds. The trip RANGE displays. This display fuel economies. Generally, freeway odometer will display the number shows the approximate number driving produces better fuel economy of miles (mi) or kilometers (km) of remaining miles (mi) or than city driving. Fuel range cannot driven since the ignition was last kilometers (km) the vehicle can be be reset. turned on and the vehicle was driven without refueling. The display AVG (Average) ECONOMY moving. Once the vehicle begins will show LOW if the fuel level is low. moving, the trip odometer will Press the trip/fuel button until accumulate mileage. For example, The fuel range estimate is based AVG ECONOMY displays. if the vehicle was driven 5 miles on an average of the vehicle’s fuel This display shows the approximate (8 km) before it is started again, economy over recent driving history average miles per gallon (mpg) or and then the retro-active reset and the amount of fuel remaining liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). feature is activated, the display in the fuel tank. This estimate will This number is calculated based will show 5 miles (8 km). As the change if driving conditions change. on the number of mpg (L/100 km) vehicle begins moving, the display For example, if driving in traffic and recorded since the last time this will then increase to 5.1 miles making frequent stops, this display menu item was reset. To reset (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc. may read one number, but if the AVG ECONOMY, press and hold vehicle is driven on a freeway, the the set/reset button. If the retro-active reset feature is number may change even though activated after the vehicle is started, the same amount of fuel is in the but before it begins moving, the display will show the number of miles (mi) or kilometers (km) that were driven during the last ignition cycle. 3-50 Instrument Panel

TIMER FUEL USED DIC Operation Press the trip/fuel button until Press the trip/fuel button until and Displays TIMER displays. This display can FUEL USED displays. This display (Without DIC Buttons) be used as a timer. shows the number of gallons (gal) or liters (L) of fuel used since the last If your vehicle does not have DIC To start the timer, press the reset of this menu item. To reset buttons, the information below set/reset button while TIMER is the fuel used information, press explains the operation of this system. displayed. The display will show and hold the set/reset button while the amount of time that has passed The DIC has different displays which FUEL USED is displayed. since the timer was last reset, not can be accessed by pressing the trip including time the ignition is off. AVG (Average) SPEED odometer reset stem located on the Time will continue to be counted instrument panel cluster. Pressing as long as the ignition is on, even Press the trip/fuel button until the trip odometer reset stem will if another display is being shown AVG SPEED displays. This display also turn off, or acknowledge, DIC on the DIC. The timer will record shows the average speed of the messages. up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). The DIC displays trip and vehicle 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which system information, and warning the display will return to zero. This average is calculated based on the various vehicle speeds messages if a system problem To stop the timer, press the set/ recorded since the last reset of this is detected. reset button brieﬂy while TIMER is value. To reset the value to zero, displayed. press and hold the set/reset button. To reset the timer to zero, press Blank Display and hold the set/reset button while TIMER is displayed. This display shows no information. Instrument Panel 3-51

If your vehicle does not have TRIP A or TRIP B To use the retro-active reset feature, DIC buttons, you can use the trip Press the trip odometer reset stem press and hold the trip odometer odometer reset stem to view the until TRIP A or TRIP B displays. reset stem for at least four seconds. following displays: odometer, trip This display shows the current The trip odometer will display odometers, oil life, park assist menu distance traveled in either miles (mi) the number of miles (mi) or for vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear or kilometers (km) since the last kilometers (km) driven since the Parking Assist (URPA) system, reset for each trip odometer. Both ignition was last turned on and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trip odometers can be used at the the vehicle was moving. Once the transmitter programming, units, same time. vehicle begins moving, the trip and display language. odometer will accumulate mileage. Each trip odometer can be reset For example, if the vehicle was If your vehicle has DIC buttons, to zero separately by pressing and driven 5 miles (8 km) before it you can use the trip odometer reset holding the trip odometer reset is started again, and then the stem to view the following displays: stem while the desired trip odometer retro-active reset feature is activated, odometer and trip odometers. is displayed. the display will show 5 miles (8 km). Trip Odometer Reset Stem The trip odometer has a feature As the vehicle begins moving, the Menu Items called the retro-active reset. display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc. ODOMETER This can be used to set the trip odometer to the number of miles If the retro-active reset feature is Press the trip odometer reset (kilometers) driven since the ignition activated after the vehicle is started, stem until ODOMETER displays. was last turned on. This can be but before it begins moving, the This display shows the distance used if the trip odometer is not display will show the number of the vehicle has been driven in reset at the beginning of the trip. miles (mi) or kilometers (km) either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). that were driven during the last To switch between English and ignition cycle. metric measurements, see “UNITS” later in this section. 3-52 Instrument Panel

OIL LIFE the Maintenance Schedule in Once in this display, press and hold To access this display, the vehicle this manual. See Scheduled the trip odometer reset stem to select must be in P (Park). Press the trip Maintenance on page 6-3 for between ON or OFF. If you choose odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE more information. ON, the system will be turned on. If you choose OFF, the system will REMAINING displays. This display Remember, you must reset the be turned off. The URPA system shows an estimate of the oil’s OIL LIFE display yourself after each automatically turns back on after remaining useful life. If you see oil change. It will not reset itself. each vehicle start. When the URPA 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the Also, be careful not to reset the system is turned off and the vehicle display, that means 99% of the OIL LIFE display accidentally at any is shifted out of P (Park), the DIC current oil life remains. The engine time other than when the oil has just will display the PARK ASSIST OFF oil life system will alert you to change been changed. It cannot be reset message as a reminder that the the oil on a schedule consistent with accurately until the next oil change. system has been turned off. See your driving conditions. To reset the engine oil life system, DIC Warnings and Messages on see Engine Oil Life System on When the remaining oil life is low, page 3-56 and Ultrasonic Rear page 5-15. the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON Parking Assist (URPA) on page 2-34 message will appear on the display. PARK ASSIST for more information. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC Warnings and Messages To access this display, the vehicle on page 3-56. You should change must be in P (Park). If your vehicle the oil as soon as you can. See has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Engine Oil on page 5-13. In addition Assist (URPA) system, press the to the engine oil life system trip odometer reset stem until PARK monitoring the oil life, additional ASSIST displays. This display allows maintenance is recommended in the system to be turned on or off. Instrument Panel 3-53

RELEARN REMOTE KEY 4. To match additional transmitters DISPLAY LANGUAGE To access this display, the vehicle at this time, repeat Step 3. To access this display, the vehicle must be in P (Park). This display Each vehicle can have a must be in P (Park). This display allows you to match Remote Keyless maximum of eight transmitters allows you to select the language Entry (RKE) transmitters to your matched to it. in which the DIC messages will vehicle. This procedure will erase 5. To exit the programming mode, appear. To select a language: all previously learned transmitters. you must cycle the key to Therefore, they must be relearned 1. Press the trip odometer reset LOCK/OFF. as additional transmitters. stem until DISPLAY LANGUAGE displays. To match an RKE transmitter to UNITS your vehicle: 2. Continue to press and hold the To access this display, the vehicle trip odometer reset stem to scroll 1. Press the trip odometer reset must be in P (Park). Press the through all of the available stem until RELEARN REMOTE trip odometer reset stem until UNITS languages. KEY displays. displays. This display allows you 2. Press and hold the trip odometer to select between English or Metric The available languages are reset stem until REMOTE KEY units of measurement. Once in ENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed. this display, press and hold the (French), ESPANOL (Spanish), and NO CHANGE. 3. Press and hold the lock and trip odometer reset stem to select unlock buttons on the ﬁrst between ENGLISH or METRIC 3. Once the desired language transmitter at the same time units. All of the vehicle information is displayed, release the trip for about 15 seconds. will then be displayed in the unit odometer reset stem to set On vehicles with memory recall of measurement selected. your choice. seats, the ﬁrst transmitter learned will match driver 1 and the second will match driver 2. A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is matched. 3-54 Instrument Panel

DIC Compass Compass variance is the difference between the earth’s magnetic north Your vehicle may have a and true geographic north. If the compass in the Driver Information compass is not set to the zone where Center (DIC). you live, the compass may give false Compass Zone readings. The compass must be set to the variance zone in which the The zone is set to zone eight upon vehicle is traveling. leaving the factory. Your dealer/ retailer will set the correct zone To adjust for compass variance, for your location. use the following procedure: Under certain circumstances, Compass Variance (Zone) such as during a long distance Procedure 2. Find the vehicle’s current cross-country trip or moving location and variance zone to a new state or province, it will 1. Do not set the compass zone number on the map. when the vehicle is moving. be necessary to compensate Zones 1 through 15 are available. for compass variance by resetting Only set it when the vehicle the zone through the DIC if the is in P (Park). 3. Press the set/reset button zone is not set correctly. Press the vehicle information to scroll through and select the appropriate variance zone. button until PRESS V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONE 4. Press the trip/fuel button until displays. the vehicle heading, for example, N for North, is displayed in the DIC. 5. If calibration is necessary, calibrate the compass. See “Compass Calibration Procedure” following. Instrument Panel 3-55

Compass Calibration Such interference may be caused by 2. Press the vehicle information The compass can be manually a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna button until PRESS V TO calibrated. Only calibrate the mount, a magnetic emergency light, CALIBRATE COMPASS compass in a magnetically clean magnetic note pad holder, or any displays. and safe location, such as an other magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle, move the magnetic item, 3. Press the set/reset button to start open parking lot, where driving the compass calibration. the vehicle in circles is not a danger. then turn on the vehicle and calibrate It is suggested to calibrate away the compass. 4. The DIC will display from tall buildings, utility wires, To calibrate the compass, use the CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN manhole covers, or other industrial following procedure: CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle structures, if possible. in tight circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the If CAL should ever appear in the Compass Calibration Procedure calibration. The DIC will display DIC display, the compass should 1. Before calibrating the compass, CALIBRATION COMPLETE for a be calibrated. make sure the compass zone few seconds when the calibration If the DIC display does not show a is set to the variance zone in is complete. The DIC display will heading, for example, N for North, which the vehicle is located. then return to the previous menu. or the heading does not change after See “Compass Variance (Zone) making turns, there may be a strong Procedure” earlier in this section. magnetic ﬁeld interfering with the Do not operate any switches compass. such as window, sunroof, climate controls, seats, etc. during the calibration procedure. 3-56 Instrument Panel

DIC Warnings and messages that appear on the display message is still on after putting on seriously and remember that clearing the full-size tire, you need to reset Messages the messages will only make the the warning message. To reset the Messages are displayed on the DIC messages disappear, not correct warning message, turn the ignition to notify the driver that the status the problem. off and then back on again after of the vehicle has changed and that 30 seconds. If the message stays on, The following are the possible some action may be needed by see your dealer/retailer right away. messages that can be displayed the driver to correct the condition. See All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System and some information about them. Multiple messages may appear on page 4-8 for more information. one after another. ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF AUTOMATIC LIGHT Some messages may not require If your vehicle has the All-Wheel CONTROL OFF immediate action, but you can Drive (AWD) system, this message This message displays when the press any of the DIC buttons on the displays when there is a compact automatic headlamps are turned off. instrument panel or the trip odometer spare tire on the vehicle, when This message clears itself after reset stem on the instrument panel the Antilock Brake System (ABS) 10 seconds. cluster to acknowledge that you warning light comes on, or when the received the messages and to rear differential ﬂuid is overheating. AUTOMATIC LIGHT clear them from the display. This message turns off when CONTROL ON the differential ﬂuid cools. Some messages cannot be cleared This message displays when the from the DIC display because they The AWD system is disabled until automatic headlamps are turned on. are more urgent. These messages the compact spare tire is replaced This message clears itself after require action before they can be by a full-size tire. If the warning 10 seconds. cleared. You should take any Instrument Panel 3-57

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE message. See Engine Oil on on page 4-18, and Inﬂation - Tire page 5-13 and Scheduled Pressure on page 5-45. The DIC This message displays when the Maintenance on page 6-3 for also shows the tire pressure values. system detects that the battery more information. See “DIC Operation and Displays voltage is dropping below expected (With DIC Buttons)” earlier in this levels. The battery saver system CHECK TIRE PRESSURE section. If the tire pressure is low, starts reducing certain features of the low tire pressure warning light the vehicle that you may be able to On vehicles with the TirePressure comes on. See Tire Pressure Light notice. At the point that the features Monitor System (TPMS), this on page 3-39. are disabled, this message is message displays when the pressure in one or more of the vehicle’s tires displayed. It means that the vehicle CRUISE SET TO XXX is trying to save the charge in the needs to be checked. This message battery. also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT This message displays whenever FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT the cruise control is set. See Cruise Turn off all unnecessary accessories REAR to indicate which tire needs to Control on page 3-9 for more to allow the battery to recharge. be checked. You can receive more information. than one tire pressure message at a The normal battery voltage range is DRIVER DOOR OPEN 11.5 to 15.5 volts. time. To read the other messages that may have been sent at the same This message displays and a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON time, press the set/reset button or chime sounds if the driver door the trip odometer reset stem. If a tire This message displays when the is not fully closed and the vehicle pressure message appears on the engine oil needs to be changed. is shifted out of P (Park). Stop and DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have When you change the engine oil, be turn off the vehicle, check the door the tire pressures checked and set sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE for obstructions, and close the door to those shown on the Tire Loading OIL SOON message. See Engine again. Check to see if the message Information label. See Tires on Oil Life System on page 5-15 for still appears on the DIC. page 5-39, Loading the Vehicle information on how to reset the 3-58 Instrument Panel

ENGINE HOT A/C ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP (Air Conditioning) OFF ENGINE ENGINE This message displays when Notice: If you drive your vehicle Notice: If you drive your vehicle the engine coolant becomes while the engine is overheating, while the engine is overheating, hotter than the normal operating severe engine damage may occur. severe engine damage may occur. temperature. See Engine Coolant If an overheat warning appears If an overheat warning appears Temperature Gage on page 3-38. on the instrument panel cluster on the instrument panel cluster To avoid added strain on a hot and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as and/or DIC, stop the vehicle engine, the air conditioning soon as possible. Do not increase as soon as possible. See Engine compressor automatically turns the engine speed above normal Overheating on page 5-23 for off. When the coolant temperature idling speed. See Engine more information. returns to normal, the air conditioning Overheating on page 5-23 for This message displays and a compressor turns back on. You can more information. continue to drive your vehicle. continuous chime sounds if the This message displays when the engine cooling system reaches If this message continues to appear, engine coolant temperature is too unsafe temperatures for operation. have the system repaired by your hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to Stop and turn off the vehicle as dealer/retailer as soon as possible idle until it cools down. See Engine soon as it is safe to do so to avoid to avoid damage to the engine. Coolant Temperature Gage on severe damage. This message page 3-38. clears when the engine has cooled to a safe operating temperature. See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5-25 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency. Instrument Panel 3-59

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED FUEL LEVEL LOW HEATING WASH (Washer) This message displays and a chime This message displays and a FLUID WASH (Washer) WIPES sounds when the cooling system chime sounds if the fuel level is PENDING temperature gets too hot and the low. Refuel as soon as possible. This message displays when engine further enters the engine See Fuel Gage on page 3-44 you turn on the heated windshield coolant protection mode. See Engine and Fuel on page 5-5 for more washer ﬂuid system. See “Heated Overheating on page 5-23 for further information. Windshield Washer” under information. Windshield Washer on page 3-8 HEATED WASH (Washer) for more information. This message also displays FLUID SYSTEM OFF when the vehicle’s engine power HOOD OPEN is reduced. Reduced engine power This message displays when can affect the vehicle’s ability to you manually turn off the heated On some models, this message accelerate. If this message is windshield washer ﬂuid system or displays and a chime sounds if on, but there is no reduction in when the system automatically turns the hood is not fully closed. Stop and performance, proceed to your off. See “Heated Windshield Washer” turn off the vehicle, check the hood destination. The performance under Windshield Washer on for obstructions, and close the hood may be reduced the next time the page 3-8 for more information. again. Check to see if the message vehicle is driven. The vehicle may This message clears itself after still appears on the DIC. 10 seconds. be driven at a reduced speed while ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE this message is on, but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime WITH CARE this message stays on, the vehicle This message displays when the should be taken to your dealer/ outside air temperature is cold retailer for service as soon as enough to create icy road conditions. possible. Adjust your driving accordingly. 3-60 Instrument Panel

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP PARK ASSIST OFF This message displays and a chime ENGINE If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic sounds if the driver side rear door is Notice: If you drive your vehicle Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, not fully closed and the vehicle is while the engine oil pressure after the vehicle has been started shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn is low, severe engine damage and shifted out of P (Park), this off the vehicle, check the door for may occur. If a low oil pressure message displays to remind the obstructions, and close the door warning appears on the Driver driver that the URPA system has again. Check to see if the message Information Center (DIC), stop been turned off. Press the set/reset still appears on the DIC. the vehicle as soon as possible. button or the trip odometer reset Do not drive the vehicle until stem to acknowledge this message LIFTGATE OPEN the cause of the low oil pressure and clear it from the DIC display. This message displays and a chime is corrected. See Engine Oil To turn the URPA system back on, sounds if the liftgate is open while on page 5-13 for more see Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist the ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn off information. (URPA) on page 2-34. the vehicle and check the liftgate. This message displays if low oil Restart the vehicle and check for PASSENGER DOOR OPEN pressure levels occur. Stop the the message on the DIC display. This message displays and a vehicle as soon as safely possible chime sounds if the passenger door and do not operate it until the cause is not fully closed and the vehicle is of the low oil pressure has been shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn corrected. Check the oil as soon off the vehicle, check the door for as possible and have your vehicle obstructions, and close the door serviced by your dealer/retailer. again. Check to see if the message See Engine Oil on page 5-13. still appears on the DIC. Instrument Panel 3-61

REMOTE KEY LEARNING RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN SERVICE AIR BAG ACTIVE This message displays and a chime This message displays if there is This message displays while you are sounds if the passenger side rear a problem with the airbag system. matching a Remote Keyless Entry door is not fully closed and the Have your dealer/retailer inspect the (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle. vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). system for problems. See Airbag See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Stop and turn off the vehicle, check Readiness Light on page 3-33 and Your Vehicle” under Remote Keyless the door for obstructions, and close Airbag System on page 1-47 for Entry (RKE) System Operation on the door again. Check to see if the more information. page 2-4 and DIC Operation and message still appears on the DIC. Displays (With DIC Buttons) on SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE SERVICE A/C page 3-45 or DIC Operation and If your vehicle has the All-Wheel Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on (Air Conditioning) SYSTEM Drive (AWD) system, this message page 3-50 for more information. This message displays when displays if there is a problem with the electronic sensors that control this system. If this message appears, REPLACE BATTERY IN the air conditioning and heating stop as soon as possible and turn REMOTE KEY systems are no longer working. off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle This message displays if a Remote Have the climate control system after 30 seconds and check for the Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter serviced by your dealer/retailer message on the DIC display. If the battery is low. The battery needs if you notice a drop in heating message is still displayed or appears to be replaced in the transmitter. and air conditioning efficiency. again when you begin driving, See “Battery Replacement” under the AWD system needs service. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) See your dealer/retailer. System Operation on page 2-4. 3-62 Instrument Panel

SERVICE BATTERY still displayed or appears again when SERVICE STABILITRAK you begin driving, the brake system CHARGING SYSTEM This message displays if there needs service as soon as possible. is a problem with the StabiliTrak® On some vehicles, this message See your dealer/retailer. displays if there is a problem system. If this message appears, with the battery charging system. SERVICE PARK ASSIST try to reset the system. Stop; turn off Under certain conditions, the the engine for at least 15 seconds; charging system light may also turn If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic then start the engine again. If this on in the instrument panel cluster. Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, message still comes on, it means See Charging System Light on this message displays if there is a there is a problem. See your dealer/ page 3-35. Driving with this problem problem with the URPA system. retailer for service. The vehicle is could drain the battery. Turn off all Do not use this system to help you safe to drive, however, you do not unnecessary accessories. Have the park. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking have the beneﬁt of StabiliTrak, electrical system checked as soon Assist (URPA) on page 2-34 for more so reduce your speed and drive as possible. See your dealer/retailer. information. See your dealer/retailer accordingly. for service. SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM This message displays along with the brake system warning light if This message displays when a This message displays when there there is a problem with the brake problem is detected with the power is a problem with the theft-deterrent system. See Brake System Warning steering system. When this message system. The vehicle may or may Light on page 3-36. If this message is displayed, you may notice that the not restart so you may want to take appears, stop as soon as possible effort required to steer the vehicle the vehicle to your dealer/retailer and turn off the vehicle. Restart the increases or feels heavier, but you before turning off the engine. vehicle and check for the message will still be able to steer the vehicle. See PASS-Key¨ III+ Electronic on the DIC display. If the message is Have your vehicle serviced by your Immobilizer Operation on page 2-18 dealer/retailer immediately. for more information. Instrument Panel 3-63

SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SERVICE TRACTION SPEED LIMITED TO SYSTEM CONTROL XXX MPH (KM/H) On vehicles with the Tire This message displays when there This message displays when your Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), is a problem with the Traction Control vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph this message displays if a part on System (TCS). When this message (128 km/h) because the vehicle the TPMS is not working properly. is displayed, the system will not limit detects a problem in the speed The tire pressure light also ﬂashes wheel spin. Adjust your driving variable assist steering system. and then remains on during the same accordingly. See your dealer/retailer Have your vehicle serviced by ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure for service. See StabiliTrak¨ System your dealer/retailer. Light on page 3-39. Several on page 4-5 for more information. conditions may cause this message STARTING DISABLED to appear. See Tire Pressure Monitor SERVICE TRANSMISSION SERVICE THROTTLE Operation on page 5-48 for more This message displays when there This message displays when your information. If the warning comes is a problem with the transmission. vehicle’s throttle system is not on and stays on, there may be a See your dealer/retailer for service. functioning properly. Have your problem with the TPMS. See your vehicle serviced by your dealer/ dealer/retailer. SERVICE VEHICLE SOON retailer. This message displays when a non-emissions related malfunction THEFT ATTEMPTED occurs. Have the vehicle serviced This message displays if the content by your dealer/retailer as soon theft-deterrent system has detected as possible. a break-in attempt while you were away from your vehicle. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-16 for more information. 3-64 Instrument Panel

TIGHTEN GAS CAP TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE This message may display along On vehicles with the Tire ENGINE with the check engine light on the Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), Notice: If you drive your vehicle instrument panel cluster if the this message displays when the while the transmission fluid is vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened TPMS is re-learning the tire positions overheating and the transmission properly. See Malfunction Indicator on your vehicle. The tire positions temperature warning is displayed Lamp on page 3-39. Reinstall the must be re-learned after rotating on the instrument panel cluster fuel cap fully. See Filling the Tank the tires or after replacing a tire or and/or DIC, you can damage the on page 5-8. The diagnostic system sensor. See Tire Inspection and transmission. This could lead to can determine if the fuel cap has Rotation on page 5-52, Tire Pressure costly repairs that would not be been left off or improperly installed. Monitor System on page 5-46, covered by your warranty. Do not A loose or missing fuel cap and Inflation - Tire Pressure on drive your vehicle with overheated allows fuel to evaporate into the page 5-45 for more information. transmission fluid or while the atmosphere. A few driving trips with transmission temperature warning the cap properly installed should TRACTION CONTROL OFF is displayed. turn this light and message off. This message displays when This message displays and a chime the Traction Control System (TCS) sounds if the transmission fluid in is turned off. Adjust your driving the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the accordingly. See StabiliTrak¨ transmission fluid temperature high System on page 4-5 for more can cause damage to the vehicle. information. This message clears Stop the vehicle and let it idle to itself after 10 seconds. allow the transmission to cool. This message clears when the fluid temperature reaches a safe level. Instrument Panel 3-65

TURN SIGNAL ON DIC Vehicle The customization preferences are automatically recalled. This message displays and a chime Customization sounds if a turn signal is left on (With DIC Buttons) To change customization for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the preferences, use the following turn signal/multifunction lever to Your vehicle may have procedure. the off position. customization capabilities that allow you to program certain Entering the Feature WASHER FLUID LOW ADD features to one preferred setting. Settings Menu FLUID Customization features can only be 1. Turn the ignition on and place programmed to one setting on the This message displays when the the vehicle in P (Park). vehicle and cannot be programmed windshield washer fluid is low. to a preferred setting for two different To avoid excessive drain on the Fill the windshield washer fluid drivers. battery, it is recommended that reservoir as soon as possible. the headlamps are turned off. See Engine Compartment Overview All of the customization options on page 5-12 for the location of the may not be available on your vehicle. 2. Press the customization button to windshield washer fluid reservoir. Only the options available will be enter the feature settings menu. Also, see Windshield Washer Fluid displayed on the DIC. If the menu is not available, on page 5-26 for more information. FEATURE SETTINGS The default settings for the AVAILABLE IN PARK will customization features were set display. Before entering the when your vehicle left the factory, menu, make sure the vehicle but may have been changed from is in P (Park). their default state since then. 3-66 Instrument Panel

Feature Settings Menu Items DISPLAY LANGUAGE NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current The following are customization This feature allows you to select setting will remain. features that allow you to program the language in which the DIC settings to the vehicle: messages will appear. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired DISPLAY IN ENGLISH Press the customization button until the DISPLAY LANGUAGE setting is displayed on the DIC. This feature will only display if a screen appears on the DIC display. You can also change the language language other than English has Press the set/reset button once by pressing the trip odometer reset been set. This feature allows you to to access the settings for this stem. See “Language” under DIC change the language in which the feature. Then press the Operation and Displays (Without DIC messages appear to English. customization button to scroll DIC Buttons) earlier in this section Press the customization button until through the following settings: for more information. V the PRESS TO DISPLAY IN ENGLISH (default): All messages AUTO DOOR LOCK ENGLISH screen appears on the will appear in English. DIC display. Press the set/reset This feature allows you to button once to display all DIC FRANCAIS: All messages will select when the vehicle’s messages in English. appear in French. doors will automatically lock. See Programmable Automatic ESPANOL: All messages will Door Locks on page 2-9 for more appear in Spanish. information. Instrument Panel 3-67

Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the AUTO DOOR LOCK appears on This feature allows you to driver’s door will unlock when the DIC display. Press the set/reset select whether or not to turn the key is taken out of the ignition. button once to access the settings off the automatic door unlocking DRIVER IN PARK: Only the for this feature. Then press the feature. It also allows you to customization button to scroll driver’s door will unlock when the select which doors and when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). through the following settings: doors will automatically unlock. SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): See Programmable Automatic ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors The doors will automatically lock Door Locks on page 2-9 for will unlock when the key is taken when the vehicle is shifted out of more information. out of the ignition. P (Park). Press the customization button until ALL IN PARK (default): All of AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on the doors will unlock when the will automatically lock when the the DIC display. Press the set/reset vehicle is shifted into P (Park). button once to access the settings vehicle speed is above 8 mph NO CHANGE: No change will be for this feature. Then press the (13 km/h) for three seconds. made to this feature. The current customization button to scroll setting will remain. NO CHANGE: No change will be through the following settings: made to this feature. The current To select a setting, press the setting will remain. OFF: None of the doors will set/reset button while the desired automatically unlock. To select a setting, press the setting is displayed on the DIC. set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. 3-68 Instrument Panel

REMOTE DOOR LOCK HORN & LIGHTS (default): Press the customization button until This feature allows you to select The exterior lamps will flash REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears the type of feedback you will receive when you press the lock button on the DIC display. Press the when locking the vehicle with the on the RKE transmitter, and the horn set/reset button once to access the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) will sound when the lock button is settings for this feature. Then press transmitter. You will not receive pressed again within five seconds the customization button to scroll feedback when locking the vehicle of the previous command. through the following settings: with the RKE transmitter if the doors NO CHANGE: No change will be LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps are open. See Remote Keyless made to this feature. The current will not flash when you press Entry (RKE) System Operation setting will remain. the unlock button on the RKE on page 2-4 for more information. transmitter. To select a setting, press the Press the customization button until set/reset button while the desired REMOTE DOOR LOCK appears on LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior setting is displayed on the DIC. the DIC display. Press the set/reset lamps will flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE button once to access the settings REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK for this feature. Then press the transmitter. This feature allows you to select customization button to scroll NO CHANGE: No change will be through the following settings: the type of feedback you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with made to this feature. The current OFF: There will be no feedback the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) setting will remain. when you press the lock button on transmitter. You will not receive To select a setting, press the the RKE transmitter. feedback when unlocking the vehicle set/reset button while the desired LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps with the RKE transmitter if the doors setting is displayed on the DIC. will flash when you press the lock are open. See Remote Keyless button on the RKE transmitter. Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-4 for more information. HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter. Instrument Panel 3-69

DELAY DOOR LOCK for this feature. Then press the Press the customization button until This feature allows you to select customization button to scroll EXIT LIGHTING appears on the whether or not the locking of the through the following settings: DIC display. Press the set/reset vehicle’s doors and liftgate will be button once to access the settings OFF: There will be no delayed for this feature. Then press the delayed. When locking the doors locking of the vehicle’s doors. and liftgate with the power door lock customization button to scroll switch and a door or the liftgate is ON (default): The doors will not through the following settings: open, this feature will delay locking lock until ﬁve seconds after the last OFF: The exterior lamps will not the doors and liftgate until ﬁve door or the liftgate is closed. turn on. seconds after the last door is closed. NO CHANGE: No change will be You will hear three chimes to signal 30 SECONDS (default): The made to this feature. The current exterior lamps will stay on for that the delayed locking feature is setting will remain. in use. The key must be out of the 30 seconds. To select a setting, press the ignition for this feature to work. 1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will set/reset button while the desired You can temporarily override stay on for one minute. delayed locking by pressing the setting is displayed on the DIC. power door lock switch twice or the 2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will lock button on the RKE transmitter EXIT LIGHTING stay on for two minutes. twice. See Delayed Locking on This feature allows you to select the page 2-8 for more information. amount of time you want the exterior NO CHANGE: No change will be lamps to remain on when it is dark made to this feature. The current Press the customization button until enough outside. This happens after setting will remain. DELAY DOOR LOCK appears on the key is turned from ON/RUN to the DIC display. Press the set/reset To select a setting, press the LOCK/OFF. button once to access the settings set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. 3-70 Instrument Panel

APPROACH LIGHTING The lights will remain on for button once to access the settings This feature allows you to select 20 seconds or until the lock button for this feature. Then press the whether or not to have the exterior on the RKE transmitter is pressed, customization button to scroll lights turn on brieﬂy during low or the vehicle is no longer off. through the following settings: light periods after unlocking See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-4 NORMAL: The chime volume will the vehicle using the Remote be set to a normal level. Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. for more information. NO CHANGE: No change will be LOUD: The chime volume will be Press the customization button until set to a loud level. APPROACH LIGHTING appears on made to this feature. The current the DIC display. Press the set/reset setting will remain. NO CHANGE: No change will be button once to access the settings To select a setting, press the made to this feature. The current for this feature. Then press the set/reset button while the desired setting will remain. customization button to scroll setting is displayed on the DIC. There is no default for chime through the following settings: volume. The volume will stay at CHIME VOLUME OFF: The exterior lights will not the last known setting. turn on when you unlock the vehicle This feature allows you to select the volume level of the chime. To select a setting, press the with the RKE transmitter. set/reset button while the desired ON (default): If it is dark enough Press the customization button until setting is displayed on the DIC. outside, the exterior lights will CHIME VOLUME appears on the turn on brieﬂy when you unlock the DIC display. Press the set/reset vehicle with the RKE transmitter. Instrument Panel 3-71

PARK TILT MIRRORS PASSENGER MIRROR: The for this feature. Then press the If your vehicle has this feature, passenger’s outside mirror will be customization button to scroll it allows you to select whether tilted down when the vehicle is through the following settings: shifted into R (Reverse). or not the outside mirror(s) will OFF (default): No automatic seat automatically tilt down when the BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and exit recall will occur. vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). passenger’s outside mirrors will See Outside Power Foldaway be tilted down when the vehicle ON: The driver’s seat will move Mirrors on page 2-33 for more is shifted into R (Reverse). back when the key is removed from information. the ignition. NO CHANGE: No change will be Press the customization button until made to this feature. The current The automatic easy exit seat PARK TILT MIRRORS appears on setting will remain. movement will only occur one time the DIC display. Press the set/reset after the key is removed from the button once to access the settings To select a setting, press the ignition. If the automatic movement for this feature. Then press the set/reset button while the desired has already occurred, and you put customization button to scroll setting is displayed on the DIC. the key back in the ignition and through the following settings: remove it again, the seat will stay in EASY EXIT SEAT the original exit position, unless a OFF (default): Neither outside If your vehicle has this feature, it memory recall took place prior to mirror will be tilted down when the allows you to select your preference removing the key again. vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). for the automatic easy exit seat NO CHANGE: No change will be DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s feature. See Memory Seat and Mirrors on page 1-6 for more made to this feature. The current outside mirror will be tilted down setting will remain. when the vehicle is shifted into information. R (Reverse). Press the customization button until To select a setting, press the EASY EXIT SEAT appears on set/reset button while the desired the DIC display. Press the set/reset setting is displayed on the DIC. button once to access the settings 3-72 Instrument Panel

MEMORY SEAT RECALL ON: The driver’s seat and outside REMOTE START If your vehicle has this feature, it mirrors will automatically move If your vehicle has this feature, allows you to select your preference to the stored driving position when it allows you to turn the remote start for the remote memory seat recall the unlock button on the Remote off or on. The remote start feature feature. See Memory Seat and Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is allows you to start the engine from Mirrors on page 1-6 for more pressed. See “Relearn Remote Key” outside of the vehicle using the information. under DIC Operation and Displays Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-45 transmitter. See Remote Vehicle Press the customization button until or DIC Operation and Displays Start on page 2-6 for more MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears (Without DIC Buttons) on page 3-50 information. on the DIC display. Press the for more information on matching set/reset button once to access the transmitters to driver ID numbers. Press the customization button until settings for this feature. Then press REMOTE START appears on the the customization button to scroll NO CHANGE: No change will DIC display. Press the set/reset through the following settings: be made to this feature. The current button once to access the settings setting will remain. for this feature. Then press the OFF (default): No remote memory customization button to scroll seat recall will occur. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired through the following settings: setting is displayed on the DIC. OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled. ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled. Instrument Panel 3-73

NO CHANGE: No change will be DO NOT RESTORE: The Exiting the Feature made to this feature. The current customization features will not be Settings Menu setting will remain. set to their factory default settings. The feature settings menu will be To select a setting, press the To select a setting, press the exited when any of the following set/reset button while the desired set/reset button while the desired occurs: setting is displayed on the DIC. setting is displayed on the DIC. • The vehicle is shifted out of FACTORY SETTINGS EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS P (Park). This feature allows you to set all of This feature allows you to exit the • The vehicle is no longer in the customization features back feature settings menu. ON/RUN. to their factory default settings. Press the customization button • The trip/fuel or vehicle Press the customization button until until FEATURE SETTINGS information DIC buttons are pressed. FACTORY SETTINGS appears on PRESS V TO EXIT appears in the DIC display. Press the set/reset the DIC display. Press the set/reset • The end of the feature settings button once to access the settings button once to exit the menu. menu is reached and exited. for this feature. Then press the • A 40 second time period has customization button to scroll If you do not exit, pressing the elapsed with no selection made. through the following settings: customization button again will return you to the beginning of the feature RESTORE ALL (default): The settings menu. customization features will be set to their factory default settings. 3-74 Instrument Panel

Audio System(s) For more information, see Defensive Setting the Clock Driving on page 4-2. Determine which radio the vehicle To adjust the time and date: Notice: Contact your dealer/ has and read the following pages to 1. Turn the ignition key to retailer before adding any become familiar with its features. ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, equipment. then press O, to turn the { CAUTION Adding audio or communication radio on. equipment could interfere with the G Taking your eyes off the road operation of the vehicle’s engine, 2. Press to display HR, MIN, for extended periods could radio, or other systems, and could MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, cause a crash resulting in injury damage them. Follow federal rules month, day, and year). covering mobile radio and or death to you or others. Do 3. Press the pushbutton located telephone equipment. not give extended attention to under any one of the labels to entertainment tasks while driving. The vehicle has Retained Accessory be changed. Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio 4. To increase the time or date, do This system provides access to system can be played even after the one of the following: many audio and non audio listings. ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on • Press the pushbutton below To minimize taking your eyes off page 2-21 for more information. the selected label. the road while driving, do the • Press ¨SEEK. following while the vehicle is parked: • Become familiar with the • Press \ FWD. operation and controls of • Turn f clockwise. the audio system. • Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset radio stations. Instrument Panel 3-75

5. To decrease the time or date, Radio(s) do one of the following: • Press ©SEEK. • Press s REV. • Turn f counter-clockwise. To change the time default setting from 12 hour to 24 hour or to change the date default setting from month/day/year to day/month/year: 1. Press G and then the pushbutton located under the forward arrow that displays on the radio screen until the time 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and the date MM/DD (month and day) and DD/MM (day and month) displays. 2. Press the pushbutton located Radio with CD under the desired option. 3. Press G again to apply the selected default, or let the screen time out. 3-76 Instrument Panel

The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate. The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD Video media. DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Radio Data System (RDS) The Radio Data System (RDS) feature is available for use only on FM stations that broadcast RDS information. This system relies upon Radio with CD and DVD receiving speciﬁc information from these stations and only works when The vehicle may have one of these If the vehicle has a Rear Seat the information is available. While the radios as its audio system. Entertainment (RSE) system, radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, it has a CD/DVD radio. See Rear the station name or call letters Radios with CD and DVD Seat Entertainment (RSE) System display. In rare cases, a radio station Radios with CD and DVD have a on page 3-114 for more information could broadcast incorrect information ® Bose Surround Sound System. on the vehicle’s RSE system. that causes the radio features to Some of its features are explained work improperly. If this happens, later in this section under, “Adjusting contact the radio station. the Speakers (Balance/Fade)”. Instrument Panel 3-77

Playing the Radio 4 (Information): Press to switch the To activate SCV: display between the radio station O (Power/Volume): Press to turn 1. Set the radio volume to the frequency and the time. When the desired level. the system on and off. Turn to 4 increase or decrease the volume. ignition is in the OFF position, press 2. Press the MENU button to to display the time. For vehicles with display the radio setup menu. For vehicles with a Rear XM, MP3, WMA or RDS features, 3. Press the pushbutton under Entertainment System (RSE), press 4 to display additional text press and hold for more than the AUTO VOLUM (automatic information related to the current two seconds to turn off the entire volume) label on the radio FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, radio and RSE system and to display. MP3 or WMA song. If information start the parental control feature. is available during XM, CD, MP3 4. Press the pushbutton under the Parental control prevents the rear or WMA playback, the song title desired Speed Compensated seat occupant from operating the information displays on the top line Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med, Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system or of the display and artist information or High) to select the level of radio remote control. displays on the bottom line. volume compensation. Press the A lock symbol displays next to When information is not available, pushbutton located below the the clock display while the parental “NO INFO” is displayed. BACK label on the MENU SETUP control feature is being used. display or let the display time out Speed Compensated Volume after approximately 10 seconds. The feature remains on until O is (SCV): The Speed Compensated Each higher setting allows for pressed and held for more than Volume (SCV) feature automatically more radio volume compensation two seconds, or the driver turns the adjusts the radio volume to at faster vehicle speeds. ignition off and exits the vehicle. compensate for road and wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows down, so that the volume level is consistent. 3-78 Instrument Panel

Finding a Station Storing a Radio Station as a The balance/fade and tone settings Favorite that were previously adjusted, BAND: Press to switch between are stored with the favorite stations. AM, FM, or XM. The selection Drivers are encouraged to set up displays. their radio station favorites while To store a station as a favorite: the vehicle is in P (Park). Tune to 1. Tune to the desired radio station. f (Tune): Turn to select radio favorite stations using the presets, stations. favorites button, and steering 2. Press FAV to display the page where to store the station. © ¨ wheel controls. See Defensive SEEK : Press to go to the Driving on page 4-2. 3. Press and hold one of the previous or to the next station six pushbuttons until a beep FAV (Favorites): A maximum of and stay there. sounds. When that pushbutton 36 stations can be programmed as is pressed and released, the To scan stations, press and favorites using the six pushbuttons station that was set, returns. hold ©or ¨ until a beep sounds. positioned below the radio station The radio goes to a station, plays for frequency labels and by using the 4. Repeat the steps for each radio a few seconds, then goes to the next radio favorites page button (FAV station to be stored as a favorite. station. Press either arrow again to button). Press to go through up to stop scanning. six pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations available per The radio only seeks and scans page. Each page of favorites can stations with a strong signal that contain any combination of AM, FM, are in the selected band. or XM stations. Instrument Panel 3-79

To setup the number of favorites Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service, Setting the Tone pages: CD, MP3, and WMA features): If (Bass/Midrange/Treble) additional information is available for 1. Press MENU to display the radio BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, setup menu. the current song being played, Auto Text will automatically page/scroll the or Treble): To adjust bass, 2. Press the pushbutton located information every ﬁve seconds above midrange, or treble: below the FAV 1-6 label. the FAV presets on the radio display. 1. Press f until the tone control 3. Select the desired number of To activate Auto Text: labels display. favorites pages by pressing the pushbutton located below 1. Press MENU to display the radio 2. Continue pressing f to highlight the displayed page numbers. setup menu. the desired label, or press the pushbutton under the desired 4. Press FAV, or let the menu 2. Press the pushbutton under label. time out, to return to the original AUTO TXT label on the radio main radio screen showing the display. 3. To adjust the highlighted setting, radio station frequency labels 3. Press the pushbutton under the do one of the following until the and to begin the process of ON label on the radio display. desired levels are obtained. programming favorites for the • Turn f clockwise or chosen amount of numbered If 4 is pressed and the song title counterclockwise. pages. or artist information is longer than what can be displayed, the extra • Press \ FWD, or s REV. information will page every ﬁve seconds when Auto Text is activated. If a station’s frequency is weak or if there is static, decrease the treble. 3-80 Instrument Panel

To quickly adjust bass, midrange, Adjusting the Speakers To quickly adjust all speaker and or treble to the middle position, (Balance/Fade) tone controls to the middle position, press the pushbutton positioned press f for more than two seconds BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): under the BASS, MID, or TREB until a beep sounds. label for more than two seconds. To adjust the balance or fade: Radios with CD and DVD fade A beep sounds and the level adjusts 1. Press f until the speaker control to the middle position. differently depending on the DVD labels display. Media type: To quickly adjust all tone and 2. Continue pressing f to highlight speaker controls to the middle • With DVD-A 5.1 Surround the desired label, or press the media, the left front and right position, press f for more than pushbutton under the desired front speakers fade rearward, two seconds until a beep sounds. label. leaving the center front speakers EQ (Equalization): Press to choose 3. To adjust the highlighted setting, unaffected until the last fade step, bass and treble equalization settings do one of the following until the then all front speakers mute. designed for different types of music. desired levels are obtained. • With DVD-V 5.1 Surround media, The choices are pop, rock, country, • Turn f clockwise or surround sound is maintained talk, jazz, and classical. Selecting until Step 4 of the Fade control is counterclockwise. MANUAL or changing bass or treble, reached while fading rearward. returns the EQ to the manual bass • Press \ FWD, or s REV. At that point the audio system and treble settings. output changes to Stereo to To quickly adjust balance or fade prevent the loss of Center Unique EQ settings can be saved to the middle position, press the for each source. channel output when the full pushbutton positioned under the rearward fade position is reached. If the radio has a Bose® audio BAL or FADE label for more than system, the EQ settings are either two seconds. A beep sounds and the If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is MANUAL or TALK. level adjusts to the middle position. turned on, the radio disables FADE and mutes the rear speakers. Instrument Panel 3-81

Finding a Category (CAT) 5. To go to the next or previous 3. Turn f to display the category to Station XM station within the selected be removed. category, do one of the following: CAT (Category): The CAT button is 4. Press the pushbutton located used to find XM™ stations when the • Turn f. under the Remove label until radio is in the XM mode. To find XM • Press the buttons below the the category name along with channels within a desired category: right or left arrows on the the word Removed displays. 1. Press BAND until the XM display. 5. Repeat the steps to remove frequency displays. • Press either SEEK arrow. more categories. 2. Press CAT to display the 6. To exit the category search Removed categories can be category labels. mode, press the FAV button restored by pressing the pushbutton 3. Continue pressing CAT until the or BAND button to display under the Add label when a removed desired category name displays. the favorites again. category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton under the Restore • Radios with CD and DVD Undesired XM categories can All label. can also navigate the category be removed through the setup list by pressing s REV or menu. To remove an undesired Categories cannot be removed or \ category, perform the following: added while the vehicle is moving FWD. faster than 5 mph (8 km/h). 1. Press MENU to display the radio 4. Press either of the two buttons setup menu. below the desired category label to immediately tune to the first 2. Press the pushbutton located XM station associated with that below the XM CAT label. category. 3-82 Instrument Panel

Radio Messages XM™ Satellite Radio Service Playing a CD Calibration Error: The audio XM is a satellite radio service that is (Single CD Player) system has been calibrated for the based in the 48 contiguous United Insert a CD partway into the slot, vehicle from the factory. If Calibration States and 10 Canadian provinces. label side up. The player pulls Error displays, it means that the radio XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety it in and the CD should begin has not been conﬁgured properly for of programming and commercial-free playing. the vehicle and it must be returned music, coast-to-coast, and in to your dealer/retailer for service. digital-quality sound. During your Playing a CD (In Either trial or when you subscribe, you will the DVD or CD Slot) Locked: This message displays get unlimited access to XM Radio ® Insert a CD partway into the slot, when the THEFTLOCK system Online for when you are not in the has locked up the radio. Take label side up. The player pulls vehicle. A service fee is required it in and the CD should begin the vehicle to your dealer/retailer to receive the XM service. For for service. playing (loading a disc into the more information, contact XM at system, depending on media If any error occurs repeatedly or if xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 type and format ranges from an error cannot be corrected, contact in the U.S. and xmradio.ca or call 5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and your dealer/retailer. 1-877-438-9677 in Canada. up to 30 seconds for a DVD to Radio Messages for XM Only begin playing). See XM Radio Messages on page 3-102 later in this section for further detail. Instrument Panel 3-83

If the ignition or radio is turned off, Care of CDs and DVDs If the surface of a CD is soiled, take while a CD is in the player, it stays in If playing a CD-R, the sound quality a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a the player. When the ignition or radio can be reduced due to CD-R or clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral is turned on, the CD starts playing CD-RW quality, the method of detergent solution mixed with water, where it stopped, if it was the last recording, the quality of the music and clean it. Make sure the wiping selected audio source. The CD is that has been recorded, and the process starts from the center to controlled by the buttons on the way the CD-R or CD-RW has been the edge. radio faceplate or by the RSA unit. handled. Handle them carefully. Care of the CD and DVD Player See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their page 3-123 for more information. original cases or other protective Do not add any label to a CD, it The DVD/CD decks, (upper slot is cases and away from direct sunlight could get caught in the CD or DVD the DVD deck and the lower slot and dust. The CD or DVD player player. If a CD is recorded on a is the CD deck) of the radio are scans the bottom surface of the disc. personal computer and a description compatible with most audio CDs, If the surface of a CD is damaged, label is needed, try labeling the top of CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3/WMAs. such as cracked, broken, or the recorded CD with a marking pen. When a CD is inserted, the text scratched, the CD does not play label DVD or CD symbol displays properly or not at all. Do not touch on the left side of the radio display. the bottom side of a CD while As each new track starts to play, handling it; this could damage the the track number displays. surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge. 3-84 Instrument Panel

The use of CD lens cleaners for Z EJECT or CD (Eject): Press f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on CDs is not advised, due to the risk and release to eject the disc that is the CD that is currently playing. of contaminating the lens of the currently playing. A CD ejecting from CD optics with lubricants internal to a radio with CD and DVD, ejects ©SEEK ¨: Press ©to go to the the CD and DVD player mechanism. from the bottom slot. A beep sounds start of the current track, if more than Notice: If a label is added to and Ejecting Disc displays. Once ten seconds on the CD have played. a CD, or more than one CD is the disc is ejected, Remove Disc Press ¨to go to the next track. inserted into the slot at a time, displays. The disc can be removed. For Radios with CD and DVD, or an attempt is made to play If the disc is not removed, after scratched or damaged CDs, the several seconds, the disc press ©to go to the start of CD player could be damaged. automatically pulls back into the current track, if more than While using the CD player, use the player. five seconds on the CD have played. only CDs in good condition If less than five seconds on the CD Z DVD (Eject): Press and without any label, load one CD at a have played, the previous track time, and keep the CD player and release to eject the disc that is plays. Press ¨to go to the next currently playing in the top slot. the loading slot free of foreign track. materials, liquids, and debris. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. If either arrow is held, or pressed If an error displays, see “CD multiple times, the player continues If loading and reading of a disc Messages” later in this section. moving backward or forward through cannot be completed, and the the tracks on the CD. disc fails to eject, press and hold Z DVD for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject. Instrument Panel 3-85 s REV (Fast Reverse): Press BAND: Press to listen to the DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press and hold to reverse playback quickly radio when a CD is playing. The CD to select between DVD, CD, or within a track. Sound will be heard remains inside the radio for future Auxiliary. at a reduced volume. Release to listening. • If an auxiliary input device is not resume playing the track. The For the radio with CD and DVD, connected, “No Aux Input Device” elapsed time of the track displays. press to listen to the radio when a displays. CD or DVD is playing. The CD or \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press • When a disc is in either slot, DVD remains inside the radio for and hold to advance playback the DVD/CD text label and a future listening or for viewing message showing the track or quickly within a track. Sound will entertainment. be heard at a reduced volume. chapter number displays. Release to resume playing the CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to • If an auxiliary input device is not track. The elapsed time of the select between CD, or Auxiliary. connected, and a disc is in both track displays. • When a CD is in the player the the DVD slot and the CD slot the CD icon and a message showing DVD/CD AUX button only cycles RDM (Random): CD tracks can between the two sources and be listened to in random, rather than the disc and/or track number displays. does not indicate “No Aux Input sequential order with the random Device”. setting. To use random, press the • If an auxiliary input device is not pushbutton positioned under the connected, “No Input Device • If a front auxiliary input device RDM label until Random Current Found” displays. is connected, the DVD/CD AUX Disc displays. Press the pushbutton button cycles through all available again to turn off random play. options. 3-86 Instrument Panel

If a disc is inserted into top DVD Front seat passengers can listen Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or slot, the rear seat operator can turn to the radio (AM, FM, or XM) by CD-RW Disc on the video screen and use the pressing BAND or DVD/CD AUX to remote control to only navigate select the CD slot, DVD slot, front or The radio has the capability of the CD tracks through the remote rear auxiliary input (if available). playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or control. CD-RW disc. For more information If a playback device is plugged into on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R See “Using the Auxiliary Input the radio’s front auxiliary input jack or CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” Jack(s)” later in this section, or or the rear auxiliary jack, the front in the index. “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, seat passengers are able to listen to Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) playback from this source through CD Messages System on page 3-114 for more the vehicle speakers. See “Using the CHECK DISC: Radios with a Single information. Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this CD player display CHECK DISC section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” Radios with CD and DVD and/or ejects the CD if an error under, Rear Seat Entertainment occurs. Audio Output (RSE) System on page 3-114 for Only one audio source can be more information. Radios with a CD and DVD player may display other messages when heard through the speakers at one In some vehicles, depending on an error occurs: time. An audio source is deﬁned audio options, the rear speakers as DVD slot, CD slot, XM, FM/AM, can be muted when the RSA Optical Error: The disc was Front Auxiliary Jack, or Rear power is turned on. See Rear inserted upside down. Auxiliary Jack. Seat Audio (RSA) on page 3-123 O for more information. Disk Read Error: A disc was Press to turn the radio on. inserted with an invalid or unknown The radio can be heard through format. all of the vehicle speakers. Instrument Panel 3-87

Player Error: There are disc LOAD Using the DVD Player Playing a DVD or disc EJECT problems. The DVD player can be controlled f (Tune): Turn to change tracks • It is very hot. When the by the buttons on the remote control, on a CD or DVD, to manually tune temperature returns to normal, the RSA system, or by the buttons a radio station, or to change clock the CD should play. on the radio faceplate. See “Remote or date settings, while in the clock • The road is very rough. When Control”, under Rear Seat or date setting mode. See the the road becomes smoother, Entertainment (RSE) System on information given earlier in this the CD should play. page 3-114 and Rear Seat Audio section specific to the radio, CD, (RSA) on page 3-123 for more and the DVD. Also, see “Setting the • The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, information. or upside down. Clock” in the index, for setting the The DVD player is only compatible clock and date. • The air is very humid. If so, wait with DVDs of the appropriate region © about an hour and try again. code that is printed on the jacket of SEEK (Previous Track/ • There could have been a problem most DVDs. Chapter): Press to return to the while burning the CD. start of the current track or chapter. The DVD slot of the radio is Press © again to go to the previous • The label could be caught in the compatible with most audio track or chapter. This button may not CD player. CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video, work when the DVD is playing the DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/ If the CD is not playing correctly copyright information or the RW media along with MP3 and for any other reason, try a known previews. good CD. WMA formats. SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter): If any error occurs repeatedly or if If an error message displays on Press to go to the next track an error cannot be corrected, contact the video screen or the radio, see or chapter. This button may not your dealer/retailer. If the radio “DVD Display Error Messages” work when the DVD is playing displays an error message, write it under, Rear Seat Entertainment the copyright information or down and provide it to your dealer/ (RSE) System on page 3-114 and the previews. retailer when reporting the problem. “DVD Radio Error Messages” in this section for more information. 3-88 Instrument Panel s REV (Fast Reverse): Press to If loading and reading of a DVD r / j (Play/Pause): Press either quickly reverse the DVD at five times cannot be completed, because of an the play or pause icon displayed the normal speed. The radio displays unknown format, etc., and the disc on the radio system, to toggle the elapsed time while in fast fails to eject, press and hold for more between pausing or restarting reverse. To stop fast reversing, than five seconds to force the disc playback of a DVD. to eject. press again. This button may not • If the forward arrow is showing work when the DVD is playing DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons on display, the system is in the copyright information or the pause mode. previews. Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menu shows several icons. • If the pause icon is showing \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press Press the pushbuttons located under on display, the system is in to fast forward the DVD. The radio any desired icon during DVD playback mode. displays the elapsed time and fast playback. See the icon list below • If the DVD screen is off, press the forwards five times the normal for more information. play button to turn the screen on. speed. To stop fast forwarding, The rear seat passenger can Some DVDs begin playing after press again. This button may not navigate the DVD-V menus and work when the DVD is playing the previews have finished, although controls through the remote control. there could be a delay of up to the copyright information or the See “Remote Control”, under Rear previews. 30 seconds. If the DVD does Seat Entertainment (RSE) System not begin playing the movie Z (Eject): Press to eject a DVD. on page 3-114 for more information. automatically, press the pushbutton The Video Screen automatically If the DVD is ejected, but not located under the play/pause icon turns on when the DVD-V is inserted removed, the player automatically displayed on the radio. If the DVD into the DVD slot. pulls it back in after 15 seconds. still does not play, refer to the on-screen instructions, if available. Instrument Panel 3-89 c (Stop): Press to stop playing, DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons r / j (Play/Pause): Press either rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. Once a DVD-A is inserted, the radio the play or pause icon displayed r display menu shows several icons. on the radio system, to toggle (Enter): Press to select the Press the pushbuttons located between pausing or restarting choices that are highlighted in under any desired icon during DVD playback of a DVD. any menu. playback. See the icon list below • If the forward arrow is showing for more information. y (Menu): Press to access the on display, the system is in DVD menu. The DVD menu is The rear seat operator can pause mode. different on every DVD. Use the navigate the DVD-A menus and • If the pause icon is showing pushbuttons located under the controls through the remote control. on display, the system is in navigation arrows to navigate the See “Remote Control”, under Rear playback mode. cursor through the DVD menu. Seat Entertainment (RSE) System After making a selection press this on page 3-114 for more information. q Group r: Press to cycle button. This button only operates The Video Screen does not through musical groupings on when using a DVD. automatically power on when the the DVD-A disc. DVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot. Nav (Navigate): Press to display It must be manually turned on by Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for navigating the rear seat occupant through directional arrows for navigating through the menus. the remote control power button. through the menus. q (Return): Press to exit the e (Audio Stream): Press to current active menu and return to cycle through audio stream the previous menu. This button formats located on the DVD-A disc. operates only when a DVD is The video screen shows the audio playing and a menu is active. stream changing. 3-90 Instrument Panel

Inserting a Disc Stopping and Resuming Playback The DVD should resume play from To play a disc, gently insert the To stop playing a DVD without where it last stopped if the disc has disc, with the label side up, into the turning off the system, do one not been ejected and the stop button loading slot. The DVD player might of the following: has not been pressed twice on the not accept some paper labeled remote control. If the disc has been • Press c on the remote control. media. The player starts loading the ejected or the stop button has been disc into the system and shows • Press the pushbutton located pressed twice on the remote control, “Loading Disc” on the radio display. under the stop or the play/pause the disc resumes playing at the At the same time, the radio displays icons displayed on the radio. beginning of the disc. a softkey menu of option(s). Some • If the radio head is sourced to Ejecting a Disc discs automatically play the movie something other than DVD-V, Press Z DVD on the radio to eject while others default to the softkey press the DVD/CD AUX button to menu display, which requires the make DVD-V the active source. the disc. If a disc is ejected from the Play, Enter, or Navigation softkeys radio, but not removed, the radio to be pressed; either by the softkey To resume DVD playback, do one reloads the disc after a short period on the radio or by the rear seat of the following: of time. The disc is stored in the passenger using the remote control. • Press r / j on the remote radio. The radio does not resume play of the disc automatically. If the It may take up to 30 seconds for a control. movie is reloaded and the RSA DVD to begin playing. • Press the pushbutton located system is sourced to the DVD, the under the play/pause icon player begins to play again. If loading displayed on the radio. and reading a DVD or CD cannot be completed, and the disc fails to eject, press and hold Z DVD for more than ﬁve seconds to force the disc to eject. Instrument Panel 3-91

DVD Radio Error Messages Using the Auxiliary Input Jack O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise Player Error: This message The radio system has an auxiliary or counterclockwise to increase displays when there are disc load input jack located on the lower right or decrease the volume of the or eject problems. side of the faceplate. This is not portable player. Additional volume an audio output; do not plug a adjustments might have to be made Disc Format Error: This message headphone set into the front auxiliary from the portable device if the displays, if the disc is inserted with input jack. Connect an auxiliary volume is not loud or soft enough. the disc label wrong side up, or if the input device such as an iPod, laptop disc is damaged. BAND: Press to listen to the radio computer, MP3 player, CD player, when a portable audio device is Disc Region Error: This message or cassette tape player, etc. to the playing. The portable audio device displays, if the disc is not from a auxiliary input jack for use as another continues playing, so you might correct region. source for audio listening. want to stop it or turn it off. Drivers are encouraged to set up No Disc Inserted: This message CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to any auxiliary device while the vehicle displays, if no disc is present select between CD, or Auxiliary. Z is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving when DVD or DVD/CD AUX on page 4-2 for more information on • When a CD is in the player is pressed on the radio. driver distraction. the CD icon and a message showing the disc and/or track To use an auxiliary input device, number displays. connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary • If an auxiliary input device is not input jack. connected, “No Input Device Found” displays. 3-92 Instrument Panel

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press • If a front auxiliary input device is Using an MP3 to select between DVD, CD, connected, the DVD/CD AUX (Radio with CD) or Auxiliary. button cycles through all available • If an auxiliary input device is not options. MP3/WMA CD-R or connected, “No Aux Input Device” If a disc is inserted into top DVD CD-RW Disc displays. slot, the rear seat operator can turn The radio plays MP3/WMA files that • When a disc is in either slot, on the video screen and use the were recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW the DVD/CD text label and a remote control to only navigate disc. The files can be recorded with message showing the track or the CD tracks through the remote the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, chapter number displays. control. 40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps, • If an auxiliary input device is not See “Using the Auxiliary Input 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, connected, and a disc is in both Jack(s)” later in this section, or 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable the DVD slot and the CD slot the “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, bit rate. Song title, artist name, and DVD/CD AUX button only cycles Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) album are available for display by the between the two sources and System on page 3-114 for more radio when recorded using ID3 tags does not indicate “No Aux Input information. version 1 and 2. Device”. Instrument Panel 3-93

Compressed Audio • Create a folder structure that or sessions. To play a large The radio also plays discs that makes it easy to find songs number of files, folders, playlists contain both uncompressed CD while driving. Organize songs or sessions, minimize the length audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA by albums using one folder for of the file, folder, or playlist name. files. The radio plays both file formats each album. Each folder or album Long names also take up more in the order in which they were should contain 18 songs or less. space on the display, potentially getting cut off. recorded to the disc. • Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to eight subfolders • Finalize the audio disc before MP3/WMA Format deep, however, keep the total burning it. Trying to add music to Creating an MP3/WMA disc on a number of folders to a minimum an existing disc could cause the personal computer: in order to reduce the complexity disc not to function in the player. and confusion in trying to locate a • Make sure the MP3/WMA files Change playlists by using S c and are recorded on a CD-R or particular folder during playback. c T folder buttons, the f knob, or CD-RW disc. • Make sure playlists have a .mp3 the SEEK arrows. An MP3/WMA • Do not mix standard audio and or .wpl extension (other file extensions might not work). CD-R or CD-RW that was recorded MP3/WMA files on one disc. using no file folders can be played. • The CD player is able to • Minimize the length of the file, If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more read and play a maximum of folder, or playlist names. Long file, than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 folders, 15 playlists, and a folder, or playlist names, or a 15 playlists, and a combined total combined total of 512 folders combination of a large number of 512 folders and files, the player and files. of files and folders, or playlists accesses and navigates up to the could cause the player to be maximum, but all items over the unable to play up to the maximum maximum are not accessible. number of files, folders, playlists, 3-94 Instrument Panel

Root Directory Empty Directory or Folder Order of Play The root directory of the CD-R If a root directory or a folder exists Tracks recorded to the CD-R or or CD-RW is treated as a folder. somewhere in the file structure that CD-RW disc are played in the If the root directory has compressed contains only folders/subfolders and following order: audio files, the directory displays no compressed files directly beneath • Play begins from the first track as the CD label. All files contained them, the player advances to the in the first playlist and continues directly under the root directory are next folder in the file structure that sequentially through all tracks in accessed prior to any root directory contains compressed audio files. each playlist. When the last track folders. However, playlists (Px) are The empty folder does not display. of the last playlist has played, play always accessed before root folders No Folder continues from the first track of or files. the first playlist. When the CD-R or CD-RW disc If a disc contains both • Play begins from the first track in uncompressed CD audio (.CDA) contains only compressed files, the files are located under the the first folder and continues and MP3/WMA files, a folder sequentially through all tracks in under the root directory called root folder. The next and previous folder function does not display on each folder. When the last track of CD accesses all of the CD audio the last folder has played, play tracks on the disc. a CD-R or CD-RW disc that was recorded without folders or playlists. continues from the first track of the first folder. When the CD-R or CD-RW disc contains only playlists and When play enters a new folder, compressed audio files, but no the display does not automatically folders, all files are located under show the new folder name unless the root folder. The folder down and the folder mode is chosen as the up buttons search playlists (Px) first default display. The new track name and then goes to the root folder. displays. Instrument Panel 3-95

File System and Naming Playing an MP3/WMA S c (Previous Folder): Press The song name that displays is the Insert a CD-R or CD-RW disc the pushbutton positioned under song name that is contained in the partway into the slot label side up. the Folder label to go to the ID3 tag. If the song name is not The player pulls it in, and the first track in the previous folder. present in the ID3 tag, then the radio CD-R or CD-RW should begin c T displays the file name without the playing. (Next Folder): Press extension (such as .mp3) as the the pushbutton positioned under track name. Z EJECT: Press to eject the disc. the Folder label to go to the first track in the next folder. Track names longer than f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA 32 characters or four pages are files on the CD-R or CD-RW s REV (Reverse): Press and shortened. Parts of words on the currently playing. hold this button to reverse playback last page of text and the extension quickly within an MP3/WMA file. of the filename does not display. ©SEEK ¨: Press the left Sound is heard at a reduced volume. SEEK arrow to go to the start of Release this button to resume Preprogrammed Playlists the current MP3/WMA file, if more playing the file. The elapsed time Preprogrammed playlists that than ten seconds have played. of the file displays. were created using WinAmp™, Press the right SEEK arrow to go MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ to the next MP3/WMA file. If either \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press software can be accessed, however, SEEK arrow is held or pressed and hold this button to advance they cannot be edited using the multiple times, the player continues playback quickly within an MP3/ radio. These playlists are treated moving backward or forward through WMA file. Sound is heard at a as special folders containing MP3/WMA files on the CD. reduced volume. Release this compressed audio song files. button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file displays. 3-96 Instrument Panel

RDM (Random): With the random of MP3/WMA files recorded to the To change from playback by artist setting, MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW disc. The radio can to playback by album, press the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to begin playing while it is scanning the pushbutton located below the Sort in random, rather than sequential disc in the background. When the By label. From the sort screen, push order. scan is finished, the CD-R or CD-RW one of the buttons below the album begins playing again. button. Press the pushbutton below To play MP3/WMA files from the the back label to return to the main CD-R or CD-RW in random order, Once the disc has scanned, the music navigator screen. Now the press the pushbutton positioned player defaults to playing MP3/WMA album name is displayed on the under the RDM label until Random files in order by artist. The current second line between the arrows and Current Disc displays. Press the artist playing is shown on the second songs from the current album begins same pushbutton again to turn off line of the display between the to play. Once all songs from that random play. arrows. Once all songs by that artist album are played, the player moves are played, the player moves to the h (Music Navigator): Use to the next album in alphabetical next artist in alphabetical order on order on the CD-R or CD-RW and the music navigator feature to play the CD-R or CD-RW and begins begins playing MP3/WMA files from MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or playing MP3/WMA files by that artist. that album. CD-RW in order by artist or album. To listen to MP3/WMA files by Press the pushbutton located below another artist, press the pushbutton To exit music navigator mode, press the music navigator label. The player located below either arrow button. the pushbutton below the Back label scans the disc to sort the files by The player goes to the next or to return to normal MP3/WMA artist and album ID3 tag information. previous artist in alphabetical order. playback. It could take several minutes to scan Continue pressing either button until the disc depending on the number the desired artist is displayed. Instrument Panel 3-97

Using an MP3 (Radio MP3/WMA Format order to reduce the complexity with CD and DVD Player) To create an MP3/WMA disc on a and confusion in trying to locate a personal computer: particular folder during playback. MP3/WMA CD-R or • Make sure the MP3/WMA files • Make sure playlists have a .m3u, CD-RW Disc are recorded on a CD-R or .wpl or .pls extension as other file Compressed Audio or Mixed CD-RW disc. extensions might not work. Mode Discs • Do not mix standard audio and • Minimize the length of the file, The radio also plays discs that MP3/WMA files on one disc. folder or playlist names. Long file, contain both uncompressed CD folder, or playlist names, or a • The CD player (lower slot) is combination of a large number of audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA able to read and play a maximum files depending on which slot the disc files and folders, or playlists could combination of 512 files and cause the player to be unable to is loaded into. By default the radio folders. The DVD player (upper reads only the uncompressed audio play up to the maximum number slot) is able to read 255 folders, of files, folders, playlists, or (.CDA) and ignores the MP3/WMA 15 playlists and 40 sessions. files on the DVD deck. On the CD sessions. To play a large number deck, pressing the CAT (category) • Create a folder structure that of files, folders, playlists, or button toggles between compressed makes it easy to find songs sessions, minimize the length of and uncompressed audio format, while driving. Organize songs the file, folder, or playlist name. the default being the uncompressed by albums using one folder for Long names also take up more format (.CDA). each album. Each folder or album space on the display, potentially should contain 18 songs or less. getting cut off. • Avoid subfolders. The system can • Finalize the audio disc before support up to eight subfolders burning it. Trying to add music to deep, however, keep the total an existing disc could cause the number of folders to a minimum in disc not to function in the player. 3-98 Instrument Panel

Root Directory No Folder Order of Play The root directory of the CD-R or When the CD-R or CD-RW disc Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW disc is treated as a folder. contains only compressed files, the CD-RW disc are played in the If the root directory has compressed files are located under the root folder. following order: audio files, the directory is displayed The next and previous folder function • Play begins from the first track as F1 ROOT. All files contained does not function on a CD-R or in the first playlist and continues directly under the root directory are CD-RW that was recorded without sequentially through all tracks in accessed prior to any root directory folders or playlists. When displaying each playlist. When the last track folders. However, playlists (Px) are the name of the folder the radio of the last playlist has played, play always accessed before root folders displays ROOT. continues from the first track of or files. When the CD-R or CD-RW disc the first playlist. Empty Directory or Folder contains only playlists and • Play begins from the first track in compressed audio files, but no If a root directory or a folder exists the first folder and continues folders, all files are located under sequentially through all tracks in somewhere in the file structure that the root folder. The folder down contains only folders/subfolders and each folder. When the last track of and the folder up buttons search the last folder has played, play no compressed files directly beneath playlists (Px) first and then goes them, the player advances to the continues from the first track of to the root folder. When the radio the first folder. next folder in the file structure that displays the name of the folder the contains compressed audio files. radio displays ROOT. When play enters a new folder, The empty folder does not display. the display does not automatically show the new folder name unless the folder mode has been chosen as the default display. The new track name displays. Instrument Panel 3-99

File System and Naming Playing an MP3/WMA on, the CD-R or CD-RW starts to The song name that is displayed is (In Either the DVD or CD Slot) play where it stopped, if it was the the song name that is contained in Insert a CD-R or CD-RW disc last selected audio source. the ID3 tag. If the song name is not partway into either the top or bottom As each new track starts to play, present in the ID3 tag, then the radio slot, label side up. The player pulls it the track number and song title displays the file name without the in, and the CD-R or CD-RW should displays. extension (such as .mp3) as the begin playing. track name. Z CD (Eject): Press and release Depending on the format of this button to eject the CD-R or Track names longer than the disc, a softkey menu appears CD-RW that is currently playing 32 characters or four pages and allows navigation of the disc. in the bottom slot. A beep sounds are shortened. Parts of words The menu reads left to right as and Ejecting Disc displays. Once on the last page of text and the RDM (Randomize song play order), the disc is ejected, Remove Disc extension of the filename displays. a Folder icon with left and right displays. The CD-R or CD-RW disc arrows (to move up or down through can be removed. If the CD-R or Preprogrammed Playlists available folders), a PL tag if the disc CD-RW disc is not removed, after has a Playlist available, and a Music Preprogrammed playlists that several seconds, the CD-R or Navigator tag. If a Playlist tag is were created using WinAmp™, CD-RW disc automatically pulls shown, toggling this key brings up a MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ back into the player. software can be accessed, however, Folder softkey only or the menu as they cannot be edited using the previously described. If loading and reading of a CD cannot radio. These playlists are treated If the ignition or radio is turned off be completed, such as unknown as special folders containing with a CD-R or CD-RW disc in the format, etc., and the disc fails to compressed audio song files. player it stays in the player. When eject, press and hold this button for the ignition or radio is turned back more than five seconds to force the disc to eject. 3-100 Instrument Panel

Z DVD (Eject): Press and release ©SEEK ¨: Press the left s REV (Reverse): Press and this button to eject the CD-R or SEEK arrow to go to the start hold this button to reverse playback CD-RW that is currently playing in of the current MP3/WMA file, quickly within an MP3/WMA file. the top slot. A beep sounds and if more than five seconds have Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc played. If less than five seconds Release this button to resume is ejected, Remove Disc displays. have played, the previous MP3/WMA playing the file. The elapsed time The CD-R or CD-RW disc can be file plays. Press the right SEEK of the file displays. removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW arrow to go to the next MP3/WMA disc is not removed, after several file. If either SEEK arrow is held, or \ FWD (Fast Forward): Press seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW disc pressed multiple times, the player and hold this button to advance automatically pulls back into the continues moving backward or playback quickly within an MP3/ player. If loading and reading of a forward through the MP3/WMA WMA file. Sound is heard at a CD cannot be completed, such as files on the CD. reduced volume. Release this unknown format, etc., and the disc button to resume playing the file. fails to eject, press and hold this S c (Previous Folder): Press The elapsed time of the file displays. button for more than five seconds to the pushbutton positioned under RDM (Random): With the random force the disc to eject. the Folder label to go to the first track in the previous folder. setting, MP3/WMA files on the CD-R f (Tune): Turn this knob to select or CD-RW can be listened to in MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or c T (Next Folder): Press random, rather than sequential order. CD-RW that is currently playing. the pushbutton positioned under To play MP3/WMA files from the the Folder label to go to the CD-R or CD-RW in random order, first track in the next folder. press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play. Instrument Panel 3-101 h (Music Navigator): Use the Once the disc has been scanned, the Once all songs from that album are music navigator feature to play player defaults to playing MP3/WMA played, the player moves to the next MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or files in order by artist. The current album in alphabetical order on the CD-RW in order by artist or album. artist playing is shown on the second CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing Press the pushbutton located below line of the display between the MP3/WMA files from that album. the music navigator label. The player arrows. To listen to MP3/WMA files by another artist, press the To exit music navigator mode, press scans the disc to sort the files by the pushbutton below the Back label artist and album ID3 tag information. pushbutton located below either arrow button. The disc goes to the to return to normal MP3/WMA It could take several minutes to scan playback. the disc depending on the number next or previous artist in alphabetical of MP3/WMA files recorded to the order. Continue pressing either BAND: Press this button to listen to CD-R or CD-RW disc. button until the desired artist is the radio when a CD or a DVD is displayed. playing. The CD or DVD remains To cancel music navigator while To change from playback by artist inside the radio for future listening the player is scanning, press the or viewing entertainment. pushbutton located below the music to playback by album, press the navigator label or eject the disc. pushbutton located below the Sort DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press By label. From the sort screen, push this button to cycle through DVD, The radio can begin playing while it is one of the buttons below the album CD, or Auxiliary when listening to scanning the disc in the background. button. Press the pushbutton below the radio. The DVD/CD text label When the scan is finished, the CD-R the back label to return to the main and a message showing track or or CD-RW begins playing again. music navigator screen. Now the chapter number displays when album name displays on the second a disc is in either slot. Press this line between the arrows and songs button again and the system from the current album begin to play. automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio player. 3-102 Instrument Panel

If a portable audio player XM Radio Messages Channel Off Air: This channel is not connected, “No Aux Input is not currently in service. Tune Device” displays. If a disc is in both XL (Explicit Language Channels): in to another channel. the DVD slot and the CD slot the These channels, or any others, can DVD/CD AUX button cycles between be blocked at a customer’s request, Channel Unauth: This channel is the two sources and does not by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696). blocked or cannot be received with your XM Subscription package. indicate “No Aux Input Device”. XM Updating: The encryption code If a front auxiliary device is in the receiver is being updated, and Channel Unavail: This previously connected, the DVD/CD AUX no action is required. This process assigned channel is no longer button cycles through all available should take no longer than assigned. Tune to another station. options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, 30 seconds. If this station was one of the presets, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary choose another station for that (if available). See “Using the No XM Signal: The system is preset button. Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this functioning correctly, but the vehicle section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” is in a location that is blocking No Artist Info: No artist information under, Rear Seat Entertainment the XM™ signal. When the vehicle is available at this time on this (RSE) System on page 3-114 for is moved into an open area, the channel. The system is working more information. signal should return. properly. If a MP3/WMA is inserted into top Loading XM: The audio system No Title Info: No song title DVD slot, the rear seat operator can is acquiring and processing audio information is available at this time turn on the video screen and use the and text data. No action is needed. on this channel. The system is remote control to navigate the CD This message should disappear working properly. (tracks only). shortly. Instrument Panel 3-103

No CAT Info: No category XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, Navigation/Radio System information is available at this this message alternates with the time on this channel. The system XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label. For vehicles with a navigation is working properly. This label is needed to activate the radio system, see the separate service. Navigation System manual. No Information: No text or informational messages are Unknown: If this message is Bluetooth® available at this time on this received when tuned to channel 0, channel. The system is working there could be a receiver fault. Vehicles with a Bluetooth system properly. Consult with your dealer/retailer. can use a Bluetooth capable cell phone with a Hands Free Proﬁle to CAT Not Found: There are no Check XM Receivr: If this make and receive phone calls. The channels available for the selected message does not clear within a system can be used while the key is category. The system is working short period of time, the receiver in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY properly. could have a fault. Consult with position. The range of the Bluetooth your dealer/retailer. XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver system can be up to 30 ft. (9.1 m). in the vehicle could have previously XM Not Available: If this message Not all phones support all functions, been in another vehicle. For security does not clear within a short period of and not all phones are guaranteed to purposes, XM receivers cannot be time, the receiver could have a fault. work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth swapped between vehicles. If this Consult with your dealer/retailer. system. See gm.com/bluetooth for message is received after having the more information on compatible vehicle serviced, check with your phones. dealer/retailer. 3-104 Instrument Panel

Voice Recognition volume knob, during a call, Pairing to change the volume level. The Bluetooth system uses voice A Bluetooth enabled cell phone The adjusted volume level recognition to interpret voice must be paired to the in-vehicle remains in memory for later calls. commands to dial phone numbers Bluetooth system first and then To prevent missed calls, a minimum and name tags. connected to the vehicle before it volume level is used if the volume can be used. See the cell phone is turned down too low. Noise: Keep interior noise levels to manufacturers user guide for a minimum. The system may not Bluetooth Controls Bluetooth functions before pairing recognize voice commands if there the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is too much background noise. Use the buttons located on the is not connected, calls will be steering wheel to operate the ® When to Speak: A short tone made using OnStar Hands-Free in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See sounds after the system responds Calling, if available. Refer to Audio Steering Wheel Controls on indicating when it is waiting for the OnStar owner’s guide for page 3-125 for more information. a voice command. Wait until more information. the tone and then speak. b g (Push To Talk): Press to Pairing Information: How to Speak: Speak clearly in a answer incoming calls, to confirm • Up to five cell phones can calm and natural voice. system information, and to start be paired to the in-vehicle speech recognition. Bluetooth system. Audio System c x (Phone On Hook): Press to • The pairing process is disabled When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth end a call, reject a call, or to cancel when the vehicle is moving. system, sound comes through an operation. the vehicle’s front audio system • The in-vehicle Bluetooth system speakers and overrides the audio automatically links with the first system. Use the audio system available paired cell phone in the order the phone was paired. Instrument Panel 3-105

• Only one paired cell phone can 4. Start the Pairing process on the Listing All Paired and Connected be connected to the in-vehicle cell phone that will be paired to Phones Bluetooth system at a time. the vehicle. Reference the cell 1. Press and hold b g for phone manufacturers user guide • Pairing should only need to be two seconds. The system for information on this process. completed once, unless changes responds with “Ready” to the pairing information have Locate the device named followed by a tone. been made or the phone is “General Motors” in the list on 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system deleted. the cellular phone and follow the responds with “Bluetooth instructions on the cell phone ready” followed by a tone. To link to a different paired phone, to enter the four digit PIN number 3. Say “List”. The system lists all see Linking to a Different Phone that was provided in Step 3. later in this section. the paired Bluetooth devices. 5. The system prompts for a If a phone is connected to Pairing a Phone name for the phone. Use a name the vehicle, the system will that best describes the phone. 1. Press and hold b g for say “Is connected” after the This name will be used to indicate connected phone. two seconds. The system which phone is connected. The responds with “Ready” system then conﬁrms the name Deleting a Paired Phone followed by a tone. provided. 1. Press and hold b g for 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system 6. The system responds with two seconds. The system responds with “Bluetooth “ has been responds with “Ready” ready” followed by a tone. successfully paired” after the followed by a tone. 3. Say “Pair”. The system responds pairing process is complete. 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system with instructions and a four digit responds with “Bluetooth 7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for ready” followed by a tone. PIN number. The PIN number additional phones to be paired. will be used in Step 4. 3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to delete followed by a tone. 3-106 Instrument Panel

4. Say the name of the phone to 3. Say “Change phone”. The Using the Store Command be deleted. If the phone name is system responds with “Please The store command allows a phone unknown, use the “List” command wait while I search for other number to be stored without for a list of all paired phones. The phones”. entering the digits individually. system responds with “Would you • If another phone is found, 1. Press and hold b g for like to delete ? the response will be “ is now connected”. responds with “Ready” 5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. • If another phone is not found, followed by a tone. The system responds with the original phone remains 2. Say “Store”. The system “OK, deleting ”. connected. responds with “Store, number please” followed by a tone. Linking to a Different Phone Storing Name Tags 3. Say the complete phone number 1. Press and hold b g for The system can store up to thirty to be stored at once with no two seconds. The system phone numbers as name tags pauses. responds with “Ready” that are shared between the followed by a tone. • If the system recognizes the Bluetooth and OnStar systems. number it responds with 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system The system uses the following “OK, Storing” and repeats responds with “Bluetooth commands to store and retrieve the phone number. ready” followed by a tone. phone numbers: • If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone number, • Store it responds with “Store” and • Digit Store repeats the number followed by “Please say yes or no”. Directory • If the number is correct, say “Yes”. If the number is not correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the number to be re-entered. Instrument Panel 3-107

4. After the system stores the Using the Digit Store Command 4. After the complete number has phone number, it responds The digit store command allows been entered, say “Store”. with “Please say the name tag” a phone number to be stored The system responds with followed by a tone. by entering the digits individually. “Please say the name tag” followed by a tone. 5. Say a name tag for the phone 1. Press and hold b g for number. The name tag is 5. Say a name tag for the phone two seconds. The system recorded and the system number. The name tag is responds with “Ready” responds with “About to recorded and the system followed by a tone. store . Does responds with “About to that sound OK?”. 2. Say “Digit Store”. The system store . Does responds with “Please say the that sound OK?”. • If the name tag does not sound ﬁrst digit to store” followed correct, say “No” and repeat by a tone. • If the name tag does not sound Step 5. correct, say “No” and repeat 3. Say the ﬁrst digit to be stored. Step 5. • If the name tag sounds The system will repeat back correct, say “Yes” and the the digit it heard followed by a • If the name tag sounds name tag is stored. After the tone. Continue entering digits correct, say “Yes” and the number is stored the system until the number to be stored name tag is stored. After the returns to the main menu. is complete. number is stored the system • If an unwanted number is returns to the main menu. recognized by the system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the last number. • To hear all of the numbers recognized by the system, say “Verify” at any time and the system will repeat them. 3-108 Instrument Panel

Using the Directory Command Using the Delete Command Using the Delete All Name Tags The directory command lists The delete command allows speciﬁc Command all of the name tags stored by name tags to be deleted. The delete all name tags command the system. To use the directory deletes all stored phone book name To use the delete command: command: tags and route name tags for OnStar g g 1. Press and hold b for (if present). 1. Press and hold b for two seconds. The system To use the delete all name tags two seconds. The system responds with “Ready” command: responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. followed by a tone. 2. Say “Delete”. The system 1. Press and hold b g for 2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with “Delete, please two seconds. The system responds with “Directory” say the name tag” followed responds with “Ready” followed and then plays back all of the by a tone. by a tone. stored name tags. When the 3. Say the name tag to be deleted. 2. Say “Delete all name tags”. list is complete, the system The system responds with The system responds with returns to the main menu. “Would you like to delete, ? Please say yes or no”. name tags stored in your • If the name tag is correct, say phone directory and your route The system uses the following “Yes” to delete the name tag. destination directory. Are you commands to delete name tags: The system responds with sure you want to do this? Please • Delete “OK, deleting , say yes or no.” returning to the main menu.” • Delete all name tags • Say “Yes” to delete all • If the name tag is incorrect, name tags. say “No”. The system responds with “No. OK, • Say “No” to cancel the function let’s try again, please say and return to the main menu. the name tag.” Instrument Panel 3-109

Making a Call 3. Say the entire number without 2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system pausing. responds with “Digit dial using Calls can be made using the , please say the following commands: • If the system recognizes the number, it responds with ﬁrst digit to dial” followed by • Dial “OK, Dialing” and dials a tone. • Digit Dial the number. 3. Say the digit to be dialed one • Call • If the system does not at a time. Following each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it • Re-dial recognize the number, it conﬁrms the numbers followed heard followed by a tone. Using the Dial Command by a tone. If the number is 4. Continue entering digits until the correct, say “Yes”. The system number to be dialed is complete. 1. Press and hold b g for responds with “OK, Dialing” After the whole number has been two seconds. The system and dials the number. If the entered, say “Dial”. The system responds with “Ready” number is not correct, say responds with “OK, Dialing” and followed by a tone. “No”. The system will ask for dials the number. 2. Say “Dial”. The system responds the number to be re-entered. • If an unwanted number is with “Dial using . Using the Digit Dial Command recognized by the system, “Number please” followed by say “Clear” at any time to a tone. 1. Press and hold b g for clear the last number. two seconds. The system • To hear all of the numbers responds with “Ready” recognized by the system, say followed by a tone. “Verify” at any time and the system will repeat them. 3-110 Instrument Panel

Using the Call Command Once connected, the person called Receiving a Call will be heard through the audio 1. Press and hold b g for When an incoming call is received, speakers. two seconds. The system the audio system mutes and a responds with “Ready” Using the Re-dial Command ring tone is heard in the vehicle. followed by a tone. 1. Press and hold b g for • Press b g and begin speaking 2. Say “Call”. The system responds two seconds. The system to answer the call. with “Call using . responds with “Ready” Please say the name tag” • Press c x to ignore a call. followed by a tone. followed by a tone. Call Waiting 3. Say the name tag of the person 2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. to call. The system responds with Call waiting must be supported on “Re-dial using ” • If the system clearly the Bluetooth phone and enabled by and dials the last number recognizes the name tag it the wireless service carrier to work. called from the connected responds with “OK, calling, Bluetooth phone. • Press b g to answer an ” and dials incoming call when another call is the number. Once connected, the person called active. The original call is placed • If the system is unsure it will be heard through the audio on hold. recognizes the right name speakers. g tag, it conﬁrms the name tag • Press b again to return to the followed by a tone. If the name original call. tag is correct, say “Yes”. • To ignore the incoming call, The system responds with continue with the original call “OK, calling, ” and with no action. dials the number. If the name x tag is not correct, say “No”. • Press c to disconnect the The system will ask for the current call and switch to the call name tag to be re-entered. on hold. Instrument Panel 3-111

Three-Way Calling Muting a Call To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone Three-Way Calling must be During a call, all sounds from inside supported on the Bluetooth phone the vehicle can be muted so that During a call with the audio in the and enabled by the wireless service the person on the other end of vehicle: carrier to work. the call cannot hear them. 1. Press b g. The system 1. While on a call press b g. To Mute a call responds with “Ready” followed The system responds with by a tone. 1. Press b g. The system “Ready” followed by a tone. responds with “Ready” followed 2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system 2. Say “Three-way call”. The system by a tone. responds with “Transferring call” responds with “Three-way call, and the audio will switch from please say dial or call”. 2. Say “Mute Call”. The system the vehicle to the cell phone. responds with “Call muted”. 3. Use the dial or call command to To Transfer Audio to the dial the number of the third party To Cancel Mute In-Vehicle Bluetooth System to be called. 1. Press b g. The system The cellular phone must be paired 4. Once the call is connected, responds with “Ready” followed and connected with the Bluetooth press b g to link all the callers by a tone. system before a call can be together. 2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. transferred. The connection process The system responds with can take up to two minutes after the Ending a Call “Resuming call”. key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position. Press c x to end a call. Transferring a Call During a call with the audio on the Audio can be transferred between cell phone, press b g for more the in-vehicle Bluetooth system than two seconds. The audio and the cell phone. switches from the cell phone to the vehicle. 3-112 Instrument Panel

Voice Pass-Thru Dual Tone Multi-Frequency 3. Say the number to send. Voice Pass-Thru allows access to (DTMF) Tones • If the system clearly the voice recognition commands on The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can recognizes the number it the cell phone. See the cell phone send numbers and numbers stored responds with “OK, Sending manufacturers user guide to see if as name tags during a call. This is Number” and the dial tones the cell phone supports this feature. used when calling a menu driven are sent and the call This feature can be used to verbally phone system. Account numbers can continues. access contacts stored in the cell be programmed into the phonebook • If the system is not sure it phone. for retrieval during menu driven calls. recognized the number properly, it responds “Dial 1. Press and hold b g for Sending a Number During a Call Number, Please say yes or two seconds. The system g responds with “Ready” 1. Press b . The system no?” followed by a tone. If the followed by a tone. responds with “Ready” followed number is correct, say “Yes”. by a tone. The system responds with 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system “OK, Sending Number” and 2. Say “Dial”. The system responds responds with “Bluetooth the dial tones are sent and the with “Say a number to send ready” followed by a tone. call continues. tones” followed by a tone. 3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with “OK, accessing ”. • The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will go through its cycle according to the phone’s operating instructions. Instrument Panel 3-113

Sending a Stored Name Tag Clearing the System This device complies with Part 15 of During a Call the FCC Rules. Operation is subject Unless information is deleted out to the following two conditions: 1. Press b g. The system of the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, responds with “Ready” followed it will be retained indeﬁnitely. 1. This device may not cause by a tone. This includes all saved name tags harmful interference. in the phonebook and phone pairing 2. Say “Send name tag.” 2. This device must accept any information. For information on how The system responds with interference received, including to delete this information, see the “Say a name tag to send tones” interference that may cause above sections on Deleting a Paired followed by a tone. undesired operation. Phone and Deleting Name Tags. 3. Say the name tag to send. This device complies with RSS-210 Other Information of Industry Canada. Operation is • If the system clearly ® subject to the following two recognizes the name tag it The Bluetooth word mark and ® conditions: responds with “OK, Sending logos are owned by the Bluetooth ” and the dial SIG, Inc. and any use of such 1. This device may not cause tones are sent and the marks by General Motors is under interference. call continues. license. Other trademarks and 2. This device must accept any trade names are those of their • If the system is not sure it interference received, including respective owners. recognized the name tag interference that may cause properly, it responds “Dial undesired operation of the device. , Please say yes Changes or modiﬁcations to this or no?” followed by a tone. system by other than an authorized If the name tag is correct, say service facility could void “Yes”. The system responds authorization to use this equipment. with “OK, Sending ” and the dial tones are sent and the call continues. 3-114 Instrument Panel

Rear Seat Entertainment In severe or extreme weather Headphones conditions the RSE system might (RSE) System or might not work until the The vehicle may have a DVD Rear temperature is within the operating Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. range. The operating range for the The RSE system works with the RSE system is above −4°F (−20°C) vehicle’s audio system. The DVD or below 140°F (60°C). If the player is part of the front radio. temperature of the vehicle is outside The RSE system includes a radio of this range, heat or cool the vehicle with a DVD player, a video display until the temperature is within the screen, audio/video jacks, two operating range of the RSE system. wireless headphones, and a remote control. See Radio(s) on page 3-75 Parental Control for more information on the vehicle’s The RSE system may have audio/DVD system. a Parental Control feature, The RSE includes two 2-channel depending on the radio. To enable Before Driving wireless headphones that are Parental Control, press and hold dedicated to this system. Channel 1 The RSE is designed for rear the radio power button for more is dedicated to the video screen, seat passengers only. The driver than two seconds to stop all system while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA cannot safely view the video screen features such as: radio, video selections. These headphones are while driving and should not try screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD. While used to listen to media such as CDs, to do so. Parental Control is on, Q displays. DVDs, MP3/WMAs, DVD-As, radio, any auxiliary source connected to When the radio is turned back on, A/V jacks, or the auxiliary input jack, Parental Control is unlocked. if the vehicle has this feature. Instrument Panel 3-115

The wireless headphones have an Infrared transmitters are located Notice: Do not store the On/Off button, channel 1/2 switch, at the rear of the RSE overhead headphones in heat or direct and a volume control. Switch the console. The headphones shut off sunlight. This could damage headphones to Off when not in use. automatically to save the battery the headphones and repairs will power if the RSE system and RSA not be covered by the warranty. Push the power button to turn are shut off or if the headphones are Storage in extreme cold can on the headphones. An indicator out of range of the transmitters for weaken the batteries. Keep the light located on the headphones more than three minutes. Moving too headphones stored in a cool, comes on. If the light does not far forward or stepping out of the dry place. come on, the batteries might need vehicle, can cause the headphones to be replaced. Intermittent sound If the foam ear pads attached to to lose the audio signal. or static on the headphones can also the headphones become worn or be an indication of weak batteries. For optimal audio performance, damaged, the pads can be replaced See “Battery Replacement” later in the headphones must be worn separately from the headphone set. this section for more information. correctly. Headphones should be See your dealer/retailer for more worn with the headband over the top information. The headphones automatically turn of the head for best audio reception. off after four hours of continuous use. Headphones should be stored in The symbol L (Left) appears on the the front ﬂoor console and not in the To adjust the volume on the upper left side, above the ear pad front seat back pocket. Headphone headphones, use the volume and should be positioned on the left damage can occur when the second control located on the right side. ear. The symbol R (Right) appears row seats are folded forward. on the upper right side, above the ear pad and should be positioned on the right ear. 3-116 Instrument Panel

Battery Replacement Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks The A/V jacks are color coded to To change the batteries on the match typical home entertainment headphones: system equipment. The yellow jack (A) is for the video input. 1. Turn the screw to loosen the The white jack (B) is for the left battery door located on the audio input. The red jack (C) is left side of the headphones. for the right audio input. Slide the battery door open. Power for auxiliary devices is not 2. Replace the two batteries in the supplied by the radio system. compartment. Make sure that they are installed correctly, using To use the auxiliary inputs of the the diagram on the inside of RSE system, connect an external the battery compartment. auxiliary device to the color-coded A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary 3. Replace the battery door and device and the video screen power The A/V jacks, located on the rear tighten the door screw. on. If the video screen is in the DVD of the ﬂoor console, allow audio player mode, pressing the AUX If the headphones are to be stored or video signals to be connected (auxiliary) button on the remote for a long period of time, remove from an auxiliary device such as a control, switches the video screen the batteries and keep them camcorder or a video game unit to from the DVD player mode to the in a cool, dry place. the RSE system. Adapter connectors auxiliary device. The radio can or cables (not supplied) might be listen to the audio of the connected required to connect the auxiliary auxiliary device by sourcing to device to the A/V jacks. Refer to auxiliary. See Radio(s) on page 3-75 the manufacturer’s instructions for for more information. proper usage. Instrument Panel 3-117

How to Change the RSE Video The RSE system always transmits Video Screen Screen Settings the audio signal to the wireless The video screen is located in the The screen display mode (normal, headphones, if there is audio overhead console. When the video full, and zoom), screen brightness, available. See “Headphones” earlier screen is not in use, push it up into its and setup menu language can in this section for more information. locked position. be changed from the on screen The DVD player is capable of To use the video screen: setup menu by using the remote outputting audio to the wired 1. Push the release button located control. To change a setting: headphone jacks on the RSA on the overhead console. system, if the vehicle has this 1. Press z. 2. Move the screen to the desired feature. The DVD player can be position. 2. Use n, q, p, o and r to selected as an audio source on If a DVD is playing and the screen navigate and use the setup menu. the RSA system. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 3-123 for is raised to its locked position, the 3. Press z again to remove the more information. screen remains on; this is normal, setup menu from the screen. and the DVD continues to play When a device is connected to the through the previous audio source. A/V jacks, or the radio’s auxiliary Audio Output Press P on the remote control or input jack, if the vehicle has this Audio from the DVD player or feature, the rear seat passengers eject the disc to turn off the screen. auxiliary inputs can be heard are able to hear audio from the The infrared receivers for the through the following sources: auxiliary device through the wireless wireless headphones and the • Wireless Headphones or wired headphones. The front seat remote control are located at the passengers are able to listen to rear of the overhead console. • Vehicle Speakers playback from this device through Notice: Avoid directly touching • Vehicle wired headphone jacks the vehicle speakers by selecting the video screen, as damage on the rear seat audio system, AUX as the source on the radio. may occur. See “Cleaning if the vehicle has this feature. the Video Screen” later in this section for more information. 3-118 Instrument Panel

Remote Control If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD Remote Control Buttons O To use the remote control, aim it slot, the remote control button can at the transmitter window at the rear be used to turn on the video screen of the overhead console and press display and start the disc. The radio the desired button. Direct sunlight can also turn on the video screen or very bright light could affect the display. See Radio(s) on page 3-75 ability of the RSE transmitter to for more information. receive signals from the remote Notice: Storing the remote control. If the remote control does control in a hot area or in direct not seem to be working, the batteries sunlight can damage it, and might need to be replaced. See the repairs will not be covered by “Battery Replacement” later in this the warranty. Storage in extreme section. Objects blocking the line of cold can weaken the batteries. sight could also affect the function of Keep the remote control stored the remote control. in a cool, dry place. Instrument Panel 3-119

O (Power): Press to turn the video r (Enter): Press to select When the DVD is playing, depending screen on and off. the choice that is highlighted in on the radio, play may be slowed any menu. down by pressing s then [. P (Illumination): Press to turn The DVD continues playing in a the remote control backlight on. z (Display Menu): Press to adjust slow play mode. Depending on the The backlight automatically times out the brightness, screen display mode radio, perform reverse slow play by after seven to ten seconds if no other (normal, full, or zoom), and display pressing s then r. To cancel button is pressed while the backlight the language menu. slow play mode, press s again. is on. q (Return): Press to exit the t v (Title): Press to return the DVD current active menu and return to (Previous Track/Chapter): Press to the main menu of the DVD. This the previous menu. This button to return to the start of the current function could vary for each disc. operates only when the display track or chapter. Press again to menu or a DVD menu is active. go to the previous track or chapter. y (Main Menu): Press to access This button might not work when the DVD menu. The DVD menu is c (Stop): Press to stop playing, the DVD is playing the copyright different on every DVD. Use the rewinding, or fast forwarding a information or the previews. navigation arrows to move the cursor DVD. Press twice to return to u around the DVD menu. After making the beginning of the DVD. (Next Track/Chapter): Press a selection press the enter button. to go to the beginning of the next This button only operates when s (Play/Pause): Press to start chapter or track. This button might using a DVD. playing a DVD. Press while a DVD not work when the DVD is playing is playing to pause it. Press again the copyright information or the n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation to continue playing the DVD. previews. Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu. 3-120 Instrument Panel r (Fast Reverse): Press to quickly { (Subtitles): Press to turn If the remote control becomes lost reverse the DVD or CD. To stop fast ON/OFF subtitles and to move or damaged, a new universal remote control can be purchased. If this reversing a DVD video, press s. through subtitle options when a DVD is playing. The format and content happens, make sure the universal To stop fast reversing a DVD audio ® of this function vary for each disc. remote control uses a Toshiba or CD, release r. This button might code set. not work when the DVD is playing AUX (Auxiliary): Press to the copyright information or the switch the system between the DVD Battery Replacement previews. player and an auxiliary source. To change the remote control d batteries: [ (Fast Forward): Press to fast (Camera): Press to change forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast camera angles on DVDs that have 1. Slide the rear cover back, on the s this feature when a DVD is playing. remote control. forwarding a DVD video, press . The format and content of this 2. Replace the two batteries in the To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio function vary for each disc. or CD, release [. This button might compartment. Make sure that 1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): they are installed correctly, using not work when the DVD is playing The numeric keypad provides the diagram on the inside of the copyright information or the the capability of direct chapter the battery compartment. previews. or track number selection. 3. Replace the battery cover. e (Audio): Press to change audio \ (Clear): Press within If the remote control is to be stored tracks on DVDs that have this three seconds after entering a for a long period of time, remove feature when the DVD is playing. numeric selection, to clear all the batteries and keep them in The format and content of this numerical inputs. a cool, dry place. function vary for each disc. } 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press to select chapter or track numbers greater than nine. Press this button before entering the number. Instrument Panel 3-121

Problem Recommended Action No power. The ignition might not be turned ON/RUN or in ACC/ACCESSORY. The picture does not ﬁll the screen. Check the display mode settings There are black borders on the top in the setup menu by pressing the and bottom or on both sides or it display menu button on the remote looks stretched out. control. In auxiliary mode, the picture moves Check the auxiliary input or scrolls. connections at both devices. The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no obstruction between the remote control and the transmitter window. Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead or installed incorrectly. After stopping the player, I push If the stop button was pressed Play but sometimes the DVD starts one time, the DVD player resumes where I left off and sometimes at playing where the DVD was stopped. the beginning. If the stop button was pressed two times the DVD player begins to play from the beginning of the DVD. The auxiliary source is running but Check that the RSE video screen there is no picture or sound. is in the auxiliary source mode. Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices. 3-122 Instrument Panel

Problem Recommended Action DVD Distortion Sometimes the wireless headphone Check for obstructions, Video distortion can occur when audio cuts out or buzzes. low batteries, reception range, operating cellular phones, scanners, and interference from cellular CB radios, Global Position Systems telephone towers or by using a (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, cellular telephone in the vehicle. or walkie talkies. Check that the headphones are on correctly using the L (left) and It might be necessary to turn off the R (right) on the headphones. DVD player when operating one I lost the remote and/or the See your dealer/retailer for of these devices in or near the headphones. assistance. vehicle. The DVD is playing, but there is no Check that the RSE video screen is *Excludes the OnStar® System. picture or sound. sourced to the DVD player. Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console DVD Display Error Messages Disc Region Error: This message displays if the disc is not from a When cleaning the RSE overhead The DVD display error message correct region. console surface, use only a clean depends on which radio the vehicle cloth dampened with clean water. has. The video screen might No Disc Inserted: This message display one of the following: displays if no disc is present Disc Load/Eject Error: This when the Z EJECT button message displays when there are is pressed on the radio. disc load or eject problems. Disc Format Error: This message displays if the disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if the disc is damaged. Instrument Panel 3-123

Cleaning the Video Screen rear seat passengers can control The audio system mutes the rear a CD and listen to it through the speakers when the RSA audio Use only a clean cloth dampened headphones, while the driver listens is active through the headphones. with clean water. Use care when to the radio through the front directly touching or cleaning the To listen to an iPod or portable speakers. The rear seat passengers screen, as damage could result. audio device through the RSA, have control of the volume for each attach the iPod or portable audio set of headphones. Rear Seat Audio (RSA) device to the front auxiliary input The RSA functions operate even (if available), located on the For vehicles with Rear Seat when the main radio is off. The front front audio system. Turn the iPod Audio (RSA), rear seat passengers audio system displays X when on, then choose the front auxiliary can listen to and control any of the input with the RSA SRCE button. music sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, the RSA is on, and disappears or other auxiliary sources. The rear from the display when it is off. seat passengers can only control Audio can be heard through wired the music sources the front seat headphones (not included) plugged passengers are not listening to into the jacks on the RSA. If the (except on some radios where dual vehicle has this feature, audio can control is allowed). For example, also be heard on Channel 2 of the wireless headphones. 3-124 Instrument Panel

While listening to a disc, press ¨to go to the next track or chapter on the disc. Press ©to go back to the start of the current track or chapter (if more than ten seconds have played). This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc. When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press ©or ¨ to perform a cursor up or down on the menu. Hold ©or ¨ to perform a cursor P (Power): Press to turn the RSA ©¨(Seek): Press to go to the left or right on the menu. on or off. previous or to the next station and stay there. This function is inactive, PROG (Program): Press to go Volume: Turn to increase or to with some radios, if the front seat to the next preset radio station or decrease the volume of the wired passengers are listening to the radio. channel set on the main radio. headphones. The left knob controls This function is inactive, with some the left headphones and the right Press and hold ©or ¨ until radios, if the front seat passengers knob controls the right headphones. the display ﬂashes to tune to an are listening to the radio. SRCE (Source): Press to select individual station. The display stops ﬂashing after the buttons When a CD or DVD audio disc is between the radio (AM/FM/XM™), playing, press PROG to go to the CD, and if the vehicle has these have not been pushed for more than two seconds. This function is beginning of the CD or DVD audio. features, DVD, front auxiliary, and This function is inactive, with some rear auxiliary. inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the radios, if the front seat passengers radio. are listening to the disc. Instrument Panel 3-125

When a disc is playing in the CD or Audio Steering Wheel w (Next): Press to go to the next DVD changer, press PROG to select Controls radio station stored as a favorite, or the next disc, if multiple discs are the next track if a CD/DVD is loaded. This function is inactive, playing. with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc. c x (Previous/End): Press to When a DVD video menu is being go to the previous radio station displayed, press PROG to perform stored as a favorite, the next track if the ENTER menu function. a CD/DVD is playing, to reject an incoming call, or end a current call.

Theft-Deterrent Feature b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press THEFTLOCK® is designed to to silence the vehicle speakers only. discourage theft of the vehicle’s Press again to turn the sound on. radio by learning a portion of the For vehicles with OnStar® or Vehicle Identiﬁcation Number (VIN). Vehicles with audio steering wheel Bluetooth systems, press and The radio does not operate if it hold for longer than two seconds is stolen or moved to a different controls could differ depending on the vehicle’s options. Some audio to interact with those systems. vehicle. ¨ controls can be adjusted at the See OnStar System on page 2-42 ¨ steering wheel. and Bluetooth on page 3-103 in this manual for more information. 3-126 Instrument Panel

SRCE (Source): Press to switch ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the AM between the radio (AM, FM, XM), next radio station while in AM, FM, The range for most AM stations is CD, and for vehicles with, DVD, or XM™. Press ¨to go to the next greater than for FM, especially at front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary. track or chapter while sourced to night. The longer range can cause For vehicles with the navigation the CD or DVD slot. Press the ¨if station frequencies to interfere system, press and hold this button multiple discs are loaded to go to with each other. For better radio for longer than one second to initiate the next disc while sourced to a CD reception, most AM radio stations voice recognition. See “Voice player. boost the power levels during the Recognition” in the Navigation day, and then reduce these levels System manual for more information. during the night. Static can also Radio Reception occur when things like storms and + e − e (Volume): Press to Frequency interference and static power lines interfere with radio increase or to decrease the radio can occur during normal radio reception. When this happens, try volume. reception if items such as cell reducing the treble on the radio. phone chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and FM Stereo external electronic devices are FM signals only reach about plugged into the accessory power 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). outlet. If there is interference or Although the radio has a built-in static, unplug the item from the electronic circuit that automatically accessory power outlet. works to reduce interference, some static can occur, especially around tall buildings or hills, causing the sound to fade in and out. Instrument Panel 3-127

XM™ Satellite Radio Service Multi-Band Antenna XM Satellite Radio Service The multi-band antenna is located gives digital radio reception from on the roof of the vehicle. This type coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous of antenna is used with the AM/FM United States, and in Canada. Just radio, as well as OnStar® and the as with FM, tall buildings or hills can XM™ Satellite Radio Service interfere with satellite radio signals, System, if the vehicle has these causing the sound to fade in and out. features. Keep this antenna clear In addition, traveling or standing of snow and ice build up for clear under heavy foliage, bridges, radio reception. If the vehicle has garages, or tunnels may cause loss a sunroof, the performance of the of the XM signal for a period of time. radio system may be affected if the sunroof is open. Loading items onto Cellular Phone Usage the roof of the vehicle can interfere Cellular phone usage may cause with the performance of the radio interference with the vehicle’s radio. system and, if the vehicle has this This interference may occur when feature, OnStar®. Make sure the making or receiving phone calls, multi-band antenna is not obstructed. charging the phone’s battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference causes an increased level of static while listening to the radio. If static is received while listening to the radio, unplug the cellular phone and turn it off. 3-128 Instrument Panel

✍ NOTES Driving Your Vehicle 4-1

Driving in Rain and on Driving Your Wet Roads ...... 4-12 Your Driving, the Before Leaving on a Road, and the Vehicle Vehicle Long Trip ...... 4-13 Highway Hypnosis ...... 4-13 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 4-14 Driving for Better Fuel Winter Driving ...... 4-15 Economy If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Your Driving, the Road, and Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ...... 4-17 Driving habits can affect fuel the Vehicle Rocking Your Vehicle to mileage. Here are some driving tips Driving for Better Fuel GetItOut...... 4-18 to get the best fuel economy Economy ...... 4-1 Loading the Vehicle ...... 4-18 possible. Defensive Driving ...... 4-2 Drunk Driving ...... 4-2 Towing • Avoid fast starts and accelerate Control of a Vehicle ...... 4-3 Towing Your Vehicle ...... 4-22 smoothly. Braking ...... 4-3 Recreational Vehicle • Brake gradually and avoid abrupt ...... 4-22 Antilock Brake Towing stops. System (ABS) ...... 4-4 Towing a Trailer ...... 4-26 Braking in Emergencies ...... 4-5 • Avoid idling the engine for long StabiliTrak® System ...... 4-5 periods of time. All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System ...... 4-8 • When road and weather Steering ...... 4-8 conditions are appropriate, use Off-Road Recovery ...... 4-9 cruise control, if equipped...... 4-10 Passing • Always follow posted speed limits Loss of Control ...... 4-10 Driving at Night ...... 4-11 or drive more slowly when conditions require. • Keep vehicle tires properly inﬂated. 4-2 Driving Your Vehicle

• Combine several trips into a Drunk Driving single trip. { CAUTION • Replace the vehicle’s tires with Assume that other road users { CAUTION the same TPC Spec number (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other molded into the tire’s sidewall drivers) are going to be careless Drinking and then driving is very near the size. and make mistakes. Anticipate dangerous. Your reﬂexes, • Follow recommended scheduled what they might do and be ready. perceptions, attentiveness, and maintenance. In addition: judgment can be affected by even • Allow enough following a small amount of alcohol. You Defensive Driving distance between you and can have a serious — or even the driver in front of you. fatal — collision if you drive after Defensive driving means “always drinking. Do not drink and drive or • Focus on the task of driving. expect the unexpected.” The ride with a driver who has been ﬁrst step in driving defensively is to Driver distraction can cause drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if wear your safety belt — See collisions resulting in injury or you are with a group, designate a Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone possible death. These simple driver who will not drink. on page 1-14. defensive driving techniques could save your life. Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a global tragedy. Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and attentiveness. Driving Your Vehicle 4-3

Police records show that passenger — is in a crash, that Braking almost 40 percent of all motor person’s chance of being killed or vehicle-related deaths involve permanently disabled is higher than See Brake System Warning Light on alcohol. In most cases, these deaths if the person had not been drinking. page 3-36. are the result of someone who was Braking action involves perception drinking and driving. In recent years, Control of a Vehicle time and reaction time. Deciding more than 17,000 annual motor to push the brake pedal is The following three systems help vehicle-related deaths have been perception time. Actually doing to control the vehicle while associated with the use of alcohol, it is reaction time. with about 250,000 people injured. driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At times, as when Average reaction time is about For persons under 21, it is against driving on snow or ice, it is easy to three-fourths of a second. But that the law in every U.S. state to ask more of those control systems is only an average. It might be drink alcohol. There are good than the tires and road can provide. less with one driver and as long as medical, psychological, and Meaning, you can lose control of the two or three seconds or more developmental reasons for vehicle. See StabiliTrak¨ System on with another. Age, physical these laws. page 4-5. condition, alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So The obvious way to eliminate the Adding non-dealer/non-retailer do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. leading highway safety problem accessories can affect vehicle But even in three-fourths of a is for people never to drink alcohol performance. See Accessories and second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph and then drive. Modiﬁcations on page 5-3. (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). Medical research shows that That could be a lot of distance in an alcohol in a person’s system can emergency, so keeping enough make crash injuries worse, especially space between the vehicle injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or and others is important. heart. This means that when anyone who has been drinking — driver or 4-4 Driving Your Vehicle

And, of course, actual stopping there will still be some power brake distances vary greatly with the assist but it will be used when surface of the road, whether it is the brake is applied. Once the power pavement or gravel; the condition of assist is used up, it can take the road, whether it is wet, dry, or longer to stop and the brake pedal icy; tire tread; the condition of will be harder to push. the brakes; the weight of the vehicle; Adding non-dealer/non-retailer and the amount of brake force If there is a problem with ABS, this accessories can affect vehicle applied. warning light stays on. See performance. See Accessories and Antilock Brake System (ABS) Avoid needless heavy braking. Some Modiﬁcations on page 5-3. Warning Light on page 3-37. people drive in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy Antilock Brake Let us say the road is wet and you braking — rather than keeping pace System (ABS) are driving safely. Suddenly, an with traffic. This is a mistake. The animal jumps out in front of you. You brakes might not have time to cool This vehicle has the Antilock Brake slam on the brakes and continue between hard stops. The brakes will System (ABS), an advanced braking. Here is what happens wear out much faster with a lot of electronic braking system that helps with ABS: heavy braking. Keeping pace with prevent a braking skid. A computer senses that the wheels the traffic and allowing realistic When the engine is started and the are slowing down. If one of the following distances eliminates a lot of vehicle begins to drive away, ABS wheels is about to stop rolling, the unnecessary braking. That means checks itself. A momentary motor or computer will separately work better braking and longer brake life. clicking noise might be heard while the brakes at each wheel. If the engine ever stops while the this test is going on, and it might ABS can change the brake pressure vehicle is being driven, brake even be noticed that the brake pedal to each wheel, as required, faster normally but do not pump the moves a little. This is normal. than any driver could. This can help brakes. If the brakes are pumped, the driver steer around the obstacle the pedal could get harder to while braking hard. push down. If the engine stops, Driving Your Vehicle 4-5

As the brakes are applied, the Braking in Emergencies situation dictates The Brake Assist computer keeps receiving updates feature will automatically disengage on wheel speed and controls braking ABS allows the driver to steer and when the brake pedal is released pressure accordingly. brake at the same time. In many or brake pedal pressure is quickly emergencies, steering can help more decreased. Remember: ABS does not change than even the very best braking. the time needed to get a foot ® up to the brake pedal or always Brake Assist StabiliTrak System decrease stopping distance. If you This vehicle has a Brake Assist The vehicle has the StabiliTrak get too close to the vehicle in feature designed to assist the driver system which combines antilock front of you, there will not be enough in stopping or decreasing vehicle brake, traction and stability control time to apply the brakes if that speed in emergency driving systems and helps the driver vehicle suddenly slows or stops. conditions. This feature uses the maintain directional control of the Always leave enough room up stability system hydraulic brake vehicle in most driving conditions. ahead to stop, even with ABS. control module to supplement the When you ﬁrst start the vehicle and Using ABS power brake system under begin to drive away, the system conditions where the driver has performs several diagnostic checks Do not pump the brakes. Just hold quickly and forcefully applied to ensure there are no problems. the brake pedal down ﬁrmly and the brake pedal in an attempt to The system may be heard or let antilock work. The antilock pump quickly stop or slow down the felt while it is working. This is normal or motor operating might be vehicle. The stability system and does not mean there is a heard and the brake pedal might be hydraulic brake control module problem with the vehicle. The felt to pulsate, but this is normal. increases brake pressure at each system should initialize before the corner of the vehicle until the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h). ABS activates. Minor brake pedal In some cases, it may take pulsations or pedal movement approximately two miles (3.2 km) of during this time is normal and the driving before the system initializes. driver should continue to apply the brake pedal as the driving 4-6 Driving Your Vehicle

If the system fails to turn on or The system may be heard or felt control when traction control is off, activate, the StabiliTrak light along while it is working; this is normal. but will not be able to use the engine with one of the following messages speed management system. See will be displayed on the Driver “Traction Control Operation” next for Information Center (DIC): more information. TRACTION CONTROL OFF, When the traction control system SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL, has been turned off, system noises SERVICE STABILITRAK. If these may be heard and felt as a result conditions are observed, turn the of the brake-traction control working. vehicle off, wait 15 seconds, and The traction control disable button is then turn it back on again to reset the located on the instrument panel It is recommended to leave the system. If any of these messages still below the climate controls. system on for normal driving appear on the Driver Information conditions, but it may be necessary Center (DIC), the vehicle should be The traction control part of to turn the system off if the taken in for service. For more StabiliTrak can be turned off by vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or information on the DIC messages, pressing and releasing the traction snow, and you want to “rock” the see Driver Information Center (DIC) control disable button. vehicle to attempt to free it. It may on page 3-44. Traction control can be turned on by also be necessary to turn off pressing and releasing the traction the system when driving in extreme control disable button if not off-road conditions where high automatically shut off for any other wheel spin is required. See If Your reason. Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-17. When the traction control system is turned off, the StabiliTrak light and the appropriate traction control The StabiliTrak light will ﬂash on the off message will be displayed on instrument panel cluster when the the DIC to warn the driver. The system is both on and activated. vehicle will still have brake-traction Driving Your Vehicle 4-7

Traction Control Operation Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle If cruise control is being used when is allowed to spin excessively the system activates, the StabiliTrak The traction control system is part of while the StabiliTrak, ABS and light will ﬂash and cruise control the StabiliTrak system. Traction brake warning lights and any will automatically disengage. Cruise control limits wheel spin by reducing relevant DIC messages are control may be reengaged when engine power to the wheels (engine displayed, the transfer case could road conditions allow. See Cruise speed management) and by applying be damaged. The repairs would Control on page 3-9. brakes to each individual wheel not be covered by the vehicle (brake-traction control) as necessary. StabiliTrak may also turn off warranty. Reduce engine power automatically if it determines that a The traction control system is and do not spin the wheel(s) problem exists with the system. If the enabled automatically when the excessively while these lights and problem does not clear itself after vehicle is started. It will activate and messages are displayed. restarting the vehicle, see your the StabiliTrak light will ﬂash if it The traction control system may dealer/retailer for service. senses that any of the wheels are activate on dry or rough roads spinning or beginning to lose traction or under conditions such as heavy while driving. If traction control is acceleration while turning or turned off, only the brake-traction abrupt upshifts/downshifts of the control portion of traction control transmission. When this happens, a will work. The engine speed reduction in acceleration may be management will be disabled. In this noticed, or a noise or vibration may mode, engine power is not reduced be heard. This is normal. automatically and the driven wheels can spin more freely. This can cause the brake-traction control to activate constantly. 4-8 Driving Your Vehicle

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Steering Steering Tips System Power Steering It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed. If the vehicle has this feature, engine If power steering assist is lost power is sent to all four wheels when because the engine stops or the Traction in a curve depends on the extra traction is needed. This is like system is not functioning, the vehicle condition of the tires and the road four-wheel drive, but there is no can be steered but it will take surface, the angle at which the curve separate lever or switch to engage or more effort. is banked, and vehicle speed. While disengage the axle. It is fully in a curve, speed is the one factor automatic, and adjusts itself as Variable Effort Steering that can be controlled. needed for road conditions. If the vehicle has this steering If there is a need to reduce speed, When using a compact spare tire on system, the system continuously do it before entering the curve, the AWD equipped vehicle, the AWD adjusts the effort felt when steering while the front wheels are straight. system automatically detects the at all vehicle speeds. It provides Try to adjust the speed so you presence of the compact spare and ease when parking, yet a ﬁrm, solid can drive through the curve. the AWD is disabled. To restore the feel at highway speeds. Maintain a reasonable, steady AWD operation and prevent speed. Wait to accelerate until out excessive wear on the AWD system, of the curve, and then accelerate replace the compact spare with a gently into the straightaway. full-size tire as soon as possible. See Compact Spare Tire on page 5-83 for more information. Driving Your Vehicle 4-9

Steering in Emergencies Off-Road Recovery There are times when steering can The vehicle’s right wheels can drop be more effective than braking. For off the edge of a road onto the example, you come over a hill and shoulder while driving. ﬁnd a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. These problems can be avoided by braking — if you can stop in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no room. That is the time for evasive An emergency like this requires action — steering around the close attention and a quick decision. problem. If holding the steering wheel at The vehicle can perform very well in the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock emergencies like these. First, apply positions, it can be turned a full If the level of the shoulder is only the brakes. See Braking on 180 degrees very quickly without slightly below the pavement, page 4-3. It is better to remove as removing either hand. But you have recovery should be fairly easy. Ease much speed as possible from a to act fast, steer quickly, and just off the accelerator and then, if there collision. Then steer around the as quickly straighten the wheel once is nothing in the way, steer so that problem, to the left or right you have avoided the object. the vehicle straddles the edge of the depending on the space available. The fact that such emergency pavement. situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly. 4-10 Driving Your Vehicle

Turn the steering wheel • Wait your turn to pass a slow The three types of skids correspond 3 to 5 inches, 8 to 13 cm, (about vehicle. to the vehicle’s three control one-eighth turn) until the right front systems. In the braking skid, the • When you are being passed, ease tire contacts the pavement edge. wheels are not rolling. In the steering to the right. Then turn the steering wheel to go or cornering skid, too much speed or straight down the roadway. steering in a curve causes tires to Loss of Control slip and lose cornering force. And in Passing Let us review what driving experts the acceleration skid, too much say about what happens when throttle causes the driving wheels Passing another vehicle on a the three control systems — brakes, to spin. two-lane road can be dangerous. To steering, and acceleration — do reduce the risk of danger while If the vehicle starts to slide, ease not have enough friction where the passing: your foot off the accelerator pedal tires meet the road to do what and quickly steer the way you want • Look down the road, to the sides, the driver has asked. the vehicle to go. If you start steering and to crossroads for situations In any emergency, do not give up. quickly enough, the vehicle may that might affect a successful straighten out. Always be ready for a pass. If in doubt, wait. Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of second skid if it occurs. • Watch for traffic signs, less danger. Of course, traction is reduced when pavement markings, and lines water, snow, ice, gravel, or other that could indicate a turn or an Skidding material is on the road. For safety, intersection. Never cross a solid In a skid, a driver can lose control of slow down and adjust your driving to or double-solid line on your side of the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid these conditions. It is important to the lane. most skids by taking reasonable care slow down on slippery surfaces • Do not get too close to the vehicle suited to existing conditions, and by because stopping distance is longer you want to pass. Doing so can not overdriving those conditions. But and vehicle control more limited. reduce your visibility. skids are always possible. Driving Your Vehicle 4-11

While driving on a surface with Driving at Night • Avoid staring directly into reduced traction, try your best to approaching headlamps. avoid sudden steering, acceleration, Night driving is more dangerous than • Keep the windshield and all glass or braking, including reducing vehicle day driving because some drivers on your vehicle clean — inside speed by shifting to a lower gear. are likely to be impaired — by alcohol and out. Any sudden changes could cause or drugs, with night vision problems, the tires to slide. You might not or by fatigue. • Keep your eyes moving, realize the surface is slippery until Night driving tips include: especially during turns or curves. the vehicle is skidding. Learn to • Drive defensively. No one can see as well at night as recognize warning clues — such as in the daytime. But, as we get enough water, ice, or packed snow • Do not drink and drive. older, these differences increase. on the road to make a mirrored • Reduce headlamp glare by A 50-year-old driver might need surface — and slow down when you adjusting the inside rearview at least twice as much light to see have any doubt. mirror. the same thing at night as a Remember: Any Antilock Brake • Slow down and keep more space 20-year-old. System (ABS) helps avoid only the between you and other vehicles braking skid. because headlamps can only light up so much road ahead. • Watch for animals. • When tired, pull off the road. • Do not wear sunglasses. 4-12 Driving Your Vehicle

Driving in Rain and on Hydroplaning CAUTION (Continued) Wet Roads Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under your vehicle’s Rain and wet roads can reduce After driving through a large tires so they actually ride on the vehicle traction and affect your puddle of water or a car/vehicle water. This can happen if the road is ability to stop and accelerate. wash, lightly apply the brake wet enough and you are going fast Always drive slower in these types pedal until the brakes work enough. When your vehicle is of driving conditions and avoid normally. hydroplaning, it has little or no driving through large puddles and contact with the road. deep-standing or flowing water. Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. Driving through There is no hard and fast rule about { flowing water could cause your hydroplaning. The best advice is to CAUTION vehicle to be carried away. If this slow down when the road is wet. Wet brakes can cause crashes. happens, you and other vehicle They might not work as well in a occupants could drown. Do not quick stop and could cause ignore police warnings and be pulling to one side. You could very cautious about trying to drive lose control of the vehicle. through flowing water. (Continued) Driving Your Vehicle 4-13

Other Rainy Weather Tips Before Leaving on a Highway Hypnosis Besides slowing down, other wet Long Trip Always be alert and pay attention to weather driving tips include: To prepare your vehicle for a long your surroundings while driving. • Allow extra following distance. trip, consider having it serviced If you become tired or sleepy, find a safe place to park your vehicle • Pass with caution. by your dealer/retailer before departing. and rest. • Keep windshield wiping Other driving tips include: equipment in good shape. Things to check on your own include: • Keep the vehicle well ventilated. • Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled. • Windshield Washer Fluid: • Keep interior temperature cool. Reservoir full? Windows • Keep your eyes moving — scan • Have good tires with proper tread clean — inside and outside? depth. See Tires on page 5-39. the road ahead and to the sides. • Wiper Blades: In good shape? • Turn off cruise control. • Check the rearview mirror and • Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: vehicle instruments often. All levels checked? • Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean? • Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to recommended pressure? • Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have up-to-date maps? 4-14 Driving Your Vehicle

Hill and Mountain Roads { CAUTION CAUTION (Continued) Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving If you do not shift down, the You would then have poor braking on ﬂat or rolling terrain. Tips for brakes could get so hot that they or even none going down a hill. driving in these conditions include: would not work well. You would You could crash. Always have the • Keep the vehicle serviced then have poor braking or even engine running and the vehicle in and in good shape. none going down a hill. You could gear when going downhill. crash. Shift down to let the engine • Check all ﬂuid levels and brakes, assist the brakes on a steep tires, cooling system, and • Stay in your own lane. Do not transmission. downhill slope. swing wide or cut across the center of the road. Drive at • Going down steep or long hills, speeds that let you stay in your shift to a lower gear. { CAUTION own lane. • Top of hills: Be alert — something Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) could be in your lane (stalled car, or with the ignition off is accident). dangerous. The brakes will have Pay attention to special road to do all the work of slowing • signs (falling rocks area, winding down and they could get so hot roads, long grades, passing or that they would not work well. no-passing zones) and take (Continued) appropriate action. Driving Your Vehicle 4-15

Winter Driving Try not to break the fragile traction. Allow greater following distance on If you accelerate too fast, the drive any slippery road and watch for Driving on Snow or Ice wheels will spin and polish the slippery spots. Icy patches can occur Drive carefully when there is snow surface under the tires even more. on otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface of a curve or an or ice between the tires and the The StabiliTrak¨ System on overpass can remain icy when the road, creating less traction or grip. page 4-5 improves the ability to surrounding roads are clear. Avoid Wet ice can occur at about 32°F accelerate on slippery roads, sudden steering maneuvers and (0°C) when freezing rain begins to but slow down and adjust your braking while on ice. fall, resulting in even less traction. driving to the road conditions. When Avoid driving on wet ice or in driving through deep snow, turn Turn off cruise control, if equipped, freezing rain until roads can be off the traction control part of on slippery surfaces. treated with salt or sand. the StabiliTrak® System to help Drive with caution, whatever the maintain vehicle motion at lower condition. Accelerate gently speeds. so traction is not lost. Accelerating The Antilock Brake System (ABS) too quickly causes the wheels on page 4-4 improves vehicle to spin and makes the surface under stability during hard stops on a the tires slick, so there is even slippery roads, but apply the brakes less traction. sooner than when on dry pavement. 4-16 Driving Your Vehicle

Blizzard Conditions CAUTION (Continued) CAUTION (Continued) Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay with the If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: • Adjust the Climate Control vehicle unless there is help nearby. system to a setting that If possible, use the Roadside • Clear away snow from circulates the air inside the Assistance Program on page 7-6. around the base of your vehicle and set the fan speed To get help and keep everyone vehicle, especially any that is to the highest setting. See in the vehicle safe: blocking the exhaust pipe. • Check again from time to Climate Control System in • Turn on the Hazard Warning time to be sure snow does the Index. Flashers on page 3-5. not collect there. For more information about • Tie a red cloth to an outside • Open a window about two carbon monoxide, see Engine mirror. inches (5 cm) on the side of Exhaust on page 2-30. the vehicle that is away from Snow can trap exhaust gases { CAUTION the wind to bring in fresh air. under your vehicle. This can • Fully open the air outlets on cause deadly CO (carbon Snow can trap engine exhaust or under the instrument monoxide) gas to get inside. under the vehicle. This may cause panel. CO could overcome you and kill exhaust gases to get inside. you. You cannot see it or smell it, Engine exhaust contains carbon (Continued) so you might not know it is in your monoxide (CO) which cannot be vehicle. Clear away snow from seen or smelled. It can cause around the base of your vehicle, unconsciousness and even death. especially any that is blocking the exhaust. (Continued) Driving Your Vehicle 4-17

Run the engine for short periods If Your Vehicle is Stuck in only as needed to keep warm, { CAUTION but be careful. Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow Slowly and cautiously spin the If you let your vehicle’s tires spin To save fuel, run the engine for only wheels to free the vehicle when at high speed, they can explode, short periods as needed to warm stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. and you or others could be the vehicle and then shut the engine See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It injured. The vehicle can overheat, off and close the window most of Out on page 4-18. causing an engine compartment the way to save heat. Repeat ﬁre or other damage. Spin the this until help arrives but only when If the vehicle has a traction system, it wheels as little as possible and you feel really uncomfortable can often help to free a stuck vehicle. from the cold. Moving about to keep Refer to the vehicle’s traction system avoid going above 35 mph warm also helps. in the Index. If stuck too severely for (55 km/h) as shown on the the traction system to free the speedometer. If it takes some time for help to vehicle, turn the traction system off arrive, now and then when you run and use the rocking method. For information about using tire the engine, push the accelerator chains on the vehicle, see Tire pedal slightly so the engine Chains on page 5-60. runs faster than the idle speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as little as possible to save fuel. 4-18 Driving Your Vehicle

Rocking Your Vehicle to Loading the Vehicle { CAUTION Get It Out It is very important to know how Turn the steering wheel left and much weight your vehicle can Do not load the vehicle any right to clear the area around carry. This weight is called heavier than the Gross Vehicle the front wheels. Turn off any the vehicle capacity weight and Weight Rating (GVWR), or traction or stability system. Shift includes the weight of all either the maximum front or back and forth between R (Reverse) occupants, cargo, and all rear Gross Axle Weight Rating and a forward gear, spinning the nonfactory-installed options. (GAWR). If you do, parts on wheels as little as possible. To Two labels on your vehicle show the vehicle can break, and it prevent transmission wear, wait until how much weight it may can change the way your the wheels stop spinning before properly carry, the Tire and vehicle handles. These could shifting gears. Release the Loading Information label and cause you to lose control and accelerator pedal while shifting, and the Certiﬁcation/Tire label. crash. Also, overloading can press lightly on the accelerator shorten the life of the vehicle. pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be towed out. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-22. Driving Your Vehicle 4-19

Tire and Loading Information The tire and loading information Steps for Determining Correct Label label shows the number of Load Limit occupant seating positions (A), 1. Locate the statement and the maximum vehicle “The combined weight of capacity weight (B) in kilograms occupants and cargo should and pounds. never exceed XXX kg or The Tire and Loading Information XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s label also shows the size of the placard. original equipment tires (C) and 2. Determine the combined the recommended cold tire weight of the driver and inflation pressures (D). For more passengers that will be riding information on tires and inflation in your vehicle. see Tires on page 5-39 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on 3. Subtract the combined weight page 5-45. of the driver and passengers Example Label from XXX kg or XXX lbs. There is also important loading A vehicle specific Tire and 4. The resulting figure equals the information on the vehicle available amount of cargo and Loading Information label is Certification/Tire label. It tells attached to the center pillar luggage load capacity. For you the Gross Vehicle Weight example, if the “XXX” amount (B-pillar) of your vehicle. With Rating (GVWR) and the the driver’s door open, you equals 1400 lbs and there will Gross Axle Weight Rating be five 150 lb passengers in will find the label attached below (GAWR) for the front and rear the door lock post (striker). your vehicle, the amount of axle. See “Certification/Tire available cargo and luggage Label” later in this section. load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). 4-20 Driving Your Vehicle

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available Example 1 Example 2 cargo and luggage load capacity for your vehicle. A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 = 1,000 lbs Example 2 = 1,000 lbs See Towing a Trailer on (453 kg). (453 kg). page 4-26 for important B. Subtract Occupant Weight B. Subtract Occupant Weight information on towing a trailer, 150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 = 300 lbs 150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = 750 lbs towing safety rules, and (136 kg). (340 kg). trailering tips. C. Available Occupant and C. Available Cargo Cargo Weight = 700 lbs Weight = 250 lbs (113 kg). (317 kg). Driving Your Vehicle 4-21

The combined weight of the The label shows the gross driver, passengers, and cargo weight capacity of your vehicle. should never exceed your This is called the Gross vehicle’s capacity weight. Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the Certification/Tire Label weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo. The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles, called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find Example 3 out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for = go to a weigh station and Example 3 1,000 lbs weigh your vehicle. Your (453 kg). dealer/retailer can help you with B. Subtract Occupant Weight this. Be sure to spread out 200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 = Label Example your load equally on both sides 1,000 lbs (453 kg). of the centerline. C. Available Cargo A vehicle specific Certification/ Weight = 0 lbs (0 kg). Tire label is attached to the rear edge of the driver’s door. Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating positions. 4-22 Driving Your Vehicle

Never exceed the GVWR for will go as fast as the vehicle Towing your vehicle or the GAWR goes. If you have to stop or turn for either the front or rear axle. quickly, or if there is a crash, Towing Your Vehicle they will keep going. { To avoid damage, the disabled CAUTION { vehicle should be towed with all four CAUTION wheels off the ground. Consult your Do not load the vehicle any dealer/retailer or a professional heavier than the Gross Vehicle Things you put inside your towing service if the disabled vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or vehicle can strike and injure must be towed. See Roadside either the maximum front or people in a sudden stop or Assistance Program on page 7-6. rear Gross Axle Weight Rating turn, or in a crash. (GAWR). If you do, parts on • Put things in the cargo To tow the vehicle behind another the vehicle can break, and it area of your vehicle. Try to vehicle for recreational purposes, can change the way your spread the weight evenly. such as behind a motorhome, vehicle handles. These could • Never stack heavier see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” cause you to lose control and things, like suitcases, following. crash. Also, overloading can inside the vehicle so that shorten the life of the vehicle. some of them are above Recreational Vehicle the tops of the seats. Towing Notice: Overloading your • Do not leave an unsecured Recreational vehicle towing means vehicle may cause damage. child restraint in your towing the vehicle behind another Repairs would not be covered vehicle. vehicle – such as behind a by your warranty. Do not • When you carry something motorhome. The two most common overload your vehicle. inside the vehicle, secure it types of recreational vehicle towing If you put things inside your whenever you can. are known as dinghy towing and vehicle — like suitcases, tools, • Do not leave a seat folded dolly towing. Dinghy towing is towing packages, or anything else, they down unless you need to. the vehicle with all four wheels on the Driving Your Vehicle 4-23 ground. Dolly towing is towing the Dinghy Towing For vehicles being dinghy towed, the vehicle with two wheels on the vehicle should be run at the ground and two wheels up on a beginning of each day and at each device known as a dolly. RV fuel stop for about ﬁve minutes. This will ensure proper lubrication of Here are some important things to transmission components. Re-install consider before recreational vehicle the fuse to start the vehicle. towing: • What is the towing capacity of the To tow the vehicle from the front towing vehicle? Be sure to read with all four wheels on the ground: the tow vehicle manufacturer’s 1. Position the vehicle to tow recommendations. and then secure it to the towing • What is the distance that will be vehicle. travelled? Some vehicles have 2. Shift the transmission to P (Park) restrictions on how far and how If the vehicle is front-wheel-drive, it and turn the ignition to long they can tow. can be dinghy towed from the LOCK/OFF. • Is the proper towing equipment front. These vehicles may also be 3. Set the parking brake. going to be used? See your towed by putting the front wheels on a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” later 4. Turn the ignition to dealer/retailer or trailering ACC/ACCESSORY. professional for additional advice in this section. 5. Shift the transmission to and equipment recommendations. If the vehicle is all-wheel-drive, it can N (Neutral). • Is the vehicle ready to be towed? be dinghy towed from the front. Just as preparing the vehicle for a These vehicles can also be towed by long trip, make sure the vehicle is placing them on a platform trailer prepared to be towed. See Before with all four wheels off of the ground. Leaving on a Long Trip on These vehicles cannot be towed page 4-13. using a dolly. 4-24 Driving Your Vehicle

6. To prevent the battery from Once the destination is reached: Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive draining while the vehicle is being 1. Set the parking brake. Vehicles) towed, remove the 50 amp BATT1 fuse from the underhood 2. Reinstall the 50 amp BATT1 fuse fuse block and store in a safe to the underhood fuse block. location. See Underhood 3. Shift the transmission to Fuse Block on page 5-94. P (Park), turn the ignition 7. Release the parking brake. to LOCK/OFF and remove the key from the ignition. Notice: If the vehicle is towed without performing each of 4. Disconnect the vehicle from the the steps listed under “Dinghy towing vehicle. Towing,” the automatic Notice: Do not tow a vehicle transmission could be damaged. with the front drive wheels on the Be sure to follow all steps of ground if one of the front tires the dinghy towing procedure prior is a compact spare tire. Towing to and after towing the vehicle. All-wheel-drive vehicles must not be with two different tire sizes on the towed with two wheels on the Notice: If 65 mph (105 km/h) front of the vehicle can cause ground. To properly tow these is exceeded while towing severe damage to the vehicles, they should be placed on the vehicle, it could be damaged. transmission. a platform trailer with all four Never exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) wheels off of the ground or dinghy while towing the vehicle. towed from the front. Driving Your Vehicle 4-25

Dolly Towing 5. Remove the key from the (Front-Wheel-Drive ignition. Vehicles Only) 6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly. 7. Release the parking brake. Towing the Vehicle From the Rear

Notice: Towing the vehicle from the rear could damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Never have To tow a front-wheel-drive vehicle the vehicle towed from the rear. from the front with two wheels on the ground: Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. 1. Put the front wheels on a dolly. 2. Move the shift lever to P (Park). 3. Set the parking brake. 4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a clamping device designed for towing. 4-26 Driving Your Vehicle

Towing a Trailer To identify the trailering capacity of Load-pulling components such as the vehicle, read the information the engine, transmission, rear { in “Weight of the Trailer” that axle, wheel assemblies and tires are CAUTION appears later in this section. forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight. The Trailering is different than just The driver can lose control when engine is required to operate driving the vehicle by itself. pulling a trailer if the correct at relatively higher speeds and Trailering means changes in equipment is not used or the under greater loads, generating handling, acceleration, braking, vehicle is not driven properly. For extra heat. What’s more, the trailer durability and fuel economy. example, if the trailer is too adds considerably to wind Successful, safe trailering takes heavy, the brakes may not work resistance, increasing the pulling correct equipment, and it has to be well — or even at all. The driver requirements. and passengers could be used properly. seriously injured. The vehicle may The following information has many Pulling A Trailer also be damaged; the resulting time-tested, important trailering Here are some important points: repairs would not be covered by tips and safety rules. Many of these There are many different the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer are important for the safety of the • laws, including speed limit only if all the steps in this section driver and the passengers. So restrictions, having to do with have been followed. Ask your please read this section carefully before pulling a trailer. trailering. Make sure the rig will dealer/retailer for advice and be legal, not only where you information about towing a trailer live but also where you will be with the vehicle. driving. A good source for this information can be state or provincial police. Driving Your Vehicle 4-27

• Consider using a sway control. • The vehicle is designed It can depend on any special See “Hitches” later in this primarily as a passenger and load equipment on the vehicle, and the section. carrying vehicle. If a trailer is amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the • Do not tow a trailer at all during towed, the vehicle will require Trailer Tongue” later in this section the ﬁrst 500 miles (800 km) the more frequent maintenance due for more information. new vehicle is driven. The to the additional load. engine, axle or other parts could Three important considerations have Maximum trailer weight is calculated be damaged. to do with weight: assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the • Then, during the ﬁrst 500 miles • The weight of the trailer. (800 km) that a trailer is towed, do required trailering equipment. The • The weight of the trailer tongue. not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) weight of additional optional and do not make starts at full • And the weight on the equipment, passengers and cargo in throttle. This helps the engine and vehicle’s tires the tow vehicle must be subtracted other parts of the vehicle wear in from the maximum trailer weight. at the heavier loads. Weight of the Trailer • Obey speed limit restrictions How heavy can a trailer safely be? when towing a trailer. It depends on how the rig is • The vehicles can tow in D (Drive). used. For example, speed, altitude, Shift the transmission to a lower road grades, outside temperature gear if the transmission shifts too and how much the vehicle is used to often under heavy loads and/or pull a trailer are all important. hilly conditions. See “Tow/Haul Mode” later in this section. 4-28 Driving Your Vehicle

Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.

Vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR Front-Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg) Front-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 4,500 lbs (2 041 kg) 9,500 lbs (4 309 kg) All-Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,700 lbs (3 493 kg) All-Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 4,500 lbs (2 041 kg) 9,700 lbs (4 400 kg) *The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be exceeded.

Ask your dealer/retailer for our Weight of the Trailer Tongue equipment, passengers or cargo in trailering information or advice, or the vehicle, it will reduce the The tongue load (A) of any trailer is write us at our Customer Assistance tongue weight the vehicle can carry, an important weight to measure Offices. See Customer Assistance which will also reduce the trailer because it affects the total gross Offices on page 7-5 for more weight the vehicle can tow. If towing weight of the vehicle. The Gross information. a trailer, the tongue load must be Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the added to the GVW because curb weight of the vehicle, any the vehicle will be carrying that cargo carried in it, and the people weight, too. See Loading the Vehicle who will be riding in the vehicle. on page 4-18 for more information If there are a lot of options, about the vehicle’s maximum load capacity. Driving Your Vehicle 4-29

After loading the trailer, weigh the (1 814 kg) and a GCWR (Gross trailer and then the tongue, Combination Weight Rating) of separately, to see if the weights are 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer proper. If they aren’t, adjustments rating should be: might be made by moving some items around in the trailer. Trailering may also be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Expect tongue weight to be at least Rating). The effect of additional 10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs If a weight-carrying hitch or a weight may reduce the trailering (386 kg)) and because the weight is weight-distributing hitch is being capacity more than the total of the applied well behind the rear axle, the used, the trailer tongue (A) should additional weight. effect on the rear axle is greater than weigh 10-15 percent of the total just the weight itself, as much as loaded trailer weight (B). Consider the following example: 1.5 times as much. The weight at the A vehicle model base weight is rear axle could be 850 lbs (386 kg) 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since the (1 270 kg) at the front axle and rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle. (1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs brings the total to 3,975 lbs (3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to, but within the limit for RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg). 4-30 Driving Your Vehicle

If the vehicle has many options and Because the rear axle now weighs Total Weight on the Vehicle’s there is a front seat passenger 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), 900 lbs Tires and two rear seat passengers with (408 kg) can be put on the rear axle some luggage and gear in the without exceeding RGAWR. The Be sure the vehicle’s tires are vehicle as well. 300 lbs (136 kg) effect of tongue weight is about inﬂated to the upper limit for cold could be added to the front axle 1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing tires. These numbers can be found weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves on the Certiﬁcation/Tire label. rear axle weight. The vehicle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue See Loading the Vehicle on now weighs: weight that can be handled. Since page 4-18. Make sure not to go tongue weight is usually at least over the GVW limit for the vehicle, 10 percent of total loaded trailer including the weight of the trailer weight, expect that the largest trailer tongue. the vehicle can properly handle is Hitches 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg). It is important to have the correct It is important that the vehicle hitch equipment. Crosswinds, Weight is still below 7,200 lbs does not exceed any of its large trucks going by and rough (3 266 kg) and you might think ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, roads are a few reasons why 700 additional pounds (318 kg) Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue the right hitch is needed. Here are should be subtracted from the Weight. The only way to be sure some rules to follow: it is not exceeding any of these trailering capacity to stay within • The rear bumper on the vehicle is GCWR limits. The maximum trailer ratings is to weigh the vehicle and trailer. not intended for hitches. Do not would only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). attach rental hitches or other You may go further and think the bumper-type hitches to it. Use tongue weight should be limited to only a frame-mounted hitch that less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoid does not attach to the bumper. exceeding GVWR. But the effect on the rear axle must still be considered. Driving Your Vehicle 4-31

• Will any holes be made in the Trailer Brakes Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and attachments, safety body of the vehicle when the A loaded trailer that weighs more chains, electrical connectors, lamps, trailer hitch is installed? If there than 1,000 lbs (450 kg) needs tires and mirror adjustments. are, then be sure to seal the holes to have its own brake system that is If the trailer has electric brakes, later when the hitch is removed. adequate for the weight of the start the vehicle and trailer moving If the holes are not sealed, dirt, trailer. Be sure to read and follow and then apply the trailer brake water, and deadly carbon the instructions for the trailer brakes controller by hand to be sure monoxide (CO) from the exhaust so they are installed, adjusted the brakes are working. This checks can get into the vehicle. See and maintained properly. Engine Exhaust on page 2-30. the electrical connection at the Because the vehicle has antilock same time. Safety Chains brakes, do not try to tap into During the trip, check occasionally the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. Always attach chains between the to be sure that the load is secure, If you do, both brake systems will vehicle and the trailer. Cross the and that the lamps and any not work well, or at all. safety chains under the tongue of the trailer brakes are still working. trailer to help prevent the tongue Driving with a Trailer from contacting the road if it Following Distance Towing a trailer requires a certain becomes separated from the hitch. Stay at least twice as far behind amount of experience. Get to Instructions about safety chains the vehicle ahead as you would know the rig before setting out for may be provided by the hitch when driving the vehicle without a the open road. Get acquainted manufacturer or by the trailer trailer. This can help to avoid with the feel of handling and braking manufacturer. Follow the situations that require heavy braking with the added weight of the manufacturer’s recommendation for and sudden turns. attaching safety chains and do not trailer. And always keep in mind that attach them to the bumper. Always the vehicle you are driving is now leave just enough slack so the rig longer and not as responsive as the can turn. Never allow safety chains vehicle is by itself. to drag on the ground. 4-32 Driving Your Vehicle

Passing When turning with a trailer, make Driving on Grades wider turns than normal. Do this so More passing distance is needed Because of the added load of the the trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, when towing a trailer. Because trailer, the vehicle’s engine may curbs, road signs, trees or other the rig is longer, it is necessary to overheat on hot days, when going objects. Avoid jerky or sudden go much farther beyond the up a long or steep grade with a maneuvers. Signal well in advance. passed vehicle before returning to trailer. If the engine coolant the lane. Turn Signals When Towing a temperature gage indicates Trailer overheating, turn off the air Backing Up conditioning to reduce engine load, The arrows on the instrument panel Hold the bottom of the steering pull off the road and stop in a flash whenever signaling a turn wheel with one hand. Then, to move safe spot. Let the engine run while or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer to the left, move that parked, preferably on level the trailer lamps also flash, telling hand to the left. To move the trailer ground, with the transmission in other drivers the vehicle is turning, to the right, move your hand to P (Park) for a few minutes before changing lanes or stopping. the right. Always back up slowly turning the engine off. and, if possible, have someone When towing a trailer, the arrows on Reduce speed and shift to a lower guide you. the instrument panel flash for turns gear before starting down a long or even if the bulbs on the trailer are Making Turns steep downgrade. If the transmission burned out. For this reason you may is not shifted down, the brakes might Notice: Making very sharp turns think other drivers are seeing the have to be used so much that while trailering could cause signal when they are not. It is they would get hot and no longer the trailer to come in contact with important to check occasionally to be work well. the vehicle. The vehicle could sure the trailer bulbs are still working. On a long uphill grade, shift down be damaged. Avoid making very and reduce the vehicle speed sharp turns while trailering. to around 55 mph (88 km/h) to reduce the possibility of the engine and the transmission overheating. Driving Your Vehicle 4-33

Tow/Haul Mode earlier in this section. Tow/Haul is most useful under the following Tow/Haul is a feature that assists driving conditions: when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load. The purpose • When pulling a heavy trailer or a of the Tow/Haul mode is to: large or heavy load through rolling terrain. • Reduce the frequency and Press this button located on the improve the predictability of console to turn on and turn off the • When pulling a heavy trailer or a transmission shifts when pulling Tow/Haul mode. large or heavy load in stop and a heavy trailer or a large or go traffic. The Tow/Haul light on the heavy load. • When pulling a heavy trailer or a instrument panel will come on to large or heavy load in busy • Provide the same solid shift feel indicate that Tow/Haul mode parking lots where improved low when pulling a heavy trailer or a has been selected. large or heavy load as when speed control of the vehicle is the vehicle is unloaded. Tow/Haul may be turned off by desired. pressing the button again, at which • Improve control of vehicle speed Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul time the indicator light on the while requiring less throttle pedal when lightly loaded or with no trailer instrument panel will turn off. activity when pulling a heavy at all will not cause damage. The vehicle will automatically turn trailer or a large or heavy load. However, there is no beneﬁt to the off Tow/Haul every time it is started. • Increase the charging system selection of Tow/Haul when the voltage to assist in recharging Tow/Haul is designed to be most vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection a battery installed in a trailer. effective when the vehicle and when unloaded may result in trailer combined weight is at least unpleasant engine and transmission 75 percent of the vehicle’s driving characteristics and reduced Gross Combined Weight Rating fuel economy. Tow/Haul is (GCWR). See Weight of the Trailer recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load. 4-34 Driving Your Vehicle

Parking on Hills 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then Things that are especially important apply the parking brake and shift in trailer operation are automatic { CAUTION the transmission into P (Park). transmission ﬂuid, engine oil, 5. Release the brake pedal. axle lubricant, belts, cooling system Parking the vehicle on a hill with and brake system. It is a good the trailer attached can be Leaving After Parking on idea to inspect these before and during the trip. dangerous. If something goes a Hill wrong, the rig could start to move. 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal Check periodically to see that all People can be injured, and both while you: hitch nuts and bolts are tight. the vehicle and the trailer can be • start the engine, damaged. When possible, always Trailer Wiring Harness park the rig on a ﬂat surface. • shift into a gear, and The vehicle is equipped with the • release the parking brake. following wiring harness for towing If parking the rig on a hill: 2. Let up on the brake pedal. a trailer. 1. Press the brake pedal, but do 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is Basic Trailer Wiring not shift into P (Park) yet. clear of the chocks. The trailer wiring harness, with a Turn the wheels into the curb if 4. Stop and have someone pick up seven-pin connector, is located facing downhill or into traffic and store the chocks. at the rear of the vehicle and is if facing uphill. tied to the vehicle’s frame. 2. Have someone place chocks Maintenance When Trailer The harness connector can be under the trailer wheels. Towing plugged into a seven-pin 3. When the wheel chocks are in The vehicle needs service more universal heavy-duty trailer place, release the brake pedal often when pulling a trailer. connector available through your until the chocks absorb the load. See Scheduled Maintenance on dealer/retailer. page 6-3 for more information. Driving Your Vehicle 4-35

The seven-wire harness contains If a remote (non-vehicle) battery is • Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal the following trailer circuits: being charged, press the Tow/Haul • Black: Ground • Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal mode switch located on the center console near the climate The electric trailer brake controller • Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn controls. This will boost the vehicle should be installed by your Signal system voltage and properly dealer/retailer or a qualiﬁed service • Brown: Taillamps charge the battery. If the trailer is center. too light for Tow/Haul mode, turn on • Black: Ground the headlamps (Non-HID only) as Engine Cooling When Trailer • Light Green: Back-up Lamps a second way to boost the Towing • Red/Black: Battery Feed vehicle system and charge the The cooling system may temporarily battery. overheat during severe operating • Dark Blue: Trailer Brake* Electric Trailer Brake Control conditions. See Engine Overheating *The fuse for this circuit is installed Wiring Provisions on page 5-23. in the underhood electrical center, but the wires are not connected. These wiring provisions for an They should be connected by your electric trailer brake controller are dealer/retailer or a qualiﬁed included with the vehicle as service center. part of the trailer wiring package. The instrument panel contains blunt If the back-up lamp circuit is not cut wires behind the steering functional, contact your column for the electric trailer brake dealer/retailer. controller. The harness contains the following wires: • Red/Black: Power Supply • White: Brake Switch Signal • Gray: Illumination 4-36 Driving Your Vehicle

✍ NOTES Service and Appearance Care 5-1

Fuels in Foreign Countries ...... 5-7 All-Wheel Drive Service and Filling the Tank ...... 5-8 All-Wheel Drive ...... 5-35 Filling a Portable Fuel Appearance Care Container ...... 5-10 Headlamp Aiming Headlamp Aiming ...... 5-35 Checking Things Under the Hood Bulb Replacement Checking Things Under Bulb Replacement ...... 5-35 Service the Hood ...... 5-10 High Intensity Discharge Service ...... 5-3 Hood Release ...... 5-11 (HID) Lighting ...... 5-36 Accessories and Engine Compartment Halogen Bulbs ...... 5-36 Modifications ...... 5-3 Overview ...... 5-12 Taillamps, Turn Signal, California Proposition 65 Engine Oil ...... 5-13 Stoplamps and Warning ...... 5-3 Engine Oil Life System ...... 5-15 Sidemarker Lamps ...... 5-36 California Perchlorate Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ...... 5-17 License Plate Lamp ...... 5-37 Materials Requirements ...... 5-4 Automatic Transmission Replacement Bulbs ...... 5-37 Doing Your Own Fluid ...... 5-18 Service Work ...... 5-4 Cooling System ...... 5-19 Windshield Wiper Blade Adding Equipment to the Engine Coolant ...... 5-19 Replacement Outside of the Vehicle ...... 5-5 Engine Overheating ...... 5-23 Windshield Wiper Blade Overheated Engine Replacement ...... 5-38 Fuel Protection Operating Mode ...5-25 Fuel ...... 5-5 Tires Power Steering Fluid ...... 5-25 ...... 5-39 Gasoline Octane ...... 5-5 ...... 5-26 Tires ...... 5-5 Windshield Washer Fluid Tire Sidewall Labeling ...... 5-40 Gasoline Specifications Brakes ...... 5-27 California Fuel ...... 5-6 Tire Terminology and Battery ...... 5-29 ...... 5-42 Additives ...... 5-6 ...... 5-30 Definitions Jump Starting Inflation - Tire Pressure ...... 5-45 5-2 Service and Appearance Care

Tire Pressure Monitor Secondary Latch System ...... 5-78 Vehicle Identification System ...... 5-46 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire Vehicle Identification Tire Pressure Monitor and Tools ...... 5-80 Number (VIN) ...... 5-91 Operation ...... 5-48 Compact Spare Tire ...... 5-83 Service Parts Identification Tire Inspection and Label ...... 5-91 Rotation ...... 5-52 Appearance Care When It Is Time for Interior Cleaning ...... 5-84 Electrical System New Tires ...... 5-54 Fabric/Carpet ...... 5-85 High Voltage Devices Buying New Tires ...... 5-54 Leather ...... 5-86 and Wiring ...... 5-91 Different Size Tires and Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Add-On Electrical Wheels ...... 5-56 Other Plastic Surfaces ...... 5-86 Equipment ...... 5-92 Uniform Tire Quality Care of Safety Belts ...... 5-86 Windshield Wiper Fuses ...... 5-92 Grading ...... 5-57 Weatherstrips ...... 5-87 Power Windows and Other Wheel Alignment and Washing Your Vehicle ...... 5-87 Power Options ...... 5-92 Tire Balance ...... 5-58 Cleaning Exterior Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....5-92 Wheel Replacement ...... 5-59 Lamps/Lenses ...... 5-87 Instrument Panel Tire Chains ...... 5-60 Finish Care ...... 5-87 Fuse Block ...... 5-92 If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 5-61 Windshield, Backglass, and Underhood Fuse Block ...... 5-94 Tire Sealant and Wiper Blades ...... 5-88 Compressor Kit ...... 5-62 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Capacities and Specifications Tire Sealant and Wheels and Trim ...... 5-89 Capacities and Compressor Kit Storage ...... 5-70 Tires ...... 5-90 Specifications ...... 5-98 Changing a Flat Tire ...... 5-70 Sheet Metal Damage ...... 5-90 Removing the Spare Tire Finish Damage ...... 5-90 and Tools ...... 5-71 Underbody Maintenance ...... 5-90 Removing the Flat Tire and Chemical Paint Spotting ...... 5-90 Installing the Spare Tire ...... 5-74 Service and Appearance Care 5-3

Service Accessories and Your GM dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using For service and parts needs, Modifications genuine GM Accessories. When you visit your dealer/retailer. You will When non-dealer/non-retailer go to your GM dealer/retailer and ask receive genuine Saturn parts accessories are added to the vehicle, for GM Accessories, you will know and Saturn-trained and supported they can affect vehicle performance that GM-trained and supported service people. and safety, including such things service technicians will perform the Genuine Saturn parts have one of as airbags, braking, stability, ride work using genuine GM Accessories. and handling, emissions systems, these marks. Also, see Adding Equipment to aerodynamics, durability, and Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on electronic systems like antilock page 1-60. brakes, traction control, and stability control. Some of these accessories could even cause malfunction or California Proposition 65 damage not covered by the vehicle Warning warranty. Most motor vehicles, including this Damage to vehicle components one, contain and/or emit chemicals resulting from the installation or use known to the State of California of non-GM certified parts, including to cause cancer and birth defects or control module modifications, are not other reproductive harm. Engine covered under the terms of the exhaust, many parts and systems vehicle warranty and may affect (including some inside the vehicle), remaining warranty coverage for many fluids, and some component affected parts. wear by-products contain and/or emit these chemicals. GM Accessories are designed to complement and function with other systems on the vehicle. 5-4 Service and Appearance Care

California Perchlorate Doing Your Own If doing some of your own service work, use the proper service manual. Materials Requirements Service Work It tells you much more about how to Certain types of automotive service the vehicle than this manual applications, such as airbag { CAUTION can. To order the proper service initiators, seat belt pretensioners, manual, see Service Publications and lithium batteries contained You can be injured and the Ordering Information on page 7-15. in remote keyless transmitters, may vehicle could be damaged if you This vehicle has an airbag system. contain perchlorate materials. try to do service work on a vehicle Before attempting to do your own Special handling may be necessary. without knowing enough about it. service work, see Servicing Your For additional information, see • Be sure you have sufficient Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ knowledge, experience, the page 1-60. perchlorate. proper replacement parts, and tools before attempting any Keep a record with all parts receipts vehicle maintenance task. and list the mileage and the date • Be sure to use the proper of any service work performed. See Maintenance Record on page 6-16. nuts, bolts, and other fasteners. English and metric fasteners can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners are used, parts can later break or fall off. You could be hurt. Service and Appearance Care 5-5

Adding Equipment to the Fuel 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If you are using gasoline Outside of the Vehicle Use of the recommended fuel rated at 87 octane or higher and you Things added to the outside of the is an important part of the proper hear heavy knocking, the engine vehicle can affect the airflow maintenance of this vehicle. To help needs service. around it. This can cause wind keep the engine clean and maintain noise and can affect fuel economy optimum vehicle performance, we Gasoline Specifications and windshield washer performance. recommend the use of gasoline Check with your dealer/retailer advertised as TOP TIER Detergent At a minimum, gasoline should before adding equipment to Gasoline. meet ASTM specification the outside of the vehicle. D 4814 in the United States or Gasoline Octane CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an Use regular unleaded gasoline with a octane-enhancing additive called posted octane rating of 87 or higher. methylcyclopentadienyl manganese If the octane rating is less than 87, tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend you might notice an audible knocking against the use of gasolines noise when you drive, commonly containing MMT. See Additives on referred to as spark knock. If this page 5-6 for additional information. occurs, use a gasoline rated at 5-6 Service and Appearance Care

California Fuel Additives For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, If the vehicle is certified to meet To provide cleaner air, all gasolines one bottle of GM Fuel System California Emissions Standards, it is in the United States are now required Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel designed to operate on fuels that to contain additives that help prevent tank at every engine oil change, can meet California specifications. See engine and fuel system deposits help clean deposits from fuel the underhood emission control from forming, allowing the emission injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel label. If this fuel is not available in control system to work properly. In System Treatment PLUS is the only states adopting California emissions most cases, you should not have to gasoline additive recommended by standards, the vehicle will operate add anything to the fuel. However, General Motors. satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal some gasolines contain only the specifications, but emission control minimum amount of additive Also, your dealer/retailer has system performance might be required to meet U.S. Environmental additives that will help correct and affected. The malfunction indicator Protection Agency regulations. prevent most deposit-related lamp could turn on and the vehicle To help keep fuel injectors and problems. might fail a smog-check test. See intake valves clean, or if the vehicle Malfunction Indicator Lamp on experiences problems due to dirty page 3-39. If this occurs, return to injectors or valves, look for gasoline your authorized dealer/retailer for that is advertised as TOP TIER diagnosis. If it is determined that the Detergent Gasoline. condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Service and Appearance Care 5-7

Gasolines containing oxygenates, Some gasolines that are Fuels in Foreign such as ethers and ethanol, and not reformulated for low reformulated gasolines might emissions can contain an Countries be available in your area. We octane-enhancing additive called If you plan on driving in another recommend that you use these methylcyclopentadienyl manganese country outside the United States gasolines, if they comply with the tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant or Canada, the proper fuel might speciﬁcations described earlier. where you buy gasoline whether the be hard to ﬁnd. Never use leaded However, E85 (85% ethanol) and fuel contains MMT. We recommend gasoline or any other fuel not other fuels containing more than against the use of such gasolines. recommended in the previous text 10% ethanol must not be used in Fuels containing MMT can reduce on fuel. Costly repairs caused vehicles that were not designed for the life of spark plugs and the by use of improper fuel would not those fuels. performance of the emission control be covered by the vehicle warranty. system could be affected. The To check the fuel availability, ask Notice: This vehicle was not malfunction indicator lamp might turn an auto club, or contact a major oil designed for fuel that contains on. If this occurs, return to your company that does business in the methanol. Do not use fuel dealer/retailer for service. containing methanol. It can country where you will be driving. corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty. 5-8 Service and Appearance Care

Filling the Tank The tethered fuel cap is located While refueling, hang the tethered behind a hinged fuel door on fuel cap from the hook on the the driver side of the vehicle. fuel door. { CAUTION To open the fuel door, push the Fuel vapor burns violently and a rearward center edge in and release { CAUTION fuel ﬁre can cause bad injuries. and it will open. To help avoid injuries to you and Fuel can spray out on you if you others, read and follow all the open the fuel cap too quickly. If instructions on the pump island. you spill fuel and then something Turn off the engine when you are ignites it, you could be badly refueling. Do not smoke if you are burned. This spray can happen if near fuel or refueling the vehicle. the tank is nearly full, and is more Do not use cellular phones. Keep likely in hot weather. Open the sparks, ﬂames, and smoking fuel cap slowly and wait for any materials away from fuel. Do not hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew leave the fuel pump unattended the cap all the way. when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep children away To remove the fuel cap, turn it from the fuel pump; never let slowly counterclockwise. The fuel children pump fuel. cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released too soon, it will spring back to the right. Service and Appearance Care 5-9

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top If the vehicle has a Driver Notice: If you need a new fuel off or overfill the tank and wait a few Information Center (DIC), the cap, be sure to get the right type. seconds after you have finished TIGHTEN GAS CAP message Your dealer/ retailer can get one pumping before removing the nozzle. displays if the fuel cap is not for you. If you get the wrong type, Clean fuel from painted surfaces as properly installed. it might not fit properly. This can soon as possible. See Washing Your cause the malfunction indicator Vehicle on page 5-87. { CAUTION lamp to light and can damage the fuel tank and emissions system. When replacing the fuel cap, turn See Malfunction Indicator Lamp it clockwise until it clicks. Make If a fire starts while you are on page 3-39. sure the cap is fully installed. The refueling, do not remove the diagnostic system can determine nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel if the fuel cap has been left off or by shutting off the pump or by improperly installed. This would notifying the station attendant. allow fuel to evaporate into the Leave the area immediately. atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-39. 5-10 Service and Appearance Care

Filling a Portable Fuel CAUTION (Continued) Checking Things Container Under the Hood { • Bring the fill nozzle in contact CAUTION with the inside of the fill { CAUTION opening before operating the Never fill a portable fuel container nozzle. Contact should be An electric fan under the hood can while it is in the vehicle. Static maintained until the filling is start up and injure you even when electricity discharge from the complete. the engine is not running. Keep container can ignite the fuel vapor. • Do not smoke while hands, clothing, and tools away You can be badly burned and the pumping fuel. from any underhood electric fan. vehicle damaged if this occurs. To • Do not use a cellular phone help avoid injury to you and others: while pumping fuel. • Dispense fuel only into { CAUTION approved containers. • Do not fill a container while it Things that burn can get on hot is inside a vehicle, in a engine parts and start a fire. vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or These include liquids like fuel, oil, on any surface other than the coolant, brake fluid, windshield ground. washer and other fluids, and (Continued) plastic or rubber. You or others could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine. Service and Appearance Care 5-11

Hood Release 2. At the front of the vehicle, pull up Pull the hood down to close. Lower on the center of the hood, and the hood until the lifting pressure To open the hood, do the following: push the secondary hood release of the struts is reduced. Then allow to the right. the hood to fall and latch into 3. After you have partially lifted the place under its own weight. Check hood, gas struts will automatically to make sure the hood is closed. take over to lift and hold the If the hood does not fully latch, hood in the fully open position. gently push the hood down at the front and center of the hood until it is Before closing the hood, be sure all completely latched. 1. Pull the hood release handle with ﬁller caps are on properly. this symbol on it. It is located under the instrument panel on the driver’s side of the vehicle. 5-12 Service and Appearance Care

Engine Compartment Overview When you lift the hood, here is what you will see: Service and Appearance Care 5-13

A. Radiator Pressure Cap. See H. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil Cooling System on page 5-19. “Checking Engine Oil” under B. Engine Coolant Recovery Cap. Engine Oil on page 5-13. Checking Engine Oil See Cooling System on I. Automatic Transmission Fluid It is a good idea to check the engine page 5-19. Dipstick. See “Checking the oil level at each fuel ﬁll. In order to C. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. Fluid Level” under Automatic get an accurate reading, the oil must See Jump Starting on page 5-30. Transmission Fluid on page 5-18. be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. D. Underhood Fuse Block on J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. page 5-94. See “Brake Fluid” under Brakes The engine oil dipstick handle on page 5-27. E. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. is a yellow loop. See Engine See Jump Starting on page 5-30. K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on Compartment Overview on page 5-17. page 5-12 for the location of the F. Power Steering Fluid on engine oil dipstick. page 5-25. L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding Washer 1. Turn off the engine and give the G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When Fluid” under Windshield oil several minutes to drain back to Add Engine Oil” under Engine Washer Fluid on page 5-26. into the oil pan. If this is not done, Oil on page 5-13. the oil dipstick might not show the actual level. 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level. 5-14 Service and Appearance Care

When to Add Engine Oil What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for three things:

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for the location of If the oil is below the cross-hatched the engine oil ﬁll cap. area at the tip of the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the Add enough oil to put the level recommended oil. This section somewhere in the proper operating explains what kind of oil to use. range in the cross-hatched area. For engine oil crankcase capacity, Push the dipstick all the way back in see Capacities and Speciﬁcations when through. on page 5-98. Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating range, the engine could be damaged. Service and Appearance Care 5-15

• GM6094M Notice: Use only engine oil Engine Oil Additives / Engine Use only an oil that meets identified as meeting GM Standard Oil Flushes GM Standard GM6094M. GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Do not add anything to the oil. The • SAE 5W-30 Certified For Gasoline Engines recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard SAE 5W-30 is best for the starburst symbol. Failure to use GM6094M are all that is needed vehicle. These numbers on an the recommended oil can result in for good performance and engine oil container show its viscosity, engine damage not covered by the protection. or thickness. Do not use vehicle warranty. other viscosity oils such Engine oil system flushes are not as SAE 20W-50. Cold Temperature Operation recommended and could cause • American Petroleum Institute If in an area of extreme cold, where engine damage not covered by the − (API) starburst symbol the temperature falls below 20°F vehicle warranty. (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 Engine Oil Life System engine oil. Both provide easier cold starting for the engine at extremely When to Change Engine Oil low temperatures. Always use an oil This vehicle has a computer system that meets the required specification, that indicates when to change the GM6094M. See “What Kind of engine oil and filter. This is based Oils meeting these requirements Engine Oil to Use” for more on engine revolutions and engine should have the starburst symbol information. temperature, and not on mileage. on the container. This symbol Based on driving conditions, indicates that the oil has been the mileage at which an oil change certified by the American is indicated can vary considerably. Petroleum Institute (API). For the oil life system to work properly, the system must be reset every time the oil is changed. 5-16 Service and Appearance Care

When the system has calculated How to Reset the Engine Oil 3. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. that oil life has been diminished, Life System If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL it indicates that an oil change is The Engine Oil Life System SOON message comes back on necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE when the vehicle is started, the OIL SOON message comes on. calculates when to change the engine oil and ﬁlter based on vehicle engine oil life system has not Change the oil as soon as possible reset. Repeat the procedure. within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). use. Whenever the oil is changed, It is possible that, if driving under the reset the system so it can calculate If the vehicle has Driver Information best conditions, the oil life system when the next oil change is required. Center (DIC) buttons: might not indicate that an oil change If a situation occurs where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, is necessary for over a year. with the engine off. However, the engine oil and ﬁlter ENGINE OIL SOON message being must be changed at least once a turned on, reset the system. 2. Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE year and at this time the system must If the vehicle does not have Driver REMAINING displays. be reset. Your dealer/retailer has Information Center (DIC) buttons: trained service people who will 3. Press and hold the set/reset 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, with perform this work using genuine button until 100% is displayed. the engine off. The vehicle must parts and reset the system. It is also Three chimes sound and be in P (Park) to access this important to check the oil regularly the CHANGE ENGINE OIL display. Press the trip odometer and keep it at the proper level. SOON message goes off. reset stem until OIL LIFE If the system is ever reset REMAINING displays. 4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. accidentally, the oil must be 2. Press and hold the trip If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) odometer reset stem until OIL message comes back on when the since the last oil change. Remember LIFE REMAINING shows 100%. vehicle is started, the engine oil life to reset the oil life system whenever Three chimes sound and the system has not reset. Repeat the the oil is changed. CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON procedure. message goes off. Service and Appearance Care 5-17

What to Do with Used Oil Engine Air Cleaner/Filter To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter: Used engine oil contains certain When to Inspect the Engine elements that can be unhealthy for Air Cleaner/Filter your skin and could even cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the your skin for very long. Clean your Maintenance II intervals and replace skin and nails with soap and water, it at the first oil change after each or a good hand cleaner. Wash or 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. properly dispose of clothing or rags See Scheduled Maintenance containing used engine oil. See the on page 6-3 for more information. manufacturer’s warnings about the If you are driving in dusty/dirty use and disposal of oil products. conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil change. Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you change your See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for the location of own oil, be sure to drain all the oil 1. Loosen the screws that hold the the engine air cleaner/filter. from the filter before disposal. Never cover on. dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into How to Inspect the Engine Air 2. Disconnect the electrical sewers, or into streams or bodies of Cleaner/Filter connector. water. Recycle it by taking it to a To inspect the air cleaner/filter, 3. Lift off the cover. place that collects used oil. remove the filter from the vehicle and 4. Remove the engine air cleaner/ lightly shake the filter (away from filter element and any loose vehicle) to release loose dust and debris that may be found in the dirt. If the filter remains caked with air cleaner base. dirt, a new filter is required. 5-18 Service and Appearance Care

5. Inspect or replace the air filter Notice: If the air cleaner/filter Change the fluid at the intervals element. is off, a backfire can cause a listed in Additional Required Services 6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to damaging engine fire. And, dirt on page 6-6, and be sure to use reinstall the cover and reconnect can easily get into the engine, the transmission fluid listed in the electrical connector. which will damage it. Always have Recommended Fluids and the air cleaner/filter in place when Lubricants on page 6-12. you are driving. { CAUTION Notice: Use of the incorrect Automatic Transmission automatic transmission fluid Operating the engine with the air may damage the vehicle, and the cleaner/filter off can cause you Fluid damages may not be covered by or others to be burned. The air It is not necessary to check the vehicle’s warranty. Always use cleaner not only cleans the air; it the transmission fluid level. A the automatic transmission fluid helps to stop flames if the engine transmission fluid leak is the only listed in Recommended Fluids and backfires. If it is not there and the reason for fluid loss. If a leak occurs, Lubricants on page 6-12. engine backfires, you could be take the vehicle to the dealer/retailer The transmission fluid will not burned. Do not drive with it off, and and have it repaired as soon as reach the end of the dipstick unless be careful working on the engine possible. the transmission is at operating with the air cleaner/filter off. temperature. If you need to check the transmission fluid level, please take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer. Service and Appearance Care 5-19

Cooling System Notice: Using coolant other than { CAUTION DEX-COOL® can cause premature The cooling system allows the engine, heater core, or radiator engine to maintain the correct An electric engine cooling fan corrosion. In addition, the engine working temperature. under the hood can start up even coolant could require changing when the engine is not running sooner, at 30,000 miles and can cause injury. Keep (50 000 km) or 24 months, hands, clothing, and tools away whichever occurs first. Any from any underhood electric fan. repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant { CAUTION in the vehicle. Heater and radiator hoses, and Engine Coolant other engine parts, can be very The cooling system in the vehicle hot. Do not touch them. If you do, is filled with DEX-COOL® engine you can be burned. coolant. The coolant is designed to A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank Do not run the engine if there is a remain in the vehicle for five years leak. If you run the engine, it or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), B. Radiator Pressure Cap could lose all coolant. That could whichever occurs first. C. Engine Cooling Fans cause an engine fire, and you The following explains the cooling could be burned. Get any leak system and how to check and add fixed before you drive the vehicle. coolant when it is low. If there is a problem with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on page 5-23. 5-20 Service and Appearance Care

What to Use Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Notice: If an improper coolant drinkable water and DEX-COOL mixture is used, the engine could { CAUTION coolant. If using this mixture, overheat and be badly damaged. nothing else needs to be added. The repair cost would not be Adding only plain water to the This mixture: covered by the vehicle warranty. cooling system can be dangerous. • Gives freezing protection Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, Plain water, or some other liquid down to −34°F (−37°C), outside radiator, heater core, and other such as alcohol, can boil before temperature. parts. the proper coolant mixture will. • Gives boiling protection up The vehicle’s coolant warning to 265°F (129°C), engine Notice: If extra inhibitors system is set for the proper temperature. and/or additives are used in the coolant mixture. With plain water vehicle’s cooling system, the • Protects against rust and or the wrong mixture, the engine vehicle could be damaged. Use corrosion. could get too hot but you would only the proper mixture of the not get the overheat warning. • Will not damage aluminum parts. engine coolant listed in this The engine could catch ﬁre and • Helps keep the proper engine manual for the cooling system. you or others could be burned. temperature. See Recommended Fluids and Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Lubricants on page 6-12 for more drinkable water and DEX-COOL® information. coolant. Service and Appearance Care 5-21

Checking Coolant How to Add Coolant to the The vehicle must be on a level Recovery Tank surface when checking the coolant level. { CAUTION Check to see if coolant is visible in You can be burned if you spill the coolant recovery tank. If the coolant on hot engine parts. coolant inside the coolant recovery The coolant recovery tank cap has tank is boiling, do not do anything this symbol on it. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts else until it cools down. If coolant is When the engine is cold, the visible but the coolant level is not at are hot enough. Do not spill coolant level should be at or above coolant on a hot engine. or above the FULL COLD mark, add the FULL COLD line marked on the a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable recovery tank. water and DEX-COOL coolant at the Notice: This vehicle has a coolant recovery tank, but be sure When the engine is hot, the level speciﬁc coolant ﬁll procedure. the cooling system is cool before this could be higher than the FULL COLD Failure to follow this procedure is done. See Engine Coolant on line. If the coolant is below the FULL could cause the engine to page 5-19 for more information. COLD line when the engine is hot, overheat and be severely there could be a leak in the cooling damaged. system. If coolant is needed, add the proper If the coolant is low, add the coolant DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at or take the vehicle to a dealer/retailer the coolant recovery tank. for service. 5-22 Service and Appearance Care

How to Add Coolant to the 2. Remove the radiator pressure Radiator CAUTION (Continued) cap when the cooling system, including the upper radiator hose, Wait for the cooling system and is no longer hot. { CAUTION surge tank pressure cap to cool Turn the pressure cap slowly if you ever have to turn the counterclockwise about one full An electric engine cooling fan pressure cap. under the hood can start up even turn. If you hear a hiss, wait when the engine is not running for that to stop. A hiss means and can cause injury. Keep If coolant is needed, add the proper there is still some pressure left in mixture directly to the radiator, hands, clothing, and tools away the system. but be sure the cooling system is from any underhood electric fan. cool before this is done.

{ CAUTION

Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out 3. Keep turning the pressure cap and burn you badly. They are slowly and remove it. under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank pressure cap — even a 4. Fill the radiator to the base of the little — they can come out at high filler neck with the proper speed. Never turn the cap when DEX-COOL coolant mixture. the cooling system, including the 5. When coolant begins to flow out surge tank pressure cap, is hot. of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure to secure (Continued) 1. Detach fasteners and lift off the panel that covers the it tightly. radiator cap. Service and Appearance Care 5-23

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured. Engine Overheating The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine overheating. There is an engine coolant temperature gage on the instrument panel cluster. See Engine Coolant 6. Fill the coolant recovery tank to 8. Start the engine and let it run Temperature Gage on page 3-38. the FULL COLD mark. until the upper radiator hose feels warm. Any time during this The vehicle may also display 7. Reinstall the cap on the coolant an ENGINE OVERHEATED recovery tank but leave the procedure, watch out for the engine cooling fan(s). IDLE ENGINE and ENGINE radiator pressure cap off. OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE 9. If the coolant level inside the message in the Driver Information radiator filler neck is low, add Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and more of the proper DEX-COOL Messages on page 3-56. coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level is back You may decide not to lift the hood up to the base of the filler neck. when this warning appears, but Replace the pressure cap. instead get service help right away. Be sure to secure it tightly. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6. 5-24 Service and Appearance Care

If you do decide to lift the hood, If Steam Is Coming From The If No Steam Is Coming From make sure the vehicle is parked Engine Compartment The Engine Compartment on a level surface. If an engine overheat warning is Then check to see if the engine { CAUTION displayed but no steam can be seen cooling fans are running. If the or heard, the problem may not be too engine is overheating, both fans Steam from an overheated engine serious. Sometimes the engine can should be running. If they are can burn you badly, even if you get a little too hot when the vehicle: not, do not continue to run the just open the hood. Stay away • Climbs a long hill on a hot day. engine and have the vehicle from the engine if you see or hear serviced. steam coming from it. Turn it off • Stops after high-speed driving. Notice: Engine damage from and get everyone away from the • Idles for long periods in traffic. running the engine without vehicle until it cools down. Wait • Tows a trailer. coolant is not covered by the until there is no sign of steam or warranty. coolant before you open the hood. If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of steam: If you keep driving when the Notice: If the engine catches ﬁre 1. Turn the air conditioning off. while driving with no coolant, the vehicles engine is overheated, the vehicle can be badly damaged. liquids in it can catch ﬁre. You or 2. Turn the heater on to the highest The costly repairs would not be others could be badly burned. temperature and to the highest covered by the vehicle warranty. Stop the engine if it overheats, fan speed. Open the windows as See Overheated Engine Protection and get out of the vehicle until the necessary. Operating Mode on page 5-25 for engine is cool. 3. If in a traffic jam, shift to information on driving to a safe See Overheated Engine Protection N (Neutral), otherwise, shift place in an emergency. Operating Mode on page 5-25 for to the highest gear while information on driving to a safe driving — D (Drive) or L (Low). place in an emergency. Service and Appearance Care 5-25

If the temperature overheat gage is Overheated Power Steering Fluid no longer in the overheat zone or an Engine Protection overheat warning no longer displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue Operating Mode to drive the vehicle slow for about This emergency operating mode lets 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle the vehicle be driven to a safe place distance from the car in front of you. in an emergency situation. If an If the warning does not come back overheated engine condition exists, on, continue to drive normally. an overheat protection mode which The power steering fluid reservoir is If the warning continues, pull over, alternates firing groups of cylinders located toward the front of the engine stop, and park the vehicle right away. helps prevent engine damage. In this compartment on the passenger mode, there is a significant loss in side of the vehicle. See Engine If there is no sign of steam, idle power and engine performance. Compartment Overview on the engine for three minutes The temperature gage indicates an page 5-12 for reservoir location. while parked. If the warning is still overheat condition exists. Driving displayed, turn off the engine until it extended distances and/or towing a When to Check Power cools down. Also, see “Overheated trailer in the overheat protection Steering Fluid Engine Protection Operating Mode” mode should be avoided. next in this section. It is not necessary to regularly Notice: After driving in the check power steering fluid unless overheated engine protection you suspect there is a leak in operating mode, to avoid engine the system or you hear an unusual damage, allow the engine to cool noise. A fluid loss in this system before attempting any repair. could indicate a problem. Have the The engine oil will be severely system inspected and repaired. degraded. Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil on page 5-13. 5-26 Service and Appearance Care

How to Check Power Steering What to Use Adding Washer Fluid Fluid To determine what kind of fluid to When the windshield washer fluid To check the power steering fluid: use, see Recommended Fluids and reservoir is low, a WASHER FLUID Lubricants on page 6-12. Always LOW ADD FLUID message will be 1. Turn the key off and let the use the proper fluid. displayed on the Driver Information engine compartment cool down. Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and 2. Remove engine oil fill cap. Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid Messages on page 3-56 for more may damage the vehicle and the information. 3. Slide engine cover rearward and damages may not be covered by lift to remove. the vehicle’s warranty. Always 4. Wipe the cap and the top of the use the correct fluid listed in reservoir clean. Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12. 5. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Windshield Washer Fluid 6. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. What to Use Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid 7. Remove the cap again and look When adding windshield washer until the tank is full. See Engine at the fluid level on the dipstick. fluid, be sure to read the Compartment Overview on The fluid level should be somewhere manufacturer’s instructions before page 5-12 for reservoir location. between MAX and MIN line on the use. If the vehicle will be operating dipstick in room temperature. If the in an area where the temperature fluid is on or below MIN line, you may fall below freezing, use a should add fluid close to MAX Line. fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing. Service and Appearance Care 5-27

Notice: Brakes Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding • When using concentrated fluid does not correct a leak. If fluid washer fluid, follow the Brake Fluid is added when the linings are worn, manufacturer’s instructions for there will be too much fluid when new adding water. brake linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, • Do not mix water with only when work is done on the brake ready-to-use washer fluid. hydraulic system. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your The brake master cylinder reservoir { washer fluid tank and other is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. See CAUTION parts of the washer system. Engine Compartment Overview on Also, water does not clean as page 5-12 for the location of the If too much brake fluid is added, it well as washer fluid. reservoir. can spill on the engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You or • Fill the washer fluid tank only There are only two reasons why the others could be burned, and the three-quarters full when it is brake fluid level in the reservoir vehicle could be damaged. Add might go down: very cold. This allows for fluid brake fluid only when work is done expansion if freezing occurs, • The brake fluid level goes down on the brake hydraulic system. which could damage the tank if because of normal brake lining it is completely full. wear. When new linings are When the brake fluid falls to a low • Do not use engine coolant installed, the fluid level goes level, the brake warning light comes (antifreeze) in your windshield back up. on. See Brake System Warning washer. It can damage the • A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic Light on page 3-36. vehicle’s windshield washer system can also cause a low fluid system and paint. level. Have the brake hydraulic system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not work well. 5-28 Service and Appearance Care

What to Add Notice: Brake Wear Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid • Using the wrong fluid can badly This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc from a sealed container. See damage brake hydraulic system brake pads have built-in wear Recommended Fluids and parts. For example, just a few indicators that make a high-pitched Lubricants on page 6-12. drops of mineral-based oil, warning sound when the brake pads such as engine oil, in the brake Always clean the brake fluid reservoir are worn and new pads are needed. hydraulic system can damage cap and the area around the cap The sound can come and go or be brake hydraulic system parts so before removing it. This helps keep heard all the time the vehicle is badly that they will have to be dirt from entering the reservoir. moving, except when applying the replaced. Do not let someone brake pedal firmly. put in the wrong kind of fluid. { CAUTION • If brake fluid is spilled on the { CAUTION vehicle’s painted surfaces, the With the wrong kind of fluid in the paint finish can be damaged. Be brake hydraulic system, the The brake wear warning sound careful not to spill brake fluid brakes might not work well. This means that soon the brakes will on the vehicle. If you do, wash it not work well. That could lead to could cause a crash. Always use off immediately. See Washing the proper brake fluid. an accident. When the brake wear Your Vehicle on page 5-87. warning sound is heard, have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair. Service and Appearance Care 5-29

Some driving conditions or climates Brake Adjustment Battery can cause a brake squeal when Every time the brakes are applied, the brakes are first applied or lightly This vehicle has a maintenance free with or without the vehicle moving, applied. This does not mean battery. When it is time for a new the brakes adjust for wear. something is wrong with the brakes. battery, see your dealer/retailer for one that has the replacement Properly torqued wheel nuts are Replacing Brake System Parts number shown on the original necessary to help prevent The braking system on a vehicle battery’s label. brake pulsation. When tires are is complex. Its many parts have to For battery replacement, see your rotated, inspect brake pads for wear be of top quality and work well dealer/retailer or the service manual. and evenly tighten wheel nuts in together if the vehicle is to have To purchase a service manual, the proper sequence to torque really good braking. The vehicle was see Service Publications Ordering specifications in Capacities and designed and tested with top-quality Information on page 7-15. Specifications on page 5-98. brake parts. When parts of the braking system are replaced — for Warning: Battery posts, terminals, Brake linings should always be and related accessories contain replaced as complete axle sets. example, when the brake linings wear down and new ones are lead and lead compounds, Brake Pedal Travel installed — be sure to get new chemicals known to the State of approved replacement parts. If this California to cause cancer and See your dealer/retailer if the brake is not done, the brakes might reproductive harm. Wash hands pedal does not return to normal not work properly. For example, if after handling. height, or if there is a rapid increase someone puts in brake linings in pedal travel. This could be a that are wrong for the vehicle, the sign that brake service might balance between the front and be required. rear brakes can change — for the worse. The braking performance expected can change in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts are installed. 5-30 Service and Appearance Care

Vehicle Storage Jump Starting Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work, If the vehicle’s battery has run and it could damage the vehicle. { CAUTION down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables 1. Check the other vehicle. Batteries have acid that can burn to start your vehicle. Be sure to use It must have a 12-volt battery you and gas that can explode. the following steps to do it safely. with a negative ground system. You can be badly hurt if you are Notice: If the other vehicle’s not careful. See Jump Starting { CAUTION system is not a 12-volt system on page 5-30 for tips on working with a negative ground, both around a battery without Batteries can hurt you. They can vehicles can be damaged. Only getting hurt. be dangerous because: use vehicles with 12-volt systems • They contain acid that can with negative grounds to jump Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is burn you. start your vehicle. driven infrequently, remove the 2. Get the vehicles close enough black, negative (−) cable from the • They contain gas that can so the jumper cables can reach, battery. This helps keep the battery explode or ignite. but be sure the vehicles are not from running down. • They contain enough electricity to burn you. touching each other. If they are, it Extended Storage: For extended could cause a ground connection storage of the vehicle, remove the If you do not follow these steps you do not want. You would not black, negative (−) cable from the exactly, some or all of these be able to start your vehicle, and battery or use a battery trickle things can hurt you. the bad grounding could damage charger. This helps maintain the the electrical systems. charge of the battery over an Notice: Ignoring these steps extended period of time. could result in costly damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by the warranty. Service and Appearance Care 5-31

To avoid the possibility of the 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles rolling, set the parking vehicles. Unplug unnecessary { CAUTION brake firmly on both vehicles accessories plugged into the involved in the jump start cigarette lighter or the accessory Using a match near a battery can procedure. Put an automatic power outlets. Turn off the radio cause battery gas to explode. transmission in P (Park) or and all lamps that are not needed. People have been hurt doing this, a manual transmission in This will avoid sparks and help and some have been blinded. Use Neutral before setting the parking save both batteries. And it could a flashlight if you need more light. brake. If one of the vehicles is a save the radio! Be sure the batteries have enough four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure 4. Open the hoods and locate the water. You do not need to add the transfer case is not in Neutral. positive (+) and negative (−) water to the ACDelco® battery Notice: If you leave the radio or terminal locations on the other (or batteries) installed in your new other accessories on during vehicle. Your vehicle has a vehicle. But if a battery has filler the jump starting procedure, they remote positive (+) and a remote caps, be sure the right amount of could be damaged. The repairs negative (−) jump starting fluid is there. If it is low, add water would not be covered by the terminal. See Engine to take care of that first. If you do warranty. Always turn off Compartment Overview on not, explosive gas could be the radio and other accessories page 5-12 for more information present. when jump starting the vehicle. on the terminal locations. Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately. 5-32 Service and Appearance Care

Before you connect the cables, { CAUTION here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go Fans or other moving engine to positive (+) or to a remote parts can injure you badly. Keep positive (+) terminal if the vehicle your hands away from moving has one. Negative (−) will go to a parts once the engine is running. heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote negative (−) 5. Check that the jumper cables terminal if the vehicle has one. do not have loose or missing Do not connect positive (+) to insulation. If they do, you could negative (−) or you will get a short get a shock. The vehicles could that would damage the battery be damaged too. and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the negative (−) 6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the negative (−) terminal cable to the positive (+) terminal on the dead battery because this of the dead battery. can cause sparks. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. Service and Appearance Care 5-33

8. Now connect the black The electrical connection is just negative (−) cable to the as good there, and the chance negative (−) terminal of the of sparks getting back to the good battery. Use a remote battery is much less. − negative ( ) terminal if the vehicle Your vehicle has a remote has one. negative (−) terminal for this Do not let the other end touch purpose. anything until the next step. The − 10. Now start the vehicle with the other end of the negative ( ) good battery and run the cable does not go to the dead engine for a while. battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part, or to 11. Try to start the vehicle that had a remote negative (−) terminal on the dead battery. If it will not the vehicle with the dead battery. 9. Connect the other end of the start after a few tries, it probably negative (−) cable at least needs service. 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery, but not near engine parts that move. 5-34 Service and Appearance Care

Notice: If the jumper cables are To disconnect the jumper cables connected or removed in the from both vehicles, do the following: wrong order, electrical shorting 1. Disconnect the black negative (−) may occur and damage the cable from the vehicle that had vehicle. The repairs would not be the dead battery. covered by the vehicle warranty. Always connect and remove the 2. Disconnect the black negative (−) jumper cables in the correct order, cable from the vehicle with the making sure that the cables do not good battery. touch each other or other metal. 3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the vehicle with the good battery. Jumper Cable Removal 4. Disconnect the red positive (+) A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine cable from the other vehicle. Part or Remote Negative (−) Terminal B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote Negative (−) Terminals C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal Service and Appearance Care 5-35

All-Wheel Drive Headlamp Aiming Bulb Replacement It is recommended that the all-wheel Headlamp aim has been preset at For the proper type of replacement drive lubricants be checked and the factory and should need no bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs ﬁlled by the dealer/retailer. further adjustment. on page 5-37. When to Check Lubricant However, if your vehicle is damaged For any bulb changing procedure in a crash, the headlamp aim may not listed in this section, contact Refer to the Maintenance Schedule be affected. Aim adjustment to your dealer/retailer. to determine how often to check the low-beam headlamps may be the lubricant. See Scheduled necessary if oncoming drivers ﬂash Maintenance on page 6-3. their high-beam headlamps at you (for vertical aim). If the headlamps need to be re-aimed, it is recommended that you take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service. 5-36 Service and Appearance Care

High Intensity Discharge Halogen Bulbs Taillamps, Turn Signal, (HID) Lighting Stoplamps and { CAUTION Sidemarker Lamps { CAUTION Halogen bulbs have pressurized The low beam high intensity gas inside and can burst if you discharge lighting system drop or scratch the bulb. You or operates at a very high voltage. others could be injured. Be sure If you try to service any of the to read and follow the instructions system components, you could on the bulb package. be seriously injured. Have your dealer/retailer or a qualiﬁed technician service them.

Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After your vehicle’s HID headlamp A. Sidemarker Lamp bulb has been replaced, you may notice that the beam is a B. Taillamp slightly different shade than it was originally. This is normal. To replace one of these bulbs: 1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate on page 2-10 or Power Liftgate on page 2-11. 2. Remove the convenience net, if the vehicle has one. Service and Appearance Care 5-37

3. Remove the two taillamp hex nut License Plate Lamp 4. Install the new bulb. covers. To replace one of these bulbs: 5. Reverse steps1–3toreinstall 4. Remove the two hex nuts the license plate lamp. holding the taillamp assembly in 1. Remove the two screws holding place. each of the license plate lamps to the liftgate trim. Replacement Bulbs 5. Pull out the taillamp assembly. 6. Turn the bulb socket Bulb Exterior Lamp Number counterclockwise and pull it straight out to remove it. License Plate Lamp 194 Rear Sidemarker 7. Replace the old bulb with a Lamp 194 new one. Rear Turn Signal 8. Reverse Steps 3 through 6 to and Taillamps 3157K reinstall the taillamp assembly. When reinstalling the taillamp For replacement bulbs not listed assembly, make sure the plastic here, contact your dealer/retailer. pin on the taillamp assembly lines up and is inserted correctly into the opening of the vehicle. 2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward through the lift gate trim opening. 3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the bulb straight out of the socket. 5-38 Service and Appearance Care

Windshield Wiper Backglass Wiper Blade Blade Replacement To replace the backglass wiper blade: Windshield wiper blades should be 1. Pull the wiper blade assembly inspected for wear or cracking. away from the backglass. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-3 for more information. The backglass wiper blade will not lock in a vertical position Replacement blades come in so care should be used when different types and are removed in pulling it away from the vehicle. different ways. To replace the wiper blade assembly: 2. Rotate the wiper blade assembly, hold the wiper arm in position, 1. Pull the windshield wiper 2. Press the button in the middle of and push the blade away arm away from the from the wiper arm. windshield. the wiper arm connector and pull the wiper blade away from the 3. Replace the wiper blade. arm connector. 4. Return the wiper arm and blade 3. Install the new wiper blade and assembly to the rest position on make sure the wiper blade the glass. locks into place. For the proper size and type see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-14. Service and Appearance Care 5-39

Tires { CAUTION CAUTION (Continued) Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by a Poorly maintained and Tire pressure should be leading tire manufacturer. improperly used tires are checked when your If you ever have questions about dangerous. vehicle’s tires are cold. your tire warranty and where to • Overloading your See Inflation - Tire obtain service, see your vehicle vehicle’s tires can cause Pressure on page 5-45. Warranty booklet for details. overheating as a result • Overinflated tires are more For additional information refer of too much flexing. likely to be cut, punctured, to the tire manufacturer. You could have an air-out or broken by a sudden and a serious accident. impact — such as when See Loading the Vehicle you hit a pothole. Keep on page 4-18. tires at the recommended • Underinflated tires pressure. pose the same danger • Worn, old tires can cause as overloaded tires. accidents. If the tire’s The resulting accident tread is badly worn, or could cause serious injury. if your vehicle’s tires Check all tires frequently to have been damaged, maintain the recommended replace them. pressure. (Continued) 5-40 Service and Appearance Care

Tire Sidewall Labeling See the “Tire Size” illustration The TIN shows the manufacturer later in this section for more and plant code, tire size, and Useful information about a tire is detail. date the tire was manufactured. molded into its sidewall. The The TIN is molded onto both examples below show a typical (B) TPC Spec (Tire sides of the tire, although only passenger vehicle tire and a Performance Criteria one side may have the date of compact spare tire sidewall. Specification): Original manufacture. equipment tires designed to GM’s specific tire performance (E) Tire Ply Material: The type criteria have a TPC specification of cord and number of plies in the code molded onto the sidewall. sidewall and under the tread. GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety (F) Uniform Tire Quality guidelines. Grading (UTQG): Tire manufacturers are required to (C) DOT (Department of grade tires based on three Transportation): The performance factors: treadwear, Department of Transportation traction, and temperature (DOT) code indicates that the tire resistance. For more information is in compliance with the U.S. see Uniform Tire Quality Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Department of Transportation Grading on page 5-57. Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Example (G) Maximum Cold Inflation (D) Tire Identification Number Load Limit: Maximum load that (A) Tire Size: The tire size is a (TIN): The letters and numbers can be carried and the maximum combination of letters and following DOT (Department pressure needed to support numbers used to define a of Transportation) code is the that load. particular tire’s width, height, Tire Identification Number (TIN). aspect ratio, construction type, and service description. Service and Appearance Care 5-41

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type (E) Tire Inflation: The of cord and number of plies in the temporary use tire or compact sidewall and under the tread. spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa). For more (C) Tire Identification Number information on tire pressure and (TIN): The letters and numbers inflation see Inflation - Tire following the DOT (Department Pressure on page 5-45. of Transportation) code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). (F) Tire Size: A combination of The TIN shows the manufacturer letters and numbers define a and plant code, tire size, and tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, date the tire was manufactured. construction type, and service The TIN is molded onto both description. The letter T as the Compact Spare Tire Example sides of the tire, although only first character in the tire size one side may have the date of means the tire is for temporary (A) Temporary Use Only: The manufacture. use only. compact spare tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of (D) Maximum Cold Inflation (G) TPC Spec (Tire approximately 3,000 miles Load Limit: Maximum load that Performance Criteria (5 000 km) and should not be can be carried and the maximum Specification): Original driven at speeds over 65 mph pressure needed to support equipment tires designed to (105 km/h). The compact spare that load. GM’s specific tire performance tire is for emergency use when a criteria have a TPC specification regular road tire has lost air and code molded onto the sidewall. gone flat. If your vehicle has a GM’s TPC specifications meet compact spare tire, see Compact or exceed all federal safety Spare Tire on page 5-83 and If a guidelines. Tire Goes Flat on page 5-61. 5-42 Service and Appearance Care

Tire Size (C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit Tire Terminology and The following illustration shows number that indicates the tire Definitions an example of a typical height-to-width measurements. passenger vehicle tire size. For example, if the tire size Air Pressure: The amount of aspect ratio is 60, as shown in air inside the tire pressing item C of the illustration, it would outward on each square inch mean that the tire’s sidewall is of the tire. Air pressure is 60 percent as high as it is wide. expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa). (D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to indicate the type Accessory Weight: This means of ply construction in the tire. the combined weight of optional The letter R means radial ply (A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: accessories. Some examples The United States version of a construction; the letter D means of optional accessories are, metric tire sizing system. The diagonal or bias ply construction; automatic transmission, power letter P as the first character in and the letter B means steering, power brakes, power the tire size means a passenger belted-bias ply construction. windows, power seats, and air conditioning. vehicle tire engineered to (E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of standards set by the U.S. Tire the wheel in inches. Aspect Ratio: The relationship and Rim Association. of a tire’s height to its width. (F) Service Description: These (B) Tire Width: The three-digit characters represent the load Belt: A rubber coated layer of number indicates the tire section index and speed rating of the tire. cords that is located between the width in millimeters from sidewall The load index represents the plies and the tread. Cords may to sidewall. load carry capacity a tire is be made from steel or other certified to carry. The speed reinforcing materials. rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load. Service and Appearance Care 5-43

Bead: The tire bead contains DOT Markings: A code Intended Outboard Sidewall: steel wires wrapped by steel molded into the sidewall of The side of an asymmetrical tire, cords that hold the tire onto a tire signifying that the tire that must always face outward the rim. is in compliance with the U.S. when mounted on a vehicle. Department of Transportation Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic (DOT) motor vehicle safety Kilopascal (kPa): The metric tire in which the plies are laid standards. The DOT code unit for air pressure. at alternate angles less than includes the Tire Identification Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: 90 degrees to the centerline of Number (TIN), an alphanumeric the tread. A tire used on light duty trucks designator which can also and some multipurpose Cold Tire Pressure: The identify the tire manufacturer, passenger vehicles. amount of air pressure in a tire, production plant, brand, and date measured in pounds per square of production. Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa) GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight before a tire has built up heat that corresponds to the load Rating. See Loading the Vehicle carrying capacity of a tire. from driving. See Inflation - Tire on page 4-18. Pressure on page 5-45. Maximum Inflation Pressure: GAWR FRT: Gross Axle The maximum air pressure to Curb Weight: The weight of a Weight Rating for the front axle. motor vehicle with standard which a cold tire can be inflated. See Loading the Vehicle on The maximum air pressure is and optional equipment including page 4-18. the maximum capacity of fuel, molded onto the sidewall. oil, and coolant, but without GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Load Rating: The passengers and cargo. Rating for the rear axle. See load rating for a tire at the Loading the Vehicle on maximum permissible inflation page 4-18. pressure for that tire. 5-44 Service and Appearance Care

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A Traction: The friction between Weight: The sum of curb tire used on passenger cars and the tire and the road surface. weight, accessory weight, some light duty trucks and The amount of grip provided. vehicle capacity weight, and multipurpose vehicles. production options weight. Tread: The portion of a tire that Recommended Inflation comes into contact with the road. Normal Occupant Weight: The Pressure: Vehicle number of occupants a vehicle manufacturer’s recommended Treadwear Indicators: Narrow is designed to seat multiplied by tire inflation pressure as bands, sometimes called wear 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading shown on the tire placard. bars, that show across the tread the Vehicle on page 4-18. See Inflation - Tire Pressure of a tire when only 1/16 inch on page 5-45 and Loading the (1.6 mm) of tread remains. Occupant Distribution: Vehicle on page 4-18. See When It Is Time for New Designated seating positions. Tires on page 5-54. Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic Outward Facing Sidewall: The tire in which the ply cords that UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality side of an asymmetrical tire that extend to the beads are laid at Grading Standards): A tire has a particular side that faces 90 degrees to the centerline of information system that provides outward when mounted on a the tread. consumers with ratings for a vehicle. The side of the tire that tire’s traction, temperature, contains a whitewall, bears white Rim: A metal support for a tire and treadwear. Ratings are lettering, or bears manufacturer, and upon which the tire beads determined by tire manufacturers brand, and/or model name are seated. using government testing molding that is higher or deeper procedures. The ratings are than the same moldings on the Sidewall: The portion of a tire molded into the sidewall of the other sidewall of the tire. between the tread and the bead. tire. See Uniform Tire Quality Speed Rating: An alphanumeric Grading on page 5-57. code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate. Service and Appearance Care 5-45

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The Inflation - Tire Pressure A vehicle specific Tire and number of designated seating Loading Information label is positions multiplied by 150 lbs Tires need the correct amount attached to your vehicle. This (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. of air pressure to operate label shows your vehicle’s See Loading the Vehicle on effectively. original equipment tires and the page 4-18. Notice: Do not let anyone tell correct inflation pressures for you that under-inflation or your tires when they are cold. Vehicle Maximum Load on the The recommended cold tire Tire: Load on an individual tire over-inflation is all right. It is not. If your tires do not have inflation pressure, shown on the due to curb weight, accessory label, is the minimum amount of weight, occupant weight, and enough air (under-inflation), you can get the following: air pressure needed to support cargo weight. your vehicle’s maximum load • Too much flexing Vehicle Placard: A label carrying capacity. • Too much heat permanently attached to a For additional information vehicle showing the vehicle’s • Tire overloading regarding how much weight capacity weight and the • Premature or irregular wear your vehicle can carry, and an original equipment tire size • Poor handling example of the Tire and Loading and recommended inflation Information label, see Loading pressure. See “Tire and Loading • Reduced fuel economy the Vehicle on page 4-18. How Information Label” under Loading If your tires have too much air you load your vehicle affects the Vehicle on page 4-18. (over-inflation), you can get vehicle handling and ride the following: comfort. Never load your vehicle • Unusual wear with more weight than it was designed to carry. • Poor handling • Rough ride • Needless damage from road hazards 5-46 Service and Appearance Care

When to Check Remove the valve cap from Tire Pressure Monitor the tire valve stem. Press the System Check your tires once a month tire gage firmly onto the valve or more. Do not forget to check to get a pressure measurement. The Tire Pressure Monitor System the compact spare tire, if the If the cold tire inflation pressure (TPMS) uses radio and sensor vehicle has one. It should be at matches the recommended technology to check tire pressure 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional pressure on the Tire and Loading levels. The TPMS sensors monitor information regarding the Information label, no further the air pressure in your vehicle’s tires compact spare tire, see Compact adjustment is necessary. If the and transmit tire pressure readings Spare Tire on page 5-83. inflation pressure is low, add air to a receiver located in the vehicle. How to Check until you reach the recommended Each tire, including the spare amount. Use a good quality pocket-type (if provided), should be checked gage to check tire pressure. If you overfill the tire, release monthly when cold and inflated to the You cannot tell if your tires are air by pushing on the metal stem inflation pressure recommended by properly inflated simply by in the center of the tire valve. the vehicle manufacturer on the looking at them. Radial tires may Re-check the tire pressure with vehicle placard or tire inflation look properly inflated even when the tire gage. pressure label. (If your vehicle has they are under-inflated. Check tires of a different size than the size Be sure to put the valve caps indicated on the vehicle placard or the tire’s inflation pressure when back on the valve stems. the tires are cold. Cold means tire inflation pressure label, you They help prevent leaks by should determine the proper tire your vehicle has been sitting for keeping out dirt and moisture. at least three hours or driven no inflation pressure for those tires.) more than 1 mile (1.6 km). Service and Appearance Care 5-47

As an added safety feature, your Please note that the TPMS is When the malfunction indicator vehicle has been equipped with a tire not a substitute for proper tire is illuminated, the system may not pressure monitoring system (TPMS) maintenance, and it is the driver’s be able to detect or signal low tire that illuminates a low tire pressure responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure as intended. TPMS telltale when one or more of your pressure, even if under-inflation has malfunctions may occur for a variety tires is significantly under-inflated. not reached the level to trigger of reasons, including the installation illumination of the TPMS low tire of replacement or alternate tires or Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale. wheels on the vehicle that prevent pressure telltale illuminates, you the TPMS from functioning properly. should stop and check your tires as Your vehicle has also been equipped Always check the TPMS malfunction soon as possible, and inflate them with a TPMS malfunction indicator to telltale after replacing one or more to the proper pressure. Driving on indicate when the system is not tires or wheels on your vehicle to a significantly under-inflated tire operating properly. The TPMS ensure that the replacement or causes the tire to overheat and can malfunction indicator is combined alternate tires and wheels allow the lead to tire failure. Under-inflation with the low tire pressure telltale. TPMS to continue to function also reduces fuel efficiency and When the system detects a properly. tire tread life, and may affect the malfunction, the telltale will flash for vehicle’s handling and stopping approximately one minute and then See Tire Pressure Monitor ability. remain continuously illuminated. Operation on page 5-48 for This sequence will continue upon additional information. subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. 5-48 Service and Appearance Care

Federal Communications Vehicles with TPMS operate on a Tire Pressure Monitor Commission (FCC) and radio frequency and comply with Operation Industry and Science Canada RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject to the This vehicle may have a Tire The Tire Pressure Monitor System following two conditions: Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). (TPMS) operates on a radio The TPMS is designed to warn the frequency and complies with Part 15 1. This device may not cause interference. driver when a low tire pressure of the FCC Rules. Operation is condition exists. TPMS sensors are subject to the following two 2. This device must accept any mounted onto each tire and wheel conditions: interference received, including assembly, excluding the spare tire 1. This device may not cause interference that may cause and wheel assembly, if the vehicle harmful interference. undesired operation of the device. has one. The TPMS sensors monitor 2. This device must accept any Changes or modiﬁcations to the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires interference received, including this system by other than an and transmits the tire pressure interference that may cause authorized service facility could readings to a receiver located in the undesired operation. void authorization to use this vehicle. equipment. Service and Appearance Care 5-49

Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you page 3-50 and DIC Warnings and about a low tire pressure condition Messages on page 3-56. but it does not replace normal tire maintenance. See Tire The low tire pressure warning light Inspection and Rotation on may come on in cool weather page 5-52 and Tires on page 5-39. when the vehicle is first started, and When a low tire pressure condition is then turn off as you start to drive. Notice: Using non-approved tire detected, the TPMS illuminates the This could be an early indicator that sealants could damage the Tire low tire pressure warning light the air pressure in the tire(s) are Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) located on the instrument panel getting low and need to be inflated sensors. TPMS sensor damage cluster. to the proper pressure. caused by using an incorrect tire A Tire and Loading Information sealant is not covered by the At the same time a message to vehicle warranty. Always use the check the pressure in a specific tire label, attached to your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s GM approved tire sealant available appears on the Driver Information through your dealer/retailer. Center (DIC) display. The low tire original equipment tires and pressure warning light and the DIC the correct inflation pressure for Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits warning message come on at each your vehicle’s tires when they use a GM approved liquid tire ignition cycle until the tires are are cold. See Loading the Vehicle sealant. Using non-approved tire inflated to the correct inflation on page 4-18, for an example of the sealants could damage the TPMS pressure. Using the DIC, tire Tire and Loading Information sensors. See Tire Sealant and pressure levels can be viewed by the label and its location on your Compressor Kit on page 5-62 for driver. For additional information and vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire information regarding the inflator kit details about the DIC operation and Pressure on page 5-45. materials and instructions. displays see DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-45 or DIC Operation and 5-50 Service and Appearance Care

TPMS Malfunction Light and • The TPMS sensor matching • Replacement tires or wheels do Message process was started but not not match your vehicle’s original completed or not completed equipment tires or wheels. Tires The TPMS will not function properly successfully after rotating the and wheels other than those if one or more of the TPMS sensors vehicle’s tires. The DIC message recommended for your vehicle are missing or inoperable. When the and TPMS malfunction light could prevent the TPMS from system detects a malfunction, the should go off once the TPMS functioning properly. See Buying low tire warning light ﬂashes for sensor matching process is New Tires on page 5-54. about one minute and then stays on performed successfully. See for the remainder of the ignition • Operating electronic devices or “TPMS Sensor Matching Process” cycle. A DIC warning message is being near facilities using radio later in this section. also displayed. The low tire warning wave frequencies similar to the light and DIC warning message • One or more TPMS sensors TPMS could cause the TPMS come on at each ignition cycle until are missing or damaged. The sensors to malfunction. DIC message and the TPMS the problem is corrected. Some of If the TPMS is not functioning it malfunction light should go off the conditions that can cause the cannot detect or signal a low tire when the TPMS sensors are malfunction light and DIC message condition. See your dealer/retailer for installed and the sensor to come on are: service if the TPMS malfunction light matching process is performed • One of the road tires has been and DIC message comes on and successfully. See your dealer/ replaced with the spare tire, if stays on. retailer for service. your vehicle has one. The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC message should go off once you re-install the road tire containing the TPMS sensor. Service and Appearance Care 5-51

TPMS Sensor Matching You have two minutes to match 4. Start with the driver side front tire. Process the first tire/wheel position, and 5. Remove the valve cap from five minutes overall to match all the valve cap stem. Activate the Each TPMS sensor has a unique four tire/wheel positions. If it takes identification code. Any time you TPMS sensor by increasing or longer than two minutes, to match decreasing the tire’s air pressure rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace the first tire and wheel, or more than one or more of the TPMS sensors, for five seconds, or until a horn five minutes to match all four tire chirp sounds. The horn chirp, the identification codes will need to and wheel positions the matching be matched to the new tire/wheel which may take up to 30 seconds process stops and you need to to sound, confirms that the sensor position. The sensors are matched start over. to the tire/wheel positions in the identification code has been following order: driver side front tire, The TPMS sensor matching process matched to this tire and wheel passenger side front tire, passenger is outlined below: position. side rear tire, and driver side rear 1. Set the parking brake. 6. Proceed to the passenger tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. side front tire, and repeat 2. Turn the ignition switch to See your dealer/retailer for service. the procedure in Step 5. ON/RUN with the engine off. The TPMS sensors can also be 7. Proceed to the passenger 3. Press the Remote Keyless matched to each tire/wheel position side rear tire, and repeat Entry (RKE) transmitter’s LOCK by increasing or decreasing the the procedure in Step 5. tire’s air pressure. If increasing the and UNLOCK buttons at the tire’s air pressure, do not exceed same time for approximately the maximum inflation pressure five seconds. The horn sounds indicated on the tire’s sidewall. twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE To decrease air-pressure out of LEARNING ACTIVE message a tire you can use the pointed end displays on the DIC screen. of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure gage, or a key. 5-52 Service and Appearance Care

8. Proceed to the driver side rear Tire Inspection and See When It Is Time for New tire, and repeat the procedure Rotation Tires on page 5-54 and Wheel in Step 5. The horn sounds Replacement on page 5-59. two times to indicate the sensor We recommend that you identiﬁcation code has been regularly inspect the vehicle’s matched to the driver side rear tires, including the spare tire, if tire, and the TPMS sensor the vehicle has one, for signs of matching process is no longer wear or damage. See When It Is active. The TIRE LEARNING Time for New Tires on page 5-54 ACTIVE message on the for more information. DIC display screen goes off. Tires should be rotated every 9. Turn the ignition switch to 5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 LOCK/OFF. to 13 000 km). See Scheduled 10. Set all four tires to the Maintenance on page 6-3. recommended air pressure level The purpose of a regular tire as indicated on the Tire and rotation is to achieve a uniform Loading Information label. When rotating the vehicle’s tires, wear for all tires on the vehicle. always use the correct rotation 11. Put the valve caps back on the This will ensure that the vehicle pattern shown here. valve stems. continues to perform most like it did when the tires were new. If the vehicle has a compact spare tire, do not include it in the Any time you notice unusual tire rotation. wear, rotate the tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. Service and Appearance Care 5-53

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation { CAUTION CAUTION (Continued) pressures as shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on In an emergency, you can use See Inflation - Tire Pressure on the parts to which it is fastened, a cloth or a paper towel to do page 5-45 and Loading the can make wheel nuts become this; but be sure to use a Vehicle on page 4-18. loose after time. The wheel scraper or wire brush later, if could come off and cause an needed, to get all the rust or Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor accident. When you change a dirt off. See Changing a Flat System. See Tire Pressure wheel, remove any rust or Tire on page 5-70. Monitor Operation on page 5-48. dirt from places where the Make certain that all wheel wheel attaches to the vehicle. Make sure the spare tire, if the nuts are properly tightened. (Continued) vehicle has one, is stored See “Wheel Nut Torque” under securely. Push, pull, and then Capacities and Specifications try to rotate or turn the tire. on page 5-98. If it moves, tighten the cable. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-80. 5-54 Service and Appearance Care

When It Is Time for New You need new tires if any of the With proper care and maintenance Tires following statements are true: tires typically wear out before • You can see the indicators at they degrade due to age. If you are Various factors, such as three or more places around unsure about the need to replace maintenance, temperatures, the tire. the tires as they get older, consult driving speeds, vehicle loading, the tire manufacturer for more and road conditions influence • You can see cord or fabric information. when you need new tires. showing through the tire’s rubber. • The tread or sidewall is cracked, Buying New Tires cut, or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. GM has developed and matched specific tires for your vehicle. The • The tire has a bump, bulge, original equipment tires installed or split. on your vehicle, when it was new, • The tire has a puncture, cut, or were designed to meet General other damage that cannot be Motors Tire Performance Criteria repaired well because of the size Specification (TPC Spec) system or location of the damage. rating. If you need replacement tires, GM strongly recommends The rubber in tires degrades over that you get tires with the same time, even if they are not being TPC Spec rating. This way, your used. This is also true for the spare vehicle will continue to have tires One way to tell when it is time for tire, if the vehicle has one. Multiple that are designed to give the new tires is to check the treadwear conditions affect how fast this same performance and vehicle indicators, which will appear when aging takes place, including safety, during normal use, as the the tires have only 1/16 inch temperatures, loading conditions, original tires. (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining. and inflation pressure maintenance. Service and Appearance Care 5-55

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec See Tire Inspection and Rotation system considers over a dozen on page 5-52 for information on { CAUTION critical speciﬁcations that proper tire rotation. impact the overall performance If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the wheel rim ﬂanges of your vehicle, including { CAUTION brake system performance, ride could develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and handling, traction control, Mixing tires could cause you and tire pressure monitoring and/or wheel could fail to lose control while driving. suddenly, causing a crash. performance. GM’s TPC Spec If you mix tires of different number is molded onto the Use only radial-ply tires with sizes, brands, or types (radial the wheels on the vehicle. tire’s sidewall near the tire size. and bias-belted tires), the If the tires have an all-season vehicle may not handle tread design, the TPC Spec properly, and you could have a If you must replace your vehicle’s number will be followed by an crash. Using tires of different tires with those that do not have MS for mud and snow. See Tire sizes, brands, or types may a TPC Spec number, make sure Sidewall Labeling on page 5-40 also cause damage to your they are the same size, load for additional information. vehicle. Be sure to use the range, speed rating, and GM recommends replacing tires correct size, brand, and type of construction type (radial and in sets of four. This is because tires on all wheels. It is all right bias-belted tires) as your uniform tread depth on all tires to drive with your compact vehicle’s original tires. will help keep your vehicle spare temporarily, as it was Vehicles that have a tire pressure performing most like it did when developed for use on your monitoring system could give an the tires were new. Replacing vehicle. See Compact Spare inaccurate low-pressure warning less than a full set of tires can Tire on page 5-83. if non-TPC Spec rated tires are affect the braking and handling installed on your vehicle. performance of your vehicle. 5-56 Service and Appearance Care

Non-TPC Spec rated tires may Different Size Tires and { give a low-pressure warning that Wheels CAUTION is higher or lower than the proper warning level you would get with If you add wheels or tires that If you add different sized TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire are a different size than your original wheels, your vehicle may not Pressure Monitor System on equipment wheels and tires, this may provide an acceptable level of page 5-46. affect the way your vehicle performs, performance and safety if tires not including its braking, ride and recommended for those wheels Your vehicle’s original equipment handling characteristics, stability, are selected. You may increase tires are listed on the Tire and and resistance to rollover. the chance that you will crash and Loading Information Label. Additionally, if your vehicle has See Loading the Vehicle on suffer serious injury. Only use electronic systems such as, anti-lock Saturn speciﬁc wheel and tire page 4-18, for more information brakes, rollover airbags, traction about the Tire and Loading systems developed for your control, and stability control, the vehicle, and have them properly Information Label and its location performance of these systems can on your vehicle. installed by a Saturn certiﬁed be affected. technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 5-54 and Accessories and Modiﬁcations on page 5-3 for additional information. Service and Appearance Care 5-57

Uniform Tire Quality The grades are molded on the Treadwear Grading sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the Quality grades can be found Grading (UTQG) system does not apply to deep tread, wear rate of the tire when tested where applicable on the tire under controlled conditions on sidewall between tread shoulder winter-type snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use a speciﬁed government test and maximum section width. course. For example, a tire For example: spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches graded 150 would wear one Treadwear 200 Traction AA (25 to 30 cm), or to some and a half (1.5) times as well Temperature A limited-production tires. on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative The following information relates While the tires available on performance of tires depends to the system developed by the General Motors passenger cars upon the actual conditions of United States National Highway and light trucks may vary with their use, however, and may Traffic Safety Administration respect to these grades, they depart signiﬁcantly from the norm (NHTSA), which grades tires must also conform to federal due to variations in driving habits, by treadwear, traction, and safety requirements and service practices, and differences temperature performance. additional General Motors Tire in road characteristics and This applies only to vehicles Performance Criteria (TPC) climate. sold in the United States. standards. 5-58 Service and Appearance Care

Traction – AA, A, B, C material of the tire to degenerate Wheel Alignment and and reduce tire life, and Tire Balance The traction grades, from highest excessive temperature can to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. lead to sudden tire failure. The tires and wheels on your vehicle Those grades represent the The grade C corresponds to a were aligned and balanced carefully tire’s ability to stop on wet level of performance which all at the factory to give you the longest pavement as measured under passenger car tires must meet tire life and best overall performance. controlled conditions on specified under the Federal Motor Vehicle Adjustments to wheel alignment and government test surfaces of Safety Standard No. 109. tire balancing will not be necessary asphalt and concrete. A tire Grades B and A represent higher on a regular basis. However, if you marked C may have poor traction levels of performance on the notice unusual tire wear or your performance. laboratory test wheel than the vehicle pulling to one side or the Temperature – A, B, C minimum required by law. other, the alignment might need to be It should be noted that the checked. If you notice your vehicle The temperature grades are temperature grade for this tire vibrating when driving on a smooth A (the highest), B, and C, is established for a tire that road, the tires and wheels might representing the tire’s resistance is properly inflated and not need to be rebalanced. See your to the generation of heat and its overloaded. Excessive speed, dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis. ability to dissipate heat when underinflation, or excessive tested under controlled loading, either separately or in conditions on a specified indoor combination, can cause heat laboratory test wheel. Sustained buildup and possible tire failure. high temperature can cause the Service and Appearance Care 5-59

Wheel Replacement If you need to replace any of your Notice: The wrong wheel can wheels, wheel bolts or wheel also cause problems with bearing Replace any wheel that is bent, nuts, replace them only with new life, brake cooling, speedometer cracked or badly rusted or corroded. Saturn original equipment parts. or odometer calibration, headlamp If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the This way, you will be sure to have aim, bumper height, vehicle wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts the right wheel, wheel bolts and ground clearance, and tire or tire should be replaced. If the wheel wheel nuts for your vehicle. chain clearance to the body and leaks air, replace it (except some chassis. aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your { CAUTION See Changing a Flat Tire on dealer/retailer if any of these page 5-70 for more information. conditions exist. Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel Your dealer/retailer will know the nuts on your vehicle can be kind of wheel you need. dangerous. It could affect the Each new wheel should have the braking and handling of your same load-carrying capacity, vehicle, make your tires lose air diameter, width, offset and be and make you lose control. You mounted the same way as the could have a collision in which one it replaces. you or others could be injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement. 5-60 Service and Appearance Care

Used Replacement Wheels Tire Chains CAUTION (Continued) { CAUTION { CAUTION Use another type of traction Putting a used wheel on your Do not use tire chains. There is device only if its manufacturer vehicle is dangerous. You cannot not enough clearance. Tire chains recommends it for use on the know how it has been used or used on a vehicle without the vehicle and tire size combination how far it has been driven. It proper amount of clearance can and road conditions. Follow could fail suddenly and cause a cause damage to the brakes, that manufacturer’s instructions. crash. If you have to replace a suspension or other vehicle parts. To help avoid damage to the wheel, use a new Saturn original The area damaged by the tire vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or equipment wheel. chains could cause you to lose remove the device if it is contacting control of the vehicle and you or the vehicle, and do not spin the others may be injured in a crash. vehicle’s wheels. If you do ﬁnd traction devices that will ﬁt, install (Continued) them on the front tires. Service and Appearance Care 5-61

If a Tire Goes Flat A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may { CAUTION It is unusual for a tire to blowout require the same correction you while you are driving, especially if would use in a skid. In any rear Lifting a vehicle and getting under you maintain the tires properly. See blowout, remove your foot from the it to do maintenance or repairs is Tires on page 5-39. If air goes out of accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle dangerous without the appropriate a tire, It is much more likely to leak under control by steering the way safety equipment and training. If a out slowly. But if you should ever you want the vehicle to go. It may be jack is provided with the vehicle, have a blowout, here are a few tips very bumpy and noisy, but you can it is designed only for changing a about what to expect and what to do: still steer. Gently brake to a stop, well flat tire. If it is used for anything If a front tire fails, the flat tire will off the road if possible. else, you or others could be badly create a drag that pulls the vehicle If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire injured or killed if the vehicle slips toward that side. Take your foot off and wheel damage by driving slowly off the jack. If a jack is provided the accelerator pedal and grip the to a level place and stopping. with the vehicle, only use it for steering wheel firmly. Steer to changing a flat tire. maintain lane position, and then 1. Turn on the hazard warning gently brake to a stop well out of the flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-5. This vehicle may come with a jack traffic lane. and spare tire or a tire sealant 2. Park the vehicle. Set the parking and compressor kit. To use the jack brake firmly and put the shift and spare tire, see Changing a lever in P (Park). Flat Tire on page 5-70. To use the 3. Turn off the engine. tire sealant and compressor kit, see Tire Sealant and Compressor 4. Inspect the flat tire. Kit on page 5-62. 5-62 Service and Appearance Care

Tire Sealant and If this vehicle has a tire sealant and { CAUTION compressor kit, there may not be a Compressor Kit spare tire, tire changing equipment, Over-inflating a tire could cause and on some vehicles there may not { CAUTION the tire to rupture and you or be a place to store a tire. others could be injured. Be sure to Idling a vehicle in an enclosed read and follow the tire sealant and The tire sealant and compressor can be used to temporarily seal area with poor ventilation is compressor kit instructions and punctures up to 1⁄4 inch (6 mm) in the dangerous. Engine exhaust may inflate the tire to its recommended tread area of the tire. It can also be enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust pressure. Do not exceed the used to inflate an under inflated tire. contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) recommended pressure. which cannot be seen or smelled. If the tire has been separated from It can cause unconsciousness the wheel, has damaged sidewalls, and even death. Never run the { CAUTION or has a large puncture, the tire engine in an enclosed area that is too severely damaged for the tire has no fresh air ventilation. For Storing the tire sealant and sealant and compressor kit to be more information, see Engine compressor kit or other equipment effective. See Roadside Assistance Exhaust on page 2-30. in the passenger compartment Program on page 7-6. of the vehicle could cause injury. Read and follow all of the tire sealant In a sudden stop or collision, loose and compressor kit instructions. equipment could strike someone. Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its original location. Service and Appearance Care 5-63

This vehicle may have one Tire Sealant of the following tire sealant and Read and follow the safe handling compressor kits. The kit includes: instructions on the label adhered to the sealant canister. Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant canister. The sealant canister should be replaced before its expiration date. Replacement sealant canisters are available at your local dealer/retailer. See “Removal and Installation of the Sealant Canister” A. Selector Switch (Sealant/Air or following. Air Only) There is only enough sealant to B. On/Off Button seal one tire. After usage, the sealant C. Pressure Gage canister and sealant/air hose D. Pressure Deﬂation Button assembly must be replaced. (If equipped) See “Removal and Installation of the Sealant Canister” following. E. Tire Sealant Canister F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear) G. Air Only Hose (Black) H. Power Plug 5-64 Service and Appearance Care

Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inﬂate a Punctured Tire Follow the directions closely for correct sealant usage.

When using the tire sealant and compressor kit during cold temperatures, warm the kit in a heated environment for 5 minutes. This will help to inﬂate the tire faster. Always do a safety check ﬁrst. See If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-61. Do not remove any objects that have penetrated the tire. 1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its storage location. See Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit Storage on page 5-70. Service and Appearance Care 5-65

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle 10. Inflate the tire to the and the power plug (H). must be running while using recommended inflation pressure 3. Place the kit on the ground. the air compressor. using the pressure gage (C). 8. Turn the selector switch (A) The recommended inflation Make sure the tire valve pressure can be found on the stem is positioned close to the counterclockwise to the Sealant + Air position. Tire and Loading Information ground so the hose will reach it. label. See Inflation - Tire 4. Remove the valve stem cap from 9. Press the on/off (B) button to Pressure on page 5-45. turn the tire sealant and the flat tire by turning it The pressure gage (C) may compressor kit on. counterclockwise. read higher than the actual tire 5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) The compressor will inject pressure while the compressor onto the tire valve stem. Turn sealant and air into the tire. is on. Turn the compressor it clockwise until it is tight. The pressure gage (C) will initially off to get an accurate pressure show a high pressure while the reading. The compressor 6. Plug the power plug (H) into the compressor pushes the sealant may be turned on/off until the accessory power outlet in the into the tire. Once the sealant is correct pressure is reached. vehicle. Unplug all items completely dispersed into the tire, from other accessory power the pressure will quickly drop and outlets. See Accessory Power start to rise again as the tire Outlet(s) on page 3-17. inflates with air only. If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not use the cigarette lighter. If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the cigarette lighter. Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or window. 5-66 Service and Appearance Care

Notice: If the recommended 12. Unplug the power plug (H) from 17. Return the equipment to its pressure cannot be reached after the accessory power outlet in original storage location in approximately 25 minutes, the the vehicle. the vehicle. vehicle should not be driven 13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) 18. Immediately drive the vehicle farther. The tire is too severely counterclockwise to remove it 5 miles (8 km) to distribute the damaged and the tire sealant and from the tire valve stem. sealant in the tire. compressor kit cannot inflate the tire. Remove the power plug from 14. Replace the tire valve stem cap. 19. Stop at a safe location and the accessory power outlet and 15. Replace the sealant/air hose (F), check the tire pressure. unscrew the inflating hose from and the power plug (H) back in Refer to Steps 1 through 11 the tire valve. See Roadside their original location. under “Using the Tire Sealant Assistance Program on page 7-6. and Compressor Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire 11. Press the on/off button (B) to (Not Punctured).” turn the tire sealant and compressor kit off. If the tire pressure has fallen more than 10 psi (68 kPa) below The tire is not sealed and the recommended inflation will continue to leak air until pressure, stop driving the the vehicle is driven and the 16. If the flat tire was able to inflate vehicle. The tire is too severely sealant is distributed in the tire, damaged and the tire sealant therefore, Steps 12 through 18 to the recommended inflation pressure, remove the maximum cannot seal the tire. See must be done immediately after Roadside Assistance Program Step 11. speed label from the sealant canister (E) and place it in a on page 7-6. Be careful while handling the tire highly visible location. The sealant and compressor kit as it label is a reminder not to exceed could be warm after usage. 55 mph (90 km/h) until the damaged tire is repaired or replaced. Service and Appearance Care 5-67

If the tire pressure has not 23. After temporarily sealing a tire dropped more than 10 psi using the tire sealant and (68 kPa) from the recommended compressor kit, take the vehicle inflation pressure, inflate the tire to an authorized dealer/retailer to the recommended inflation within a 100 miles (161 km) pressure. of driving to have the tire 20. Wipe off any sealant from the repaired or replaced. wheel, tire, and vehicle. Using the Tire Sealant and 21. Dispose of the used sealant Compressor Kit without canister (E) and sealant/air Sealant to Inflate a Tire hose (F) assembly at a (Not Punctured) local dealer/retailer or in To use the air compressor to inflate accordance with local state a tire with air only and not sealant: codes and practices. 22. Replace it with a new canister available from your dealer/ retailer. 5-68 Service and Appearance Care

4. Remove the tire valve stem cap 8. Turn the selector switch (A) from the flat tire by turning it clockwise to the Air Only position. counterclockwise. 9. Press the on/off (B) button to turn 5. Attach the air only hose (G) onto the compressor on. the tire valve stem by turning it The compressor will inflate the clockwise until it is tight. tire with air only. 6. Plug the power plug (H) into the 10. Inflate the tire to the accessory power outlet in the recommended inflation pressure vehicle. Unplug all items using the pressure gage (C). from other accessory power The recommended inflation outlets. See Accessory Power pressure can be found on the Outlet(s) on page 3-17. Tire and Loading Information Always do a safety check first. See If the vehicle has an accessory label. See Inflation - Tire If a Tire Goes Flat on page 5-61. power outlet, do not use the Pressure on page 5-45. 1. Remove the tire sealant and cigarette lighter. The pressure gage (C) may compressor kit from its storage If the vehicle only has a cigarette read higher than the actual tire location. See Tire Sealant lighter, use the cigarette lighter. pressure while the compressor and Compressor Kit Storage on Do not pinch the power plug is on. Turn the compressor page 5-70. cord in the door or window. off to get an accurate reading. The compressor may be 2. Unwrap the air only hose (G) 7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle and the power plug (H). turned on/off until the correct must be running while using pressure is reached. 3. Place the kit on the ground. the air compressor. Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to the ground so the hose will reach it. Service and Appearance Care 5-69

If you inflate the tire higher than 14. Replace the air only hose (G) Removal and Installation of the recommended pressure and the power plug (H) and the Sealant Canister you can adjust the excess cord back in its original location. To remove the sealant canister: pressure by pressing the 15. Place the equipment in the pressure deflation button (D), original storage location in the 1. Unwrap the sealant hose. if equipped, until the proper vehicle. 2. Press the canister release button. pressure reading is reached. This option is only functional 3. Pull up and remove the canister. when using the air only 4. Replace with a new canister hose (G). which is available from your 11. Press the on/off button (B) to dealer/retailer. turn the tire sealant and 5. Push the new canister into place. compressor kit off. Be careful while handling the tire sealant and compressor kit as it could be warm after usage. 12. Unplug the power plug (H) from the accessory power outlet in the vehicle. The tire sealant and compressor kit 13. Disconnect the air only hose (G) has an accessory adapter located from the tire valve stem, by in a compartment on the bottom turning it counterclockwise, and of its housing that may be used to replace the tire valve stem cap. inflate air mattresses, balls, etc. 5-70 Service and Appearance Care

Tire Sealant and 2. Press the two tabs on the quick release buckle to release the tire { CAUTION Compressor Kit Storage sealant and compressor kit strap. The tire sealant and compressor Changing a tire can be 3. Remove the sealant and dangerous. The vehicle can slip kit is located in the storage compressor kit from its tray. compartment on the driver side, off the jack and roll over or fall on at the rear of the vehicle. To store the tire sealant and you or other people. You and they compressor kit, reverse the steps. could be badly injured or even killed. Find a level place to Changing a Flat Tire change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving: If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly 1. Set the parking brake firmly. to a level place. Turn on the hazard 2. Put the shift lever in warning flashers. See Hazard P (Park). Warning Flashers on page 3-5. 3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while the vehicle is raised. 4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the vehicle. 1. Press down on the latch tab and pull the cover off to access the To be even more certain the storage compartment. vehicle will not move, you should put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed. That would be the tire, on the other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle. Service and Appearance Care 5-71

When the vehicle has a ﬂat tire (B), Removing the Spare Tire 2. Remove the wing bolt (B) by use the following example as a and Tools turning it counterclockwise guide to assist you in the placement 3. Push the jack (C) up out of the of wheel blocks (A). The tools needed to remove the holding bracket. spare tire are located in the storage compartment on the driver side, 4. Turn the jack on its side, with the at the rear of the vehicle. bottom facing toward you. 1. Open the jack storage 5. Pull the jack straight out, bottom compartment by pulling on the ﬁrst. latch tab, located toward the rear of the vehicle, and pulling the cover off.

A. Wheel Block B. Flat Tire

The following information explains how to use the jack and change a tire. The tools you will be using include the jack (A) and lug wrench (B). A. Tool Bag B. Wing Bolt C. Jack 5-72 Service and Appearance Care

Removing the Spare Tire D. Hoist Shaft 4. Turn the lug wrench counterclockwise to lower The compact spare tire is located E. Compact Spare Tire the spare tire to the ground. under the vehicle, in front of the rear F. Retainer Continue turning the wrench bumper. See Compact Spare Tire G. Hoist Shaft Assembly until the spare tire can be pulled on page 5-83 for more information out from under the vehicle. about the compact spare. 1. Open the storage compartment door of the convenience center that is nearest the liftgate and remove the cap on the bottom of the storage compartment. 2. Open the carpet cutout that is located through the hole of the storage compartment. 3. Attach the lug wrench into the hoist shaft.

A. Rear Convenience Center B. Lug Wrench C. Storage Compartment Cap Hole Service and Appearance Care 5-73

3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench counterclockwise three or four turns. 4. If the spare tire has not lowered, tighten the cable all the way and then loosen it at least two times. If the spare tire did lower to the ground, continue with Step 5 under “Removing the Spare Tire (Vehicles with the Rear Convenience Center)” listed previously. 5. Tilt the retainer and slip it through If the spare tire will not lower, the 5. If you still cannot lower the spare the wheel opening to remove the secondary latch could be engaged. tire to the ground, see Secondary spare tire from the cable. Do the following to check the cable: Latch System on page 5-78. 6. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the cable back up after 1. Check under the vehicle to see if removing the spare tire. the cable is visible. Do not store a full-size or a flat 2. If it is not visible, see Secondary road tire under the vehicle. Latch System on page 5-78. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire If it is visible, first try to tighten the and Tools on page 5-80. cable by turning the lug wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks To continue changing the flat tire, or feel it skip twice. You cannot see Removing the Flat Tire and over-tighten the cable. Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-74. 5-74 Service and Appearance Care

Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70 for more information. 2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover, loosen the plastic nut caps with the wheel wrench. They will not come off. Then, using the flat end of the wheel wrench, pry 3. Loosen the wheel nuts — but do 4. To identify the appropriate along the edge of the cover until not remove them — using the jacking location, find the it comes off. Be careful; the lug wrench. For wheels with triangle (A) about 12 inches edges may be sharp. Do not try a wheel lock key, use the wheel (30.5 cm) from the front tire to remove the cover with your lock key between the lock nut or (B) about 10.5 inches (27 cm) bare hands. and lug wrench. The key is from the rear tire. Store the wheel cover securely in supplied in the front passenger door pocket. The triangle is located near each the rear of the vehicle until you wheel on the vehicle’s exterior. have the flat tire repaired or Notice: If this vehicle has wheel replaced. locks and an impact wrench is If the vehicle has aluminum used to remove the wheel nuts, wheels, remove the wheel nut the lock nut or wheel lock key caps using the wheel wrench. could be damaged. Do not use an impact wrench to remove the wheel nuts if this vehicle has wheel locks. Service and Appearance Care 5-75

Notice: If a jack is used to raise the vehicle without positioning it { CAUTION correctly, the vehicle could be damaged. When raising the Raising your vehicle with the jack vehicle on a jack, avoid contact improperly positioned can damage with the rear axle control arms. the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid 5. Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put the compact spare tire near you. personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to ﬁt the jack lift head into the proper location { CAUTION before raising the vehicle.

Getting under a vehicle when it is 6. Attach the lug wrench to the jacked up is dangerous. If the jack, and turn the wrench 7. Place the jack under the vehicle vehicle slips off the jack, you clockwise to raise the jack head as identified in Step 3. Raise the could be badly injured or killed. 3 inches (7.6 cm). vehicle by turning the lug wrench Never get under a vehicle when it clockwise in the jack. Raise the is supported only by a jack. vehicle far enough off the ground so that there is enough room for the spare tire to fit under the wheel well. 8. Remove all the wheel nuts and the flat tire. 5-76 Service and Appearance Care

{ CAUTION { CAUTION

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the Never use oil or grease on bolts parts to which it is fastened, can or nuts because the nuts might make wheel nuts become loose come loose. The vehicle’s wheel after time. The wheel could come could fall off, causing a crash. off and cause an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any 10. Remove any rust or dirt from rust or dirt from places where the the wheel bolts, mounting wheel attaches to the vehicle. In surfaces, and spare wheel. an emergency, use a cloth or a 11. Place the spare tire on the paper towel to do this; but be sure wheel mounting surface. 9. Remove the plastic spare tire to use a scraper or wire brush heat shield by pulling the rubber later, if needed, to get all the rust 12. Put the nuts on by hand by latch. Store the plastic spare tire or dirt off. See Changing a Flat turning the clockwise until heat shield. See Storing a Flat Tire on page 5-70. the wheel is held against the or Spare Tire and Tools on mounting surface. Make page 5-80 for more information. sure the rounded end is toward the wheel. 13. Lower the vehicle by attaching the lug wrench to the jack and turning the wrench counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely. Service and Appearance Care 5-77

Notice: Improperly tightened { CAUTION wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To Wheel nuts that are improperly or avoid expensive brake repairs, incorrectly tightened can cause evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the wheels to become loose or the proper sequence and to come off. The wheel nuts should the proper torque specification. be tightened with a torque wrench See Capacities and Specifications to the proper torque specification on page 5-98 for the wheel nut after replacing. Follow the torque torque specification. specification supplied by the aftermarket manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel nuts. See Capacities and 14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a Specifications on page 5-98 for crisscross sequence, as shown. original equipment wheel nut Notice: Wheel covers will not fit torque specifications. on your vehicle’s compact spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact spare, the cover or the spare could be damaged. 5-78 Service and Appearance Care

Secondary Latch System To release the spare tire from the secondary latch: This vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist assembly that has a secondary latch system. It is { CAUTION designed to stop the compact spare tire from suddenly falling off the Someone standing too close vehicle if the cable holding the spare during the procedure could be tire is damaged. For the secondary injured by the jack. If the spare latch to work, the tire must be tire does not slide off the jack stowed with the valve stem pointing completely, make sure no one is down. See Storing a Flat or behind you or on either side of Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-80 you as you pull the jack out from for instructions on storing the under the spare. All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle shown spare tire correctly. 2. Turn the lug wrench 1. If the cable is not visible, start counterclockwise until { CAUTION this procedure at Step 3. approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed. Before beginning this procedure 3. Attach the lug wrench to the jack read all the instructions. Failure to and raise the jack at least read and follow the instructions 10 turns. could damage the hoist assembly and you and others could get 4. Place the jack under the hurt. Read and follow the vehicle, ahead of the rear instructions listed next. bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire. Service and Appearance Care 5-79

5. Turn the lug wrench clockwise to 9. Tilt the retainer and slip it through raise the jack until it lifts the the wheel opening when the secondary latch spring. spare tire has been completely 6. Keep raising the jack until the lowered. spare tire stops moving upward 10. Turn the lug wrench clockwise and is held ﬁrmly in place. to raise the cable back up if the This lets you know that the cable is hanging. secondary latch has released Have the hoist shaft assembly and the spare tire is balancing on inspected as soon as you can. You the jack. will not be able to store a spare tire using the hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced. 8. Disconnect the lug wrench from the jack and carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push against the spare tire while ﬁrmly pulling the jack out from under the spare tire with the other hand.

7. Lower the jack by turning the lug wrench counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides off the jack. 5-80 Service and Appearance Care

Storing a Flat or Spare 3. Slide the cable retainer through { CAUTION the center of the wheel and start Tire and Tools to raise the compact spare tire. Storing a jack, a tire, or other Storing the Spare Tire Make sure the retainer is fully equipment in the passenger seated across the underside of compartment of the vehicle could the wheel. { CAUTION cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could 4. When the compact spare tire is The underbody-mounted spare tire strike someone. Store all these in almost in the stored position, needs to be stored with the valve the proper place. turn the tire so the valve is stem pointing down. If the spare toward the rear of the vehicle. tire is stored with the valve stem To store the spare tire: This position helps when pointing upwards, the secondary checking the air pressure in latch will not work properly and 1. Lay the compact spare tire near the compact spare tire. the spare tire could loosen and the rear of the vehicle with the 5. Raise the tire fully against the suddenly fall from the vehicle. valve stem down. underside of the vehicle. Continue If this happened when the vehicle 2. Reinstall the plastic spare tire turning the lug wrench until you was being driven, the tire might heat shield on the compact feel more than two clicks. This contact a person or another spare tire. indicates that the compact spare vehicle, causing injury and tire is secure and the cable is damage to itself. Be sure the tight. The spare tire hoist cannot underbody-mounted spare tire be overtightened. is stored with the valve stem pointing down. Service and Appearance Care 5-81

Storing the Flat Tire 1. Remove the cable package from the jack storage area. 2. Remove the small center cap by tapping the back of the cap with the extension of the shaft, if the vehicle has aluminum wheels. 3. Put the ﬂat tire in the rear storage area with the valve stem pointing toward the rear of the vehicle.

6. Make sure the tire is stored 5. Hook the cable onto the outside securely. Push, pull (A), and then portion of the liftgate hinges (B). try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire 6. Hook the other end of the cable moves, use the lug wrench to onto the outside portion of the tighten the cable. liftgate hinge (A). 7. Pull on the cable to make sure it is secure.

4. Pull the cable (A) through the door striker (E), the center of the wheel (D), and the plastic spare tire heat shield (C), as shown. 5-82 Service and Appearance Care

Storing the Tools Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack storage compartment and put the compartment cover back on. 1. Ensure that the bottom of the jack is facing toward you. 2. Turn the jack (C) on its side and place down on the holding bracket. 3. Reinstall the wing bolt (B) by turning clockwise. 8. Make sure the metal tube is 4. To replace the cover, line up the tab at the front of the cover with centered at the striker. Push A. Tool Bag the tube toward the front of the the notch in the cover opening. vehicle. B. Wing Bolt Push the cover in place and make C. Jack sure that the rear clips are in the 9. Close the liftgate and make sure slots and push the cover closed. it is latched properly. Store the center cap or the plastic bolt-on wheel covers until a full size tire is put back on the vehicle. When you replace the compact spare with a full-size tire, reinstall the bolt-on wheel covers or the center cap. Hand-tighten them over the wheel nuts, using the lug wrench. Service and Appearance Care 5-83

Compact Spare Tire is made to perform well at speeds up And do not mix the compact spare to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances tire or wheel with other wheels { up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you or tires. They will not fit. Keep the CAUTION can finish your trip and have the spare tire and its wheel together. full-size tire repaired or replaced at The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Driving with more than one your convenience. Of course, it is system will be automatically disabled compact spare tire at a time could best to replace the spare with a when you use the compact spare. result in loss of braking and full-size tire as soon as possible. To restore the AWD and prevent handling. This could lead to a The spare tire will last longer and excessive wear on the clutch in your crash and you or others could be be in good shape in case it is needed AWD, replace the compact spare injured. Use only one compact again. spare tire at a time. tire with a full-size tire as soon as Notice: When the compact spare possible. is installed, do not take the vehicle The compact spare tire, if the Notice: Tire chains will not fit the through an automatic car wash vehicle has one, was fully inflated compact spare. Using them can with guide rails. The compact when the vehicle was new, however, damage the vehicle and can spare can get caught on the rails it can lose air after a time. Check damage the chains too. Do not use which can damage the tire, wheel the inflation pressure regularly. tire chains on the compact spare. and other parts of the vehicle. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa). Do not use the compact spare on After installing the compact spare on other vehicles. the vehicle, stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare 5-84 Service and Appearance Care

Appearance Care When cleaning the vehicle’s Many cleaners contain solvents that interior, only use cleaners speciﬁcally may become concentrated in the designed for the surfaces being vehicle’s breathing space. Before Interior Cleaning cleaned. Permanent damage may using cleaners, read and adhere to The vehicle’s interior will continue result from using cleaners on all safety instructions on the label. to look its best if it is cleaned often. surfaces for which they were not While cleaning the vehicle’s interior, Although not always visible, dust intended. Use glass cleaner only on maintain adequate ventilation by and dirt can accumulate on the glass. Remove any accidental opening the vehicle’s doors and upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, over-spray from other surfaces windows. immediately. To prevent over-spray, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Dust may be removed from small apply cleaner directly to the cleaning Regular vacuuming is recommended buttons and knobs using a small cloth. to remove particles from the brush with soft bristles. upholstery. It is important to keep Notice: Using abrasive cleaners the upholstery from becoming and Products that remove odors from the when cleaning glass surfaces on remaining heavily soiled. Soils vehicle’s upholstery and clean the the vehicle, could scratch the should be removed as quickly as vehicle’s glass can be obtained from glass and/or cause damage to the possible. The vehicle’s interior may your dealer/retailer. rear window defogger. When experience extremes of heat that cleaning the glass on the vehicle, could cause stains to set rapidly. use only a soft cloth and glass Lighter colored interiors may cleaner. require more frequent cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer color to the vehicle’s interior. Service and Appearance Care 5-85

Do not clean the vehicle using: Fabric/Carpet 3. Start on the outside edge of the • A knife or any other sharp object soil and gently rub toward the Use a vacuum cleaner with a center. Continue cleaning, using to remove a soil from any interior soft brush attachment frequently surface. a clean area of the cloth each to remove dust and loose dirt. time it becomes soiled. • A stiff brush. It can cause damage A canister vacuum with a beater bar to the vehicle’s interior surfaces. in the nozzle may only be used on 4. Continue to gently rub the soiled floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. area until the cleaning cloth • Heavy pressure or aggressive For any soil, always try to remove it remains clean. rubbing with a cleaning cloth. Use first with plain water or club soda. of heavy pressure can damage 5. If the soil is not completely Before cleaning, gently remove as the interior and does not improve removed, use a mild soap much of the soil as possible using the effectiveness of soil removal. solution and repeat the cleaning one of the following techniques: process that was used with plain • Laundry detergents or • For liquids: gently blot the water. dishwashing soaps with remaining soil with a paper towel. degreasers can leave residue If any of the soil remains, a Allow the soil to absorb into the that streaks and attracts dirt. commercial fabric cleaner or spot paper towel until no more can be For liquid cleaners, about lifter may be necessary. When a removed. 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) commercial upholstery cleaner or of water is a good guide. Use • For solid dry soils: remove as spot lifter is to be used, test a small only mild, neutral-pH soaps. much as possible and then hidden area for colorfastness first. vacuum. If the locally cleaned area gives any • Too much cleaner that saturates impression that a ring formation may the upholstery. To clean: result, clean the entire surface. • Organic solvents such as naptha, 1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white After the cleaning process has been alcohol, etc. that can damage the cloth with water or club soda. completed, a paper towel can be vehicle’s interior. 2. Wring the cloth to remove excess used to blot excess moisture moisture. from the fabric or carpet. 5-86 Service and Appearance Care

Leather Instrument Panel, Vinyl, Some commercial products may and Other Plastic increase gloss on the instrument A soft cloth dampened with panel. The increase in gloss may water can be used to remove dust. Surfaces cause annoying reﬂections in the If a more thorough cleaning is A soft cloth dampened with water windshield and even make it difficult necessary, a soft cloth dampened may be used to remove dust. to see through the windshield under with a mild soap solution can be If a more thorough cleaning is certain conditions. used. Allow the leather to dry necessary, a clean soft cloth naturally. Do not use heat to dry. dampened with a mild soap solution Never use steam to clean leather. Care of Safety Belts can be used to gently remove Never use spot lifters or spot Keep belts clean and dry. dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters removers on leather. Many or removers on plastic surfaces. commercial leather cleaners Many commercial cleaners { CAUTION and coatings that are sold to and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect leather may preserve and protect soft plastic Do not bleach or dye safety belts. permanently change the appearance surfaces may permanently change It may severely weaken them. and feel of the leather and are not the appearance and feel of the In a crash, they might not be able recommended. Do not use silicone interior and are not recommended. to provide adequate protection. or wax-based products, or those Do not use silicone or wax-based containing organic solvents to clean Clean safety belts only with mild products, or those containing the vehicle’s interior because they soap and lukewarm water. organic solvents to clean the can alter the appearance by vehicle’s interior because they can increasing the gloss in a non-uniform alter the appearance by increasing manner. Never use shoe polish on the gloss in a non-uniform manner. leather. Service and Appearance Care 5-87

Weatherstrips Do not wash the vehicle in direct High pressure car washes may sunlight. Use a car washing soap. cause water to enter the vehicle. Silicone grease on weatherstrips will Do not use cleaning agents that are Avoid using high pressure washes make them last longer, seal better, petroleum based or that contain acid closer than 12 inches (30 cm) and not stick or squeak. Apply or abrasives, as they can damage to the surface of the vehicle. silicone grease with a clean cloth. the paint, metal or plastic on the Use of power washers exceeding During very cold, damp weather vehicle. Approved cleaning products 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result frequent application may be required. can be obtained from your dealer/ in damage or removal of paint and See Recommended Fluids and retailer. Follow all manufacturers’ decals. Lubricants on page 6-12. directions regarding correct product usage, necessary safety precautions Cleaning Exterior Washing Your Vehicle and appropriate disposal of any Lamps/Lenses The best way to preserve the vehicle care product. Use only lukewarm or cold water, a vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by Rinse the vehicle well, before soft cloth and a car washing soap to washing it often. washing and after to remove all clean exterior lamps and lenses. cleaning agents completely. If they Notice: Certain cleaners contain Follow instructions under Washing are allowed to dry on the surface, chemicals that can damage the Your Vehicle on page 5-87. they could stain. emblems or nameplates on the vehicle. Check the cleaning Dry the finish with a soft, clean Finish Care product label. If it states that it chamois or an all-cotton towel to should not be used on plastic avoid surface scratches and Occasional waxing or mild polishing parts, do not use it on the vehicle water spotting. of the vehicle by hand may be or damage may occur and it would necessary to remove residue from not be covered by the warranty. the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer/retailer. 5-88 Service and Appearance Care

If the vehicle has a basecoat/ Exterior painted surfaces are Windshield, Backglass, clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat subject to aging, weather and gives more depth and gloss to the chemical fallout that can take and Wiper Blades colored basecoat. Always use waxes their toll over a period of years. Clean the outside of the windshield and polishes that are non-abrasive To help keep the paint finish looking and backglass with glass cleaner. and made for a basecoat/clearcoat new, keep the vehicle garaged or Clean the rubber blades using a lint paint finish. covered whenever possible. free cloth or paper towel soaked with Notice: Machine compounding Protecting Exterior Bright Metal windshield washer fluid or a mild or aggressive polishing on a Parts detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when you clean the basecoat/clearcoat paint finish Bright metal parts should be cleaned blades. Bugs, road grime, sap and may damage it. Use only regularly to keep their luster. a buildup of vehicle wash/wax non-abrasive waxes and polishes Washing with water is all that is treatments may cause wiper that are made for a basecoat/ usually needed. However, chrome streaking. Replace the wiper blades clearcoat paint finish on the polish may be used on chrome or if they are worn or damaged. vehicle. stainless steel trim, if necessary. Wipers can be damaged by: Foreign materials such as calcium Use special care with aluminum trim. chloride and other salts, ice melting To avoid damaging protective trim, • Extreme dusty conditions agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, never use auto or chrome polish, • Sand and salt bird droppings, chemicals from steam or caustic soap to clean industrial chimneys, etc., can aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed • Heat and sun damage the vehicle’s finish if they to high polish, is recommended for • Snow and ice, without proper remain on painted surfaces. Wash all bright metal parts. removal the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter. Service and Appearance Care 5-89

Aluminum or Notice: Using strong soaps, Notice: Using chrome polish on Chrome-Plated Wheels chemicals, abrasive polishes, aluminum wheels could damage cleaners, brushes, or cleaners the wheels. The repairs would and Trim that contain acid on aluminum or not be covered by the vehicle The vehicle may have either chrome-plated wheels, could warranty. Use chrome polish on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. damage the surface of the chrome wheels only. wheel(s). The repairs would not Use chrome polish only on Keep the wheels clean using a soft be covered by the vehicle chrome-plated wheels, but avoid clean cloth with mild soap and water. warranty. Use only approved any painted surface of the wheel, Rinse with clean water. After rinsing cleaners on aluminum or and buff off immediately after thoroughly, dry with a soft clean chrome-plated wheels. towel. A wax may then be applied. application. The surface of these wheels is Notice: Chrome wheels and similar to the painted surface of the Notice: Driving the vehicle other chrome trim may be vehicle. Do not use strong soaps, through an automatic car wash damaged if the vehicle is not chemicals, abrasive polishes, that has silicone carbide tire washed after driving on roads abrasive cleaners, cleaners with cleaning brushes, could damage that have been sprayed with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes the aluminum or chrome-plated magnesium, calcium or sodium on them because they could damage wheels. The repairs would not be chloride. These chlorides are the surface. Do not use chrome covered by the vehicle warranty. used on roads for conditions polish on aluminum wheels. Never drive a vehicle that has such as ice and dust. Always aluminum or chrome-plated wash the vehicle’s chrome with wheels through an automatic car soap and water after exposure. wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. 5-90 Service and Appearance Care

Tires Finish Damage At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody To clean the tires, use a stiff brush Any stone chips, fractures or deep with plain water. Clean any areas with tire cleaner. scratches in the finish should be where mud and debris can collect. repaired right away. Bare metal will Notice: Using petroleum-based Dirt packed in close areas of corrode quickly and may develop into the frame should be loosened before tire dressing products on the major repair expense. vehicle may damage the paint being flushed. Your dealer/retailer finish and/or tires. When applying Minor chips and scratches can be or an underbody car washing a tire dressing, always wipe off repaired with touch-up materials system can do this. any overspray from all painted available from your dealer/retailer. surfaces on the vehicle. Larger areas of finish damage can be Chemical Paint Spotting corrected in your dealer’s/retailer’s Some weather and atmospheric body and paint shop. Sheet Metal Damage conditions can create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall If the vehicle is damaged and Underbody Maintenance requires sheet metal repair or upon and attack painted surfaces on replacement, make sure the body Chemicals used for ice and snow the vehicle. This damage can take repair shop applies anti-corrosion removal and dust control can collect two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped material to parts repaired or replaced on the underbody. If these are not discolorations, and small, irregular to restore corrosion protection. removed, corrosion and rust can dark spots etched into the paint develop on the underbody parts such surface. Original manufacturer replacement as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and parts will provide the corrosion Although no defect in the paint job exhaust system even though they causes this, we will repair, at no protection while maintaining have corrosion protection. the vehicle warranty. charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first. Service and Appearance Care 5-91

Vehicle Identification Service Parts Electrical System Identification Label Vehicle Identification This label is on the inside of the High Voltage Devices and Number (VIN) glove box. It is very helpful if parts Wiring need to be ordered. The label has the following information: { CAUTION • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Exposure to high voltage can cause shock, burns, and even This is the legal identifier for the • Model designation vehicle. It appears on a plate in the death. The high voltage systems front corner of the instrument panel, • Paint information in your vehicle can only be on the driver side. It can be seen • Production options and special serviced by technicians with through the windshield from outside equipment special training. the vehicle. The VIN also appears on High voltage devices are identified the Vehicle Certification and Service Do not remove this label from the vehicle. by labels. Do not remove, open, Parts labels and the certificates of take apart, or modify these title and registration. devices. High voltage cable or Engine Identification wiring has orange covering. Do not probe, tamper with, cut, or modify The eighth character in the VIN is the high voltage cable or wiring. engine code. This code helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications, and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications” under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-98 for the vehicle’s engine code. 5-92 Service and Appearance Care

Add-On Electrical Windshield Wiper Fuses Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken The windshield wiper motor is Equipment or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure protected by a circuit breaker and a you replace a bad fuse with a new Notice: Do not add anything fuse. If the motor overheats due to one of the identical size and rating. electrical to the vehicle unless you heavy snow or ice, the wiper will stop check with your dealer/retailer until the motor cools. If the overload Fuses of the same amperage can be first. Some electrical equipment is caused by some electrical temporarily borrowed from another can damage the vehicle and the problem, have it fixed. fuse location, if a fuse goes out. damage would not be covered by Replace the fuse as soon as the vehicle’s warranty. Some you can. add-on electrical equipment can Power Windows and Other Power Options keep other components from Instrument Panel Fuse working as they should. Circuit breakers in the fuse block Block Add-on equipment can drain the protect the power windows and vehicle’s battery, even if the vehicle other power accessories. When the The instrument panel fuse block is is not operating. current load is too heavy, the located under the instrument panel circuit breaker opens and closes, on the passenger side of the vehicle. The vehicle has an airbag system. protecting the circuit until the Pull down on the cover to access the Before attempting to add anything problem is fixed or goes away. fuse block. electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Fuses and Circuit Vehicle on page 1-60. Breakers The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by electrical problems. Service and Appearance Care 5-93

Fuses Usage Fuses Usage AIRBAG Airbag IADV/PWR/ Inadvertent AMP Ampliﬁer LED Power LED BCK/UP/ Back-up INFOTMNT Infotainment STOP Lamp/Stoplamp LT/TRN/SIG Driver Side Turn Body Control Signal BCM Module Memory Seat MSM Module CNSTR/ Canister Vent VENT PDM Power Mirrors, CTSY Courtesy Liftgate Release DR/LCK Door Locks PWR Power Mode MODE Daytime Running DRL Lamps PWR/MIR Power Mirrors GMC HID RDO Radio DRL 2 Only/Rear Fog REAR WPR Rear Wiper Lamps-China Only RT/TRN/SIG Passenger Side DSPLY Display Turn Signal SPARE Spare FRT/WSW Front Windshield Washer SPARE Spare HTD/COOL Heated/Cooling STR/WHL/ Steering Wheel SEAT Seats ILLUM Illumination Heating, Ventilation HVAC and Air Conditioning Fuse Side 5-94 Service and Appearance Care

Relays Usage Underhood Fuse Block PWR/ Power Windows The underhood fuse block is located WNDW Relay in the engine compartment, on PWR/ Power Steering the passenger side of the vehicle. COLUMN Column Relay L/GATE Liftgate Relay LCK Power Lock Relay Rear Window REAR/WSW Washer Relay UNLCK Power Unlock Relay Daytime Running DRL2 Lamps 2 Relay Driver Side Unlock LT/UNLCK Relay Daytime Running DRL Lamps Relay Relay Side SPARE Spare Lift the cover for access to the Front Windshield fuse/relay block. Relays Usage FRT/WSW Washer Relay Notice: Spilling liquid on any LT/PWR/ Driver Side Power electrical components on the SEAT Seat Relay vehicle may damage it. Always RT/PWR/ Passenger Side keep the covers on any electrical SEAT Power Seat Relay component. To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index ﬁnger and pull straight out. Service and Appearance Care 5-95

Fuses Usage All-Wheel-Drive AWD System BATT 1 Battery 1 BATT 2 Battery 2 BATT 3 Battery 3 Engine Control ECM Module Engine Control ECM 1 Module 1 EMISSION 1 Emission 1 EMISSION 2 Emission 2 EVEN Even Injector Coils COILS FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2 Fuses Usage Fuses Usage FOG LAMP Fog Lamps A/C Air Conditioning AIRBAG Airbag System Fuel System Control CLUTCH Clutch FSCM AUX Auxiliary Power Module Antilock Braking POWER HORN Horn ABS MTR System (ABS) Motor AUX VAC Auxiliary Vacuum Heated Windshield Adaptive Forward PUMP Pump HTD WASH Washer Fluid AFS Lighting System 5-96 Service and Appearance Care

Fuses Usage Fuses Usage Fuses Usage HTD MIR Heated Outside REAR Stop Lamps Rearview Mirror CAMERA Rear Camera (China Stop Lamps Only) (China Only) HVAC Heating, Ventilation Rear Accessory and Air Conditioning RR APO Power Outlet STRTR Starter BLWR Blower RR DEFOG Rear Defogger TCM Transmission LT HI Left High-Beam Rear Climate Control Module BEAM Headlamp RR HVAC Control System TRANS Transmission LT LO Left Low-Beam RT HI Right High-Beam TRLR Trailer Back-up BEAM Headlamp BEAM Headlamp BCK/UP Lamps LT PRK Left Parking Lamp RT LO Right Low-Beam TRLR BRK Trailer Brake LT TRLR Trailer Left BEAM Headlamp TRLR PRK Trailer Parking Stoplamp and Turn RT PRK Right Parking Lamp LAMP Lamps STOP/TRN Signal Trailer Right TRLR PWR Trailer Power ODD RT TRLR Stoplamp and Turn COILS Odd Injector Coils STOP/TRN Windshield Signal WPR/WSW Wiper/Washer PCM IGN Powertrain Control Regulated Voltage Module Ignition RVC SNSR Control Sensor PWR Power Liftgate S/ROOF/ L/GATE SUNSHADE Sunroof PWR SPARE Spare OUTLET Power Outlet Service and Appearance Care 5-97

Relays Usage Relays Usage A/C LT TRLR Trailer Left CMPRSR Air Conditioning Stoplamp and Turn CLTCH Compressor Clutch STOP/TRN Signal Lamp AUX VAC Auxiliary Vacuum PRK LAMP Park Lamp PUMP Pump PWR/TRN Powertrain CRNK Switched Power RR DEFOG Rear Window FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1 Defogger FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2 RT TRLR Trailer Right FAN 3 Cooling Fan 3 Stoplamp and Turn STOP/TRN Signal Lamp FOG LAMP Fog Lamps Stop Lamps High-Beam Stop Lamps HI BEAM (China (China Only) Headlamps Only) High Intensity TRLR Trailer Back-up HID/LO Discharge (HID) BCK/UP Lamps BEAM Low-Beam Headlamps WPR Windshield Wiper HORN Horn Windshield Wiper WPR HI High Speed IGN Ignition Main 5-98 Service and Appearance Care

Capacities and Speciﬁcations The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-12 for more information.

Capacities Application English Metric For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount, see the refrigerant caution label located Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more information. Cooling System 11.4 qt 10.8 L Engine Oil with Filter 5.5 qt 5.2 L Fuel Tank 22.0 gal 83.3 L Transmission Fluid* 5.3 qt 5.0 L Wheel Nut Torque 140 lb ft 190 Y *See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 5-18 for information on checking fluid level. All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Speciﬁcations Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap 3.6L V6 Engine D Automatic 0.043 in (1.10 mm) Maintenance Schedule 6-1

Maintenance Maintenance Your Vehicle and the Schedule Schedule Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only Introduction helps to keep the vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the Important: Keep engine oil at the environment. All recommended Maintenance Schedule proper level and change as maintenance is important. Improper Introduction ...... 6-1 recommended. vehicle maintenance can even affect Maintenance Requirements .....6-1 the quality of the air we breathe. Your Vehicle and the Maintenance Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire Environment ...... 6-1 Using the Maintenance Requirements inflation can increase the level of emissions from the vehicle. To help Schedule ...... 6-2 Notice: Maintenance intervals, ...... 6-3 protect the environment, and to keep Scheduled Maintenance checks, inspections, replacement Additional Required Services ....6-6 the vehicle in good condition, be sure Maintenance Footnotes ...... 6-7 parts, and recommended fluids to maintain the vehicle properly. Owner Checks and Services ....6-9 and lubricants as prescribed in At Each Fuel Fill ...... 6-9 this manual are necessary to At Least Once a Month ...... 6-10 keep this vehicle in good working At Least Once a Year ...... 6-10 condition. Any damage caused Recommended Fluids and by failure to follow scheduled Lubricants ...... 6-12 maintenance might not be covered Maintenance by the vehicle warranty. Replacement Parts ...... 6-14 Engine Drive Belt Routing .....6-15 Maintenance Record ...... 6-16 6-2 Maintenance Schedule

Using the Maintenance This schedule is for vehicles that: { CAUTION Schedule • carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits on We want to help keep this vehicle in Performing maintenance work on the Tire and Loading Information a vehicle can be dangerous. In good working condition. But we do label. See Loading the Vehicle on trying to do some jobs, you can not know exactly how you will drive it. page 4-18. You might drive very short distances be seriously injured. Do your own only a few times a week. Or you • are driven on reasonable road maintenance work only if you might drive long distances all the surfaces within legal driving limits. have the required know-how and time in very hot, dusty weather. • use the recommended fuel. See the proper tools and equipment You might use the vehicle in making Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. for the job. If you have any doubt, deliveries. Or you might drive it to see your dealer/retailer to have a The services in Scheduled work, to do errands, or in many qualiﬁed technician do the work. Maintenance on page 6-3 should other ways. See Doing Your Own Service be performed when indicated. Work on page 5-4. Because of all the different See Additional Required Services ways people use their vehicles, on page 6-6 and Maintenance maintenance needs vary. You might Footnotes on page 6-7 for further Some maintenance services can need more frequent checks and information. be complex. So, unless you are replacements. So please read the technically qualiﬁed and have the following and note how you drive. necessary equipment, have your If you have any questions on how to dealer/retailer do these jobs. keep the vehicle in good condition, When you go to your dealer/retailer see your dealer/retailer. for service, trained and supported service technicians will perform the work using genuine parts. Maintenance Schedule 6-3

To purchase service information, Scheduled Maintenance If the engine oil life system is ever see Service Publications Ordering reset accidentally, service the vehicle Information on page 7-15. When the CHANGE ENGINE within 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since OIL SOON message displays, the last service. Remember to reset Owner Checks and Services on service is required for the vehicle. the oil life system whenever the oil page 6-9 tells what should be Have the vehicle serviced as is changed. See Engine Oil Life checked, when to check it, and what soon as possible within the next System on page 5-15 for information can easily be done to help keep 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible on the Engine Oil Life System and the vehicle in good condition. that, if driving under the best resetting the system. The proper replacement parts, conditions, the engine oil life system When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL fluids, and lubricants to use might not indicate that vehicle SOON message appears, certain are listed in Recommended Fluids service is necessary for over a year. services, checks, and inspections and Lubricants on page 6-12 However, the engine oil and filter are required. Required services and Maintenance Replacement must be changed at least once are described in the following Parts on page 6-14. When the a year and at this time the system for “Maintenance I” and vehicle is serviced, make sure these must be reset. Your dealer/retailer “Maintenance II.” Generally, it is are used. All parts should be has trained service technicians recommended that the first service replaced and all necessary repairs who will perform this work using be Maintenance I, the second done before you or anyone else genuine parts and reset the system. service be Maintenance II, and then drives the vehicle. We recommend alternate Maintenance I and the use of genuine parts from Maintenance II thereafter. However, your dealer/retailer. in some cases, Maintenance II may be required more often. 6-4 Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance I —Use Maintenance II —Use message displays 10 months or Maintenance I if the CHANGE Maintenance II if the previous more since the last service or if the ENGINE OIL SOON message service performed was message has not come on at all for displays within 10 months since the Maintenance I. Always use one year. vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II whenever the Maintenance II was performed. Scheduled Maintenance Service Maintenance I Maintenance II Change engine oil and ﬁlter. See Engine Oil on page 5-13. Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-15. An Emission Control •• Service. Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g). ••

Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air • Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17. See footnote (l). Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-52 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month •• on page 6-10. Maintenance Schedule 6-5

Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d) Service Maintenance I Maintenance II Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). ••

Check engine coolant and windshield washer ﬂuid levels and add ﬂuid as •• needed.

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in •• this section. Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). • Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). • Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). • Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). • Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). • Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j). • 6-6 Maintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles (kilometers) shown for each item. Additional Required Services 25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000 Service and Miles (Kilometers) (40 000) (80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000) Inspect fuel system for damage or • ••••• leaks. Inspect exhaust system for loose or • ••••• damaged components. Replace engine air cleaner filter. See ••• Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-17. Change automatic transmission fluid ••• (severe service). See footnote (h). Change automatic transmission fluid • (normal service). All-wheel-drive vehicles: Change transfer case fluid (severe service). ••• See footnote (m). All-wheel-drive vehicles: Change • transfer case fluid (normal service). Maintenance Schedule 6-7

Additional Required Services (cont’d) 25,000 50,000 75,000 100,000 125,000 150,000 Service and Miles (Kilometers) (40 000) (80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000) Replace spark plugs and inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control • Service. Engine cooling system service (or every ﬁve years, whichever occurs • ﬁrst). An Emission Control Service. See footnote (i). Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission Control Service. • See footnote (k).

Maintenance Footnotes (b) Visually inspect front and rear (c) Visually inspect hoses and have suspension and steering system for them replaced if they are cracked, (a) Visually inspect brake lines and damaged, loose, or missing parts swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all hoses for proper hook-up, binding, or signs of wear. Inspect power pipes, fittings and clamps; replace leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect steering lines and hoses for proper with genuine parts as needed. disc brake pads for wear and rotors hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, To help ensure proper operation, a for surface condition. Inspect other chafing, etc. pressure test of the cooling system brake parts, including calipers, and pressure cap and cleaning parking brake, etc. Check parking the outside of the radiator and brake adjustment. air conditioning condenser is recommended at least once a year. 6-8 Maintenance Schedule

(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, (f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, (h) Change automatic transmission cracking, or contamination. Clean hood latch assemblies, secondary fluid if the vehicle is mainly driven the windshield and wiper blades, latches, pivots, spring anchor under one or more of these if contaminated. Replace wiper and release pawl, hood and door conditions: blades that are worn or damaged. hinges, rear folding seats, and − In heavy city traffic where the See Windshield Wiper Blade liftgate hinges. More frequent outside temperature regularly Replacement on page 5-38 and lubrication may be required when reaches 90¡F (32¡C) or higher. Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper exposed to a corrosive environment. Blades on page 5-88 for more Applying silicone grease on − In hilly or mountainous terrain. information. weatherstrips with a clean cloth will − When doing frequent trailer make them last longer, seal towing. (e) Make sure the safety belt better, and not stick or squeak. reminder light and safety belt − Uses such as found in taxi, police, assemblies are working properly. (g) A fluid loss in any vehicle or delivery service. Look for any other loose or damaged system could indicate a problem. (i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling safety belt system parts. If you see Have the system inspected system. This service can be anything that might keep a safety belt and repaired and the fluid level complex; you should have your system from doing its job, have it checked. Add fluid if needed. dealer/retailer perform this service. repaired. Have any torn or frayed See Engine Coolant on page 5-19 for safety belts replaced. Also see what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean Checking the Restraint Systems radiator, condenser, pressure cap, on page 1-61. and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap. Maintenance Schedule 6-9

(j) Check system for interference or Owner Checks and Engine Oil Level Check binding and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed. Services Notice: It is important to check Replace any components that have These owner checks and services the engine oil regularly and keep it high effort or excessive wear. Do not should be performed at the intervals at the proper level. Failure to keep lubricate accelerator or cruise control specified to help ensure vehicle the engine oil at the proper level cables. safety, dependability, and emission can cause damage to the engine control performance. Your dealer/ not covered by the vehicle (k) Visually inspect belt for fraying, retailer can assist with these checks warranty. excessive cracks, or obvious and services. damage. Replace belt if necessary. Check the engine oil level and Be sure any necessary repairs are add the proper oil if necessary. (l) If driving regularly under dusty completed at once. Whenever any See Engine Oil on page 5-13. conditions, inspect the filter at each fluids or lubricants are added to the engine oil change. Engine Coolant Level Check vehicle, make sure they are the (m) Change transfer case fluid if the proper ones, as shown in Check the engine coolant level ® vehicle is mainly driven under Recommended Fluids and and add DEX-COOL coolant one or more of these conditions: Lubricants on page 6-12. mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant on page 5-19. − In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly At Each Fuel Fill Windshield Washer Fluid reaches 90¡F (32¡C) or higher. It is important to perform these Level Check − In hilly or mountainous terrain. underhood checks at each fuel fill. Check the windshield washer fluid − When doing frequent trailer level in the windshield washer towing. fluid reservoir and add the proper − Uses such as found in taxi, fluid if necessary. police, or delivery service. 6-10 Maintenance Schedule

At Least Once a Month At Least Once a Year Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check Tire Inflation Check Starter Switch Check Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make { CAUTION sure they are inflated to the { CAUTION correct pressures. Do not forget to When you are doing this check the spare tire, if the vehicle When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move has one. See Inflation - Tire inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, Pressure on page 5-45.Ifthe suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured. vehicle has a spare tire, check to you or others could be injured. make sure it is stored securely. See 1. Before starting this check, be Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70. 1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room sure there is enough room Tire Wear Inspection around the vehicle. It should be around the vehicle. parked on a level surface. Tire rotation may be required for 2. Firmly apply both the parking high mileage highway drivers prior to 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. brake and the regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-27. the Engine Oil Life System service See Parking Brake on page 2-27. notification. Check the tires for Be ready to apply the regular wear and, if necessary, rotate the Do not use the accelerator brake immediately if the vehicle tires. See Tire Inspection and pedal, and be ready to turn off begins to move. the engine immediately if it starts. Rotation on page 5-52. 3. With the engine off, turn the 3. Try to start the engine in ignition to ON/RUN, but do not each gear. The vehicle should start the engine. Without applying start only in P (Park) or the regular brake, try to move the N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts shift lever out of P (Park) with in any other position, contact normal effort. If the shift lever your dealer/retailer for service. moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer for service. Maintenance Schedule 6-11

Ignition Transmission Lock Parking Brake and Automatic • To check the P (Park) Check Transmission P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability: With the engine running, shift to While parked, and with the parking Mechanism Check P (Park). Then release the brake set, try to turn the ignition to parking brake followed by the LOCK/OFF in each shift lever { CAUTION regular brake. position. When you are doing this check, • The ignition should turn to Contact your dealer/retailer if the vehicle could begin to move. LOCK/OFF only when the shift service is required. lever is in P (Park). You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Underbody Flushing Service • The ignition key should come out Make sure there is room in front At least every spring, use plain water only in LOCK/OFF. of the vehicle in case it begins to to ﬂush any corrosive materials from Contact your dealer/retailer if roll. Be ready to apply the regular the underbody. Take care to clean service is required. brake at once should the vehicle thoroughly any areas where mud and begin to move. other debris can collect. Tire Sealant and Park on a fairly steep hill, with the Compressor Kit vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant and the parking brake. Compressor Kit, check the sealant expiration date printed on the • To check the parking brake’s instruction label of the kit at least holding ability: With the engine once a year. See your dealer/retailer running and the transmission in for a replacement canister. N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only. 6-12 Maintenance Schedule

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Fluids and lubricants identiﬁed below by name, part number, or speciﬁcation can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Institute Certiﬁed for Gasoline Engines starburst Engine Oil symbol. To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle’s engine, see Engine Oil on page 5-13. 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL® Engine Coolant Coolant. See Engine Coolant on page 5-19. DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88862806, Hydraulic Brake System in Canada 88862807). Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent. GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, Power Steering System in Canada 89021186). Maintenance Schedule 6-13

Usage Fluid/Lubricant Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in Canada 10953474).

Carrier Assembly — Differential (Rear SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, Drive Module) and Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit) in Canada 89021678) meeting GM Speciﬁcation 9986115. Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and in Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Release Pawl Category LB or GC-LB. Hood and Door Hinges and Rear Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, Folding Seat in Canada 10953474). Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) Weatherstrip Conditioning or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in Canada 992887). 6-14 Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identiﬁed below by name, part number, or speciﬁcation can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15278634 — Engine Oil Filter 89017524 PF48 Spark Plugs 12611882 41-107 Wiper Blades Driver – 24.6 in (62.5 cm) 15254805 — Passenger – 20.8 in (53.0 cm) 15254804 — Rear – 11.6 in (30.0 cm) 15276259 — Maintenance Schedule 6-15

Engine Drive Belt Routing 3.6L V6 Engine 6-16 Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-1. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts. Maintenance Record Odometer Maintenance I or Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Maintenance II Maintenance Schedule 6-17

Maintenance Record (cont’d) Odometer Maintenance I or Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Maintenance II 6-18 Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance Record (cont’d) Odometer Maintenance I or Date Serviced By Services Performed Reading Maintenance II Customer Assistance Information 7-1

Reporting Safety Defects Customer Assistance Customer Reporting Safety Defects to the United States and Information Assistance Government ...... 7-14 Reporting Safety Defects to Customer Satisfaction Information the Canadian Government ....7-15 Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure ...... 7-15 Saturn Your satisfaction and goodwill are Service Publications Ordering Information ...... 7-15 important to your retailer and to Customer Assistance and Saturn. Together we are committed Information Vehicle Data Recording to providing our customers with Customer Satisfaction and Privacy unparalleled service, before, Procedure ...... 7-1 Vehicle Data Recording during, and after the purchase Online Owner Center ...... 7-4 and Privacy ...... 7-16 of a Saturn vehicle, for total Customer Assistance for Event Data Recorders ...... 7-17 customer satisfaction. We call this Text Telephone (TTY) ® ...... 7-18 OnStar the Saturn Difference. Normally, Users ...... 7-5 Navigation System ...... 7-18 Customer Assistance Offices ....7-5 Radio Frequency any concerns with the sales GM Mobility Reimbursement Identiﬁcation (RFID) ...... 7-18 transaction or the operation of the Program ...... 7-6 vehicle are resolved by the retailer’s Roadside Assistance sales or service departments. Program ...... 7-6 Scheduling Service Appointments ...... 7-9 Courtesy Transportation ...... 7-9 Collision Damage Repair ...... 7-11 7-2 Customer Assistance Information

If, for any reason, your ownership We encourage you to call the toll-free STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): experience falls below your number in order to give your inquiry Both Saturn and its retailers are expectations, we suggest you take prompt attention. Please have the committed to making sure you are the following action: following information available to completely satisfied with your Saturn give the Customer Assistance vehicle. However, if you continue to STEP ONE: Contact the Retail Representative: remain unsatisfied after following the Customer Assistance Liaison. Any procedure outlined in Steps One and member of the retail management • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This 17-digit number can Two, Saturn and its retailers offer the team has the authority and the additional assistance of a neutral desire to resolve your concerns. be found on the vehicle registration or title, on the upper party through our voluntary Normally, concerns can be quickly participation in a mediation/ resolved at this level. driver side corner of the instrument panel, or on your arbitration program called Better STEP TWO: Should you need roadside assistance key card. Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line. additional assistance, in the U.S., The BBB Auto Line Program is an contact the Saturn Customer • The name of your selling and servicing retail facility. out-of-court program administered Assistance Center by calling by the Council of Better Business 1-800-553-6000. In Canada, call the • Vehicle delivery date and present Bureaus to settle automotive Saturn Customer Communication mileage. disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Centre at 1-800-263-1999. A Saturn • Your daytime and evening phone the interpretation of the New Vehicle Customer Assistance Center team numbers. Limited Warranty. This program is member will handle your call and available at no cost to you, our assist in providing product and When contacting Saturn, please customer. warranty information, the nearest remember that your concern will retailer location, roadside assistance, likely be resolved at a retailer’s Although you may be required brochures, literature and discuss any facility. That is why we suggest you to resort to this informal dispute concerns you may have. follow Step One first. resolution program prior to filing a court action, use of the program is free of charge and your case is generally heard within 40 days. Customer Assistance Information 7-3

If you do not agree with the decision STEP THREE (Canadian Owners): For further information concerning given in your case, you can reject it eligibility in the Canadian Motor and proceed with any other venue for General Motors Participation in Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), relief available to you. the Mediation/Arbitration Program call toll-free 1-800-207-0685. In the event that you do not feel your Alternatively, you may call the Contact the BBB Auto Line Program concerns have been addressed after Saturn Customer Communication by using the toll-free telephone following the procedure outlined in Centre, 1-800-263-1999, or you number or by writing them at the Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of may write to: following address: Canada Limited has committed to Mediation/Arbitration Program BBB Auto Line Program binding arbitration of owner disputes c/o Customer Communication Council of Better Business involving factory-related vehicle Centre Bureaus, Inc. service claims. The program General Motors of Canada Limited 4200 Wilson Boulevard provides for the review of the facts Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Suite 800 involved by an impartial third party 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Arlington, VA 22203-1838 arbiter, and may include an informal Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 hearing before the arbiter. The Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 Telephone: 1-800-955-5100 dr.bbb.org/goauto program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process, Your inquiry should be accompanied This program is available in all from the time you file your complaint by the Vehicle Identification 50 states and the District of to the final decision, should be Number (VIN). Columbia. Eligibility is limited by completed in approximately 70 days. vehicle age, mileage and other We believe our impartial program factors. Saturn Corporation reserves offers advantages over courts in the right to change eligibility most jurisdictions because it is limitations and/or discontinue its informal, quick, and free of charge. participation in this program. 7-4 Customer Assistance Information

Online Owner Center Other Helpful Links: Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you will have access to: Online Owner Center (U.S.) — Saturn — www.saturn.com • My Showroom: Find and save www.gmownercenter.com/ Saturn Merchandise — information on vehicles and www.saturncollection.com saturn current offers in your area. Information and services customized Help Center — • My Dealers/Retailers: Save for your specific vehicle — all in www.saturn.com/helpcenter details such as address and one convenient place. • FAQ phone number for each of your • Digital owner manual, warranty • Contact Us preferred GM dealers/retailers. information, and more • My Driveway: Access quick links • Online service and maintenance My GM Canada (Canada) — to parts and service estimates, records www.gm.ca check trade-in values, or schedule • Find Saturn retailers for service My GM Canada is a a service appointment by adding nationwide password-protected section of the vehicles you own to your www.gm.ca where you can save driveway profile. • Exclusive privileges and offers information on GM vehicles, get • My Preferences: Manage your • Recall notices for your specific personalized offers, and use handy profile and use tools and forms vehicle tools and forms with greater ease. with greater ease. ® • OnStar and GM Cardmember To sign up, visit the My GM Canada Services Earnings summaries section within www.gm.ca. Customer Assistance Information 7-5

Customer Assistance for Customer Assistance In Canada, write to: Text Telephone (TTY) Offices Saturn Customer Communication Users Centre Saturn encourages customers to General Motors of Canada Ltd. To assist owners who have hearing call the toll-free number for CA1-163-005 difficulties, Saturn has installed assistance. If a customer wishes to 1908 Colonel Sam Drive special TDD (Telecommunication write to Saturn, the letter should Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 be addressed to: Devices for the Deaf) equipment in GMcanada.com its Saturn Customer Assistance Saturn Customer Assistance Center 1-800-263-1999 Center. P.O. Box 33173 1-800-263-3830 (For Text Any hearing or speech-impaired Detroit, MI 48232-5173 Telephone devices (TTYs)) customer who has access to a TDD 1-800-553-6000 Roadside Assistance: or to a conventional Text Telephone 1-800-833-6000 (For Text 1-800-268-6800 (TTY) can communicate with Telephone devices (TTYs)) Saturn by dialing 1-800-TDD-6000. Roadside Assistance: TTY users in Canada may dial 1-800-553-6000 1-800-263-3830. 7-6 Customer Assistance Information

GM Mobility For more details, or to determine Calling for Assistance your vehicle’s eligibility, visit When calling Roadside Assistance, Reimbursement Program your Saturn retailer or call the have the following information ready: Saturn Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-553-6000. Text telephone • Your name, home address, and (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000. home telephone number In Canada, customers may call • Telephone number of your the Saturn Customer location Communication Centre at • Location of the vehicle 1-800-263-1999. TTY users in This program, available to qualiﬁed Canada may call 1-800-263-3830. • Model, year, color, and license applicants, can reimburse you up to plate number of the vehicle $1,000 toward eligible aftermarket • Odometer reading, Vehicle driver or passenger adaptive Roadside Assistance Identiﬁcation Number (VIN), and equipment you may require for your Program delivery date of the vehicle vehicle such as hand controls, For U.S. purchased vehicles, call • Description of the problem wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc. 1-800-553-6000; (Text Telephone The offer is available for a limited (TTY): 1-800-889-2438). period of time from the date of For Canadian purchased vehicles, vehicle purchase/lease. call 1-800-268-6800. Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. Customer Assistance Information 7-7

Coverage Services Provided • Flat Tire Change: Service is Services are provided up to • Emergency Fuel Delivery: provided to change a flat tire with 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km), Delivery of enough fuel for the spare tire. The spare tire, whichever comes first. the vehicle to get to the nearest if equipped, must be in good service station. condition and properly inflated. In the U.S., anyone driving the It is the owner’s responsibility for vehicle is covered. In Canada, a • Lock-Out Service: Service is the repair or replacement of the person driving the vehicle without provided to unlock the vehicle if tire if it is not covered by the permission from the owner is not you are locked out. A remote warranty. covered. unlock may be available if you have OnStar®. For security • Battery Jump Start: Service is Roadside Assistance is not a part of reasons, the driver must present provided to jump start a dead the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. identification before this service battery. Saturn and General Motors of is given. • Trip Interruption Benefits Canada Limited reserve the right to and Assistance: If your trip is make any changes or discontinue • Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway: Tow to the interrupted due to a warranty the Roadside Assistance program at failure, incidental expenses any time without notification. nearest Saturn retailer for warranty service, or if the vehicle may be reimbursed during Saturn and General Motors of was in a crash and cannot be the 5 years/100,000 miles Canada Limited reserve the right to driven. Assistance is also given (160 000 km) Powertrain warranty limit services or payment to an when the vehicle is stuck in sand, period. Items considered are owner or driver if they decide the mud, or snow. hotel, meals, and rental car. claims are made too often, or the same type of claim is made many times. 7-8 Customer Assistance Information

Services Not Included in • Trip Routing Service: Detailed • Alternative Service: If Roadside Assistance maps of North America are assistance cannot be provided • Impound towing caused by provided when requested either right away, the Roadside violation of any laws. with the most direct route or the Assistance advisor may give you most scenic route. There is a permission to get local emergency • Legal fines. limit of six requests per year. road service. You will receive • Mounting, dismounting or Additional travel information is payment, up to $100, after changing of snow tires, chains, also available. Allow three weeks sending the original receipt to or other traction devices. for delivery. Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be covered, however • Towing or services for vehicles • Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must be over any cost for parts and labor for driven on a non-public road or repairs not covered by the highway. 250 kilometres from where your trip was started to qualify. General warranty are the owner Services Specific to Canadian Motors of Canada Limited responsibility. Purchased Vehicles requires pre-authorization, • Fuel delivery: Reimbursement original detailed receipts, and a is approximately $5 Canadian. copy of the repair orders. Once Diesel fuel delivery may be authorization has been received, restricted. Propane and other the Roadside Assistance advisor fuels are not provided through will help you make arrangements this service. and explain how to receive payment. • Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required. Customer Assistance Information 7-9

Scheduling Service Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options Appointments To enhance your ownership Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. When your vehicle requires warranty experience, we and our participating However, if you are unable to wait, service, contact your dealer/retailer retailers are proud to offer Courtesy Saturn helps to minimize your and request an appointment. Transportation, a customer support inconvenience by providing several By scheduling a service appointment program for vehicles with the Bumper transportation options. Depending on and advising your service consultant to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage the circumstances, your retailer can of your transportation needs, your period in Canada), extended offer you one of the following: dealer/retailer can help minimize powertrain, and hybrid speciﬁc warranties in both the U.S. and your inconvenience. Shuttle Service Canada. If your vehicle cannot be Shuttle service is the preferred scheduled into the service Several courtesy transportation means of offering Courtesy department immediately, keep options are available to assist Transportation. Retailers may driving it until it can be scheduled in reducing your inconvenience provide you with shuttle service to for service, unless, of course, the when warranty repairs are required. get you to your destination with problem is safety-related. If it is, Courtesy Transportation is not a part minimal interruption of your daily please call your dealership/retailer, of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. schedule. This includes one-way or let them know this, and ask for A separate booklet entitled “Warranty round trip shuttle service within instructions. and Owner Assistance Information” reasonable time and distance If the dealer/retailer requests you to furnished with each new vehicle parameters of the retailer’s area. bring the vehicle for service, you provides detailed warranty coverage are urged to do so as early in information. the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair. 7-10 Customer Assistance Information

Public Transportation or Fuel Courtesy Rental Vehicle Additional Program Reimbursement Your retailer may arrange to provide Information If your vehicle requires overnight you with a courtesy rental vehicle or All program options, such as warranty repairs, and public reimburse you for a rental vehicle shuttle service, may not be transportation is used instead of the that you obtain if your vehicle is kept available at every retailer. Please retailer’s shuttle service, the expense for an overnight warranty repair. contact your retailer for speciﬁc must be supported by original Rental reimbursement will be limited information about availability. receipts and can only be up to the and must be supported by original All Courtesy Transportation maximum amount allowed by Saturn receipts. This requires that you sign arrangements will be administered for shuttle service. In addition, for and complete a rental agreement by appropriate retailer personnel. U.S. customers, should you arrange and meet state/provincial, local, and transportation through a friend or rental vehicle provider requirements. Saturn reserves the right to relative, limited reimbursement for Requirements vary and may include unilaterally modify, change or reasonable fuel expenses may be minimum age requirements, discontinue Courtesy Transportation available. Claim amounts should insurance coverage, credit card, at any time and to resolve all reﬂect actual costs and be supported etc. You are responsible for fuel questions of claim eligibility pursuant by original receipts. See your usage charges and may also be to the terms and conditions retailer for information regarding responsible for taxes, levies, usage described herein at its sole the allowance amounts for fees, excessive mileage, or rental discretion. reimbursement of fuel or other usage beyond the completion of the transportation costs. repair. It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a courtesy rental. Customer Assistance Information 7-11

Collision Damage Repair Recycled original equipment parts Aftermarket collision parts are may also be used for repair. These also available. These are made If your vehicle is involved in a parts are typically removed from by companies other than GM and collision and it is damaged, have vehicles that were total losses in may not have been tested for your the damage repaired by a qualiﬁed prior crashes. In most cases, the vehicle. As a result, these parts technician using the proper parts being recycled are from may ﬁt poorly, exhibit premature equipment and quality replacement undamaged sections of the vehicle. durability/corrosion problems, parts. Poorly performed collision A recycled original equipment GM and may not perform properly in repairs diminish your vehicle’s resale part, may be an acceptable choice subsequent collisions. Aftermarket value, and safety performance can to maintain your vehicle’s originally parts are not covered by your GM be compromised in subsequent designed appearance and safety New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and collisions. performance, however, the history of any vehicle failure related to such Collision Parts these parts is not known. Such parts parts are not covered by that are not covered by your GM New warranty. Genuine GM Collision parts are new Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any parts made with the same materials related failures are not covered by and construction methods as the that warranty. parts with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty. 7-12 Customer Assistance Information

Repair Facility Many insurance policies provide If a Crash Occurs reduced protection to your GM We recommend that you choose a Here is what to do if you are vehicle by limiting compensation collision repair facility that meets involved in a crash. for damage repairs by using your needs before you ever need aftermarket collision parts. Some • Check to make sure that you are collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer insurance companies will not all right. If you are uninjured, may have a collision repair center specify aftermarket collision parts. make sure that no one else in with GM-trained technicians and When purchasing insurance, we your vehicle, or the other vehicle, state of the art equipment, or be able recommend that you assure your is injured. to recommend a collision repair vehicle will be repaired with GM center that has GM-trained • If there has been an injury, call original equipment collision parts. technicians and comparable emergency services for help. If such insurance coverage is not equipment. Do not leave the scene of a crash available from your current insurance until all matters have been taken Insuring Your Vehicle carrier, consider switching to another care of. Move your vehicle only if insurance carrier. Protect your investment in your its position puts you in danger or GM vehicle with comprehensive If your vehicle is leased, the leasing you are instructed to move it by a and collision insurance coverage. company may require you to have police officer. There are signiﬁcant differences in insurance that assures repairs with • Give only the necessary and the quality of coverage afforded by Genuine GM Original Equipment requested information to police various insurance policy terms. Manufacturer (OEM) parts or and other parties involved in Genuine Manufacturer replacement the crash. Do not discuss your parts. Read your lease carefully, as personal condition, mental frame you may be charged at the end of of mind, or anything unrelated to your lease for poor quality repairs. the crash. This will help guard against post-crash legal action. Customer Assistance Information 7-13

• If you need roadside assistance, company and policy number, and • Once you have an estimate, read call GM Roadside Assistance. a general description of the it carefully and make sure you See Roadside Assistance damage to the other vehicle. understand what work will be Program on page 7-6 for more • If possible, call your insurance performed on your vehicle. If you information. company from the scene of the have a question, ask for an • If your vehicle cannot be driven, crash. They will walk you through explanation. Reputable shops know where the towing service the information they will need. welcome this opportunity. will be taking it. Get a card from If they ask for a police report, Managing the Vehicle Damage the tow truck operator or write phone or go to the police Repair Process down the driver’s name, the department headquarters the next service’s name, and the phone day and you can get a copy of the In the event that your vehicle number. report for a nominal fee. In some requires damage repairs, GM states/provinces with “no fault” recommends that you take an active • Remove any valuables from your insurance laws, a report may not role in its repair. If you have a vehicle before it is towed away. be necessary. This is especially pre-determined repair facility of Make sure this includes your true if there are no injuries and choice, take your vehicle there, or insurance information and both vehicles are driveable. have it towed there. Specify to the registration if you keep these facility that any required replacement • Choose a reputable collision items in your vehicle. collision parts be original equipment repair facility for your vehicle. • Gather the important information parts, either new Genuine GM parts Whether you select a dealer/ you will need from the other or recycled original GM parts. retailer or a private collision repair driver. Things like name, address, Remember, recycled parts will not facility to ﬁx the damage, make phone number, driver’s license be covered by your GM vehicle sure you are comfortable with number, vehicle license plate, warranty. them. Remember, you will have to vehicle make, model and model feel comfortable with their work year, Vehicle Identiﬁcation for a long time. Number (VIN), insurance 7-14 Customer Assistance Information

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, Reporting Safety of vehicles, it could order a recall but you must live with the repair. and remedy campaign. However, Depending on your policy limits, your Defects NHTSA cannot become involved insurance company may initially in individual problems between value the repair using aftermarket Reporting Safety Defects you, your retailer or Saturn parts. Discuss this with your repair to the United States Corporation. professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle Government To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle Safety Hotline is leased you may be obligated to If you believe that your vehicle toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 have the vehicle repaired with has a defect which could cause a (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to Genuine GM parts, even if your crash or could cause injury or Safercar.gov; or write to: insurance coverage does not pay the death, you should immediately full cost. inform the National Highway Administrator, NHTSA Traffic Safety Administration 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. If another party’s insurance Washington D.C., 20590 company is paying for the repairs, (NHTSA), in addition to notifying you are not obligated to accept Saturn Corporation. You can also obtain other a repair valuation based on If NHTSA receives similar information about motor vehicle that insurance company’s collision complaints, it could open an safety from Safercar.gov. policy repair limits, as you have investigation, and if it ﬁnds that no contractual limits with that a safety defect exists in a group company. In such cases, you can have control of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within reasonable limits. Customer Assistance Information 7-15

Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects Service Publications to the Canadian to Saturn Ordering Information Government In addition to notifying NHTSA Service Manuals If you live in Canada, and you (or Transport Canada) in a situation A variety of publications are believe that your vehicle has like this, please notify Saturn. available to you. Saturn service a safety defect, notify Transport Call 1-800-553-6000, or write: manuals are written for trained Canada immediately, in addition to technicians, and in some cases, notifying General Motors of Saturn Corporation specialized tools and equipment Canada Limited. Call them at 100 Saturn Parkway are necessary to complete certain 1-800-333-0510 or write to: Mail Drop 371-999-S24 Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500 repairs. However, the manuals Transport Canada are available to owners who either In Canada, call 1-800-263-1999, Road Safety Branch have the training, or wish to or write: 2780 Sheffield Road gain a greater understanding of the Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9 Saturn Customer Communication technical aspect of their Saturn. Centre General Motors of Canada Limited For additional publications CA1-163-005 information or to order publications 1908 Colonel Sam Drive in the United States, call toll Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 free 1-800-2-SATURN or visit Saturn-publications.com to order on-line. In Canada, Saturn service manuals are available by calling toll free 1-800-551-4123. 7-16 Customer Assistance Information

Owner Publications Bulletins cover various subjects. Vehicle Data Some pertain to the proper use and Information on how to obtain product care of your vehicle. Some describe Recording and bulletins and as described below is costly repairs. Others describe applicable only in the fifty U.S. states Privacy inexpensive repairs which, if done on and the District of Columbia, and time with the latest parts, may avoid Your Saturn vehicle has a number of only for cars and light trucks with future costly repairs. sophisticated computers that record a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating information about the vehicle’s (GVWR) less than 10,000 pounds Some bulletins tell a technician how performance and how it is driven. (4 536 kg). Copies of individual to repair a new or unexpected For example, your vehicle uses bulletins are also at your participating condition. Others describe a quicker computer modules to monitor and Saturn retailer. You can ask to way to fix your vehicle. They can control engine and transmission see them. help a technician service your performance, to monitor the vehicle better. In Canada, information relating to conditions for airbag deployment and product service bulletins can Most bulletins apply to conditions deploy airbags in a crash and, if so be obtained by contacting your affecting a small number of vehicles. equipped, to provide antilock braking Saturn retailer. Your Saturn retailer or a qualified to help the driver control the vehicle. technician may have to determine These modules may store data to Service Bulletins if a specific bulletin applies to your help your dealer/retailer technician Saturn regularly sends its retailers vehicle. To order Saturn bulletins, service your vehicle. Some modules useful service bulletins about Saturn call Saturn Publications at may also store data about how you products. Saturn monitors product 1-800-2-SATURN or visit operate the vehicle, such as rate of performance in the field. We then saturn-publications.com to order fuel consumption or average speed. prepare bulletins for servicing online. These modules may also retain the our products better. You can get owner’s personal preferences, such these bulletins, too. as radio pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings. Customer Assistance Information 7-17

Event Data Recorders This data can help provide a better Saturn will not access this data or understanding of the circumstances share it with others except: with This vehicle has an Event in which crashes and injuries occur. the consent of the vehicle owner or, Data Recorder (EDR). The main if the vehicle is leased, with the purpose of an EDR is to record, Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial consent of the lessee; in response in certain crash or near crash-like to an official request of police or situations, such as an airbag crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal similar government office; as part of deployment or hitting a road Saturn’s defense of litigation obstacle, data that will assist in driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and through the discovery process; or, understanding how a vehicle’s as required by law. Data that Saturn systems performed. The EDR is crash location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law collects or receives may also be designed to record data related to used for Saturn research needs or vehicle dynamics and safety enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally may be made available to others systems for a short period of time, for research purposes, where typically 30 seconds or less. identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. a need is shown and the data is not The EDR in this vehicle is designed tied to a speciﬁc vehicle or vehicle to record such data as: To read data recorded by an EDR, owner. • How various systems in your special equipment is required, vehicle were operating and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to • Whether or not the driver and the vehicle manufacturer, other passenger safety belts were parties, such as law enforcement, buckled/fastened that have the special equipment, can • How far, if at all, the driver was read the information if they have pressing the accelerator and/or access to the vehicle or the EDR. brake pedal • How fast the vehicle was traveling 7-18 Customer Assistance Information

OnStar® Radio Frequency If your vehicle has OnStar and you Identiﬁcation (RFID) subscribe to the OnStar services, RFID technology is used in some please refer to the OnStar Terms and vehicles for functions such as Conditions for information on data ¨ tire pressure monitoring and ignition collection and use. See also OnStar system security, as well as in System on page 2-42 in this manual connection with conveniences such for more information. as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, and Navigation System in-vehicle transmitters for garage If your vehicle has a navigation door openers. RFID technology in system, use of the system may Saturn vehicles does not use result in the storage of destinations, or record personal information or addresses, telephone numbers, and link with any other Saturn system other trip information. Refer to the containing personal information. navigation system operating manual for information on stored data and for deletion instructions. INDEX i-1

A Airbag System (cont.) Appearance Care (cont.) What Makes an Airbag Interior Cleaning ...... 5-84 Accessories and Inflate? ...... 1-52 Leather ...... 5-86 Modifications ...... 5-3 What Will You See After Sheet Metal Damage ...... 5-90 Accessory Power ...... 2-21 an Airbag Inflates? ...... 1-53 Tires ...... 5-90 Accessory Power Outlets ...... 3-17 When Should an Airbag Underbody Maintenance .... 5-90 Adding Equipment to Your Inflate? ...... 1-51 Washing Your Vehicle ...... 5-87 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .... 1-60 Where Are the Airbags? ..... 1-49 Weatherstrips ...... 5-87 Additional Required Services, Airbags Windshield, Backglass, Scheduled Maintenance ...... 6-6 Passenger Status and Wiper Blades ...... 5-88 Additives, Fuel ...... 5-6 Indicator ...... 3-34 Assistance Program, Add-On Electrical All-Wheel Drive ...... 5-35 Roadside ...... 7-6 Equipment ...... 5-92 All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) Audio System ...... 3-74 Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ...... 5-17 System ...... 4-8 Audio Steering Wheel Air Conditioning ...... 3-19 Antilock Brake System (ABS) .... 4-4 Controls ...... 3-125 Airbag Warning Light ...... 3-37 Navigation/Radio System, Readiness Light ...... 3-33 Appearance Care see Navigation Airbag System ...... 1-47 Aluminum or Manual ...... 3-103 Adding Equipment to Chrome-Plated Wheels ... 5-89 Setting the Clock ...... 3-74 Your Airbag-Equipped Care of Safety Belts ...... 5-86 Audio System(s) ...... 3-75 Vehicle ...... 1-60 Chemical Paint Spotting ..... 5-90 Audio Systems How Does an Airbag Cleaning Exterior Radio Reception ...... 3-126 Restrain? ...... 1-53 Lamps/Lenses ...... 5-87 Rear Seat (RSA) ...... 3-123 Passenger Sensing Fabric/Carpet ...... 5-85 Theft-Deterrent Feature .... 3-125 System ...... 1-55 Finish Care ...... 5-87 Automatic Transmission Servicing Your Finish Damage ...... 5-90 Fluid ...... 5-18 Airbag-Equipped Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Operation ...... 2-24 Vehicle ...... 1-60 Other Plastic Surfaces .... 5-86 i-2 INDEX

B Bulb Replacement (cont.) Cargo License Plate Lamps ...... 5-37 Tie Downs ...... 2-53 Battery ...... 5-29 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Cargo Cover ...... 2-53 Electric Power Stoplamps and Cargo Management System .... 2-53 Management ...... 3-15 Sidemarker Lamps ...... 5-36 CD, MP3 ...... 3-92, 3-97 Run-Down Protection ...... 3-16 Buying New Tires ...... 5-54 Center Console Storage ...... 2-50 Belt Routing, Engine ...... 6-15 Chains, Tire ...... 5-60 Bluetooth® ...... 3-103 Charging System Light ...... 3-35 Brake C Check Emergencies ...... 4-5 Calibration ...... 3-54 Engine Lamp ...... 3-39 Brake Fluid ...... 5-27 California Checking Things Under Brakes ...... 5-27 Perchlorate Materials the Hood ...... 5-10 Antilock ...... 4-4 Requirements ...... 5-4 Chemical Paint Spotting ...... 5-90 Parking ...... 2-27 California Fuel ...... 5-6 Child Restraints System Warning Light ...... 3-36 California Proposition 65 Infants and Young Braking ...... 4-3 Warning ...... 5-3 Children ...... 1-30 Braking in Emergencies ...... 4-5 Camera, Rear Vision ...... 2-37 Lower Anchors and Break-In, New Vehicle ...... 2-20 Canadian Owners ...... ii Tethers for Children ...... 1-37 Bulb Replacement ...... 5-37 Capacities and Older Children ...... 1-28 Fog Lamp ...... 3-13 Speciﬁcations ...... 5-98 Securing a Child Restraint Halogen Bulbs ...... 5-36 Carbon Monoxide ...... 2-11 in a Rear Seat Position .... 1-43 Headlamp Aiming ...... 5-35 Engine Exhaust ...... 2-30 Securing a Child Restraint Headlamps ...... 5-35 Liftgate ...... 2-10 in the Right Front Seat High Intensity Discharge Winter Driving ...... 4-15 Position ...... 1-45 (HID) Lighting ...... 5-36 Care of Systems ...... 1-33 Safety Belts ...... 5-86 Where to Put the Restraint ...... 1-35 INDEX i-3

Circuit Breakers ...... 5-92 Collision Damage Repair ...... 7-11 D Cleaning Compact Spare Tire ...... 5-83 Damage Repair, Collision ...... 7-11 Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Compass ...... 3-54 Data Recorders Wheels ...... 5-89 Compressor Kit, Tire Event ...... 7-17 Exterior Lamps/Lenses ...... 5-87 Sealant ...... 5-62 Daytime Running Fabric/Carpet ...... 5-85 Content Theft-Deterrent ...... 2-16 Lamps/Automatic Finish Care ...... 5-87 Control of a Vehicle ...... 4-3 Headlamp System ...... 3-12 Instrument Panel, Vinyl, Convenience Net ...... 2-52 Defensive Driving ...... 4-2 and Other Plastic Coolant Delayed Entry Lighting ...... 3-14 Surfaces ...... 5-86 Engine ...... 5-19 Delayed Exit Lighting ...... 3-15 Interior ...... 5-84 Engine Temperature Gage ... 3-38 Delayed Headlamps ...... 3-12 Leather ...... 5-86 Engine Temperature Delayed Locking ...... 2-8 Tires ...... 5-90 Warning Light ...... 3-38 DIC Compass ...... 3-54 Underbody Maintenance ..... 5-90 Cooling System ...... 5-19 Disc, MP3 ...... 3-92, 3-97 Washing Your Vehicle ...... 5-87 Courtesy Lamps ...... 3-13 Doing Your Own Weatherstrips ...... 5-87 Courtesy Transportation ...... 7-9 Service Work ...... 5-4 Windshield, Backglass, Cruise Control ...... 3-9 Dome Lamp Override ...... 3-14 and Wiper Blades ...... 5-88 Cruise Control Light ...... 3-43 Dome Lamps ...... 3-14 Climate Control System ...... 3-19 Cupholders ...... 2-50 Door Outlet Adjustment ...... 3-27 Customer Assistance ...... 7-5 Delayed Locking ...... 2-8 Rear Air Conditioning and Offices ...... 7-5 Locks ...... 2-8 Heating System ...... 3-28 Text Telephone (TTY) Power Door Locks ...... 2-8 Rear Air Conditioning and Users ...... 7-5 Programmable Automatic Heating System, Customer Information Door Locks ...... 2-9 Electronic ...... 3-29 Service Publications Rear Door Security Locks .... 2-9 Climate Control Systems Ordering Information ...... 7-15 Drive Systems Dual Automatic ...... 3-22 Customer Satisfaction All-Wheel Drive ...... 5-35 Clock, Setting ...... 3-74 Procedure ...... 7-1 i-4 INDEX

Driver Dual Automatic Climate Engine Seat Height Adjuster ...... 1-3 Control System ...... 3-22 Air Cleaner/Filter ...... 5-17 Driver Information DVD Check and Service Engine Center (DIC) ...... 3-44 Rear Seat Entertainment Soon Lamp ...... 3-39 DIC Operation and System ...... 3-114 Compartment Overview ...... 5-12 Displays ...... 3-45, 3-50 Coolant ...... 5-19 DIC Vehicle Coolant Heater ...... 2-23 Customization ...... 3-65 E Coolant DIC Warnings and EDR ...... 7-16 Temperature Gage ...... 3-38 Messages ...... 3-56 Electrical Equipment Coolant Temperature Driving Add-On Equipment ...... 5-92 Warning Light ...... 3-38 At Night ...... 4-11 Electrical System Cooling System ...... 5-19 Before a Long Trip ...... 4-13 Fuses and Circuit Drive Belt Routing ...... 6-15 Defensive ...... 4-2 Breakers ...... 5-92 Exhaust ...... 2-30 Drunk ...... 4-2 Instrument Panel Fuse Oil ...... 5-13 Highway Hypnosis ...... 4-13 Block ...... 5-92 Oil Life System ...... 5-15 Hill and Mountain Roads ..... 4-14 Power Windows and Other Overheated Protection In Rain and on Power Options ...... 5-92 Operating Mode ...... 5-25 Wet Roads ...... 4-12 Underhood Fuse Block ...... 5-94 Overheating ...... 5-23 Loss of Control ...... 4-10 Windshield Wiper Fuses .... 5-92 Starting ...... 2-22 Electronic Immobilizer Off-Road Recovery ...... 4-9 ® Entry Lighting ...... 3-14 Rocking Your Vehicle to PASS-Key III+ ...... 2-18 Event Data Recorders ...... 7-17 Get it Out ...... 4-18 Electronic Immobilizer Extender, Safety Belt ...... 1-28 Operation Winter ...... 4-15 ® Exterior Lamps ...... 3-11 Driving for Better Fuel PASS-Key III+ ...... 2-18 Economy ...... 4-1 INDEX i-5

F Fuel (cont.) Glove Box ...... 2-50 Gage ...... 3-44 GM Mobility Reimbursement Filter Gasoline Octane ...... 5-5 Program ...... 7-6 Engine Air Cleaner ...... 5-17 Gasoline Speciﬁcations ...... 5-5 Finish Damage ...... 5-90 Fuses Flashers, Hazard Warning ...... 3-5 Fuses and Circuit H Flash-to-Pass ...... 3-7 Breakers ...... 5-92 Halogen Bulbs ...... 5-36 Flat Tire ...... 5-61 Instrument Panel Fuse Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 3-5 Flat Tire, Changing ...... 5-70 Block ...... 5-92 Head Restraints ...... 1-2 Flat Tire, Storing ...... 5-80 Underhood Fuse Block ...... 5-94 Headlamp Floor Mats ...... 2-51 Windshield Wiper ...... 5-92 Aiming ...... 5-35 Fluid Headlamps Automatic Transmission ..... 5-18 Bulb Replacement ...... 5-35 Power Steering ...... 5-25 G Daytime Running Windshield Washer ...... 5-26 Gage Lamps/Automatic Fog Lamp Speedometer ...... 3-32 Headlamp System ...... 3-12 Fog ...... 3-13 Tachometer ...... 3-32 Delayed ...... 3-12 Fog Lamp Light ...... 3-43 Voltmeter Gage ...... 3-35 Exterior Lamps ...... 3-11 Fuel ...... 5-5 Gages Flash-to-Pass ...... 3-7 Additives ...... 5-6 Engine Coolant High Intensity Discharge California Fuel ...... 5-6 Temperature ...... 3-38 (HID) Lighting ...... 5-36 Economy Driving ...... 4-1 Fuel ...... 3-44 High/Low Beam Changer ..... 3-7 Filling a Portable Fuel Garage Door Opener ...... 2-45 Heated Seats ...... 1-5 Container ...... 5-10 Gasoline Heater ...... 3-19 Filling the Tank ...... 5-8 Octane ...... 5-5 Engine Coolant ...... 2-23 Fuels in Foreign Countries .... 5-7 Speciﬁcations ...... 5-5 Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ...... 1-3 i-6 INDEX

High Voltage Devices and K Lights Wiring ...... 5-91 Airbag Readiness ...... 3-33 Keyless Entry, Remote Highbeam On Light ...... 3-43 Antilock Brake System Operation ...... 2-4 Highway Hypnosis ...... 4-13 (ABS) Warning ...... 3-37 Keyless Entry System ...... 2-3 Hill and Mountain Roads ...... 4-14 Brake System Warning ...... 3-36 Keys ...... 2-2 Hood Charging System ...... 3-35 Checking Things Under ..... 5-10 Cruise Control ...... 3-43 Release ...... 5-11 L Engine Coolant Horn ...... 3-5 Labeling, Tire Sidewall ...... 5-40 Temperature Warning ..... 3-38 How to Wear Safety Belts Lamp Exterior Lamps ...... 3-11 Properly ...... 1-18 Malfunction Indicator ...... 3-39 Flash-to-Pass ...... 3-7 Lamps Fog Lamp ...... 3-43 Courtesy ...... 3-13 Highbeam On ...... 3-43 I Dome ...... 3-14 High/Low Beam Changer ..... 3-7 Ignition Positions ...... 2-20 Dome Lamp Override ...... 3-14 Oil Pressure ...... 3-42 Infants and Young Children, License Plate ...... 5-37 Passenger Airbag Status Restraints ...... 1-30 Reading ...... 3-15 Indicator ...... 3-34 Inﬂation - Tire Pressure ...... 5-45 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 1-23 Safety Belt Reminders ...... 3-32 Instrument Panel LATCH System for Security ...... 3-43 Brightness ...... 3-13 Child Restraints ...... 1-37 StabiliTrak® Indicator ...... 3-37 Cluster ...... 3-31 Liftgate Tire Pressure ...... 3-39 Overview ...... 3-4 Carbon Monoxide ...... 2-10 Tow/Haul Mode ...... 3-43 Storage Area ...... 2-50 Liftgate, Power ...... 2-11 Loading Your Vehicle ...... 4-18 Introduction ...... 6-1 Lighting Locks Delayed Entry ...... 3-14 Delayed Locking ...... 2-8 J Delayed Exit ...... 3-15 Door ...... 2-8 Entry ...... 3-14 Jump Starting ...... 5-30 Lockout Protection ...... 2-9 Parade Dimming ...... 3-15 INDEX i-7

Locks (cont.) Maintenance Schedule (cont.) N Power Door ...... 2-8 Owner Checks and Navigation System, Privacy .... 7-18 Programmable Automatic Services ...... 6-9 Navigation/Radio System, Door Locks ...... 2-9 Recommended Fluids and see Navigation Manual ..... 3-103 Rear Door Security Locks ..... 2-9 Lubricants ...... 6-12 Net Loss of Control ...... 4-10 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 6-3 Convenience ...... 2-52 Lower Anchors and Using ...... 6-2 New Vehicle Break-In ...... 2-20 Tethers for Children ...... 1-37 Your Vehicle and the Luggage Carrier ...... 2-52 Environment ...... 6-1 Lumbar Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 3-39 O Manual Controls ...... 1-4 Manual Lumbar Controls ...... 1-4 Odometer ...... 3-32 Power Controls ...... 1-5 Manual Seats ...... 1-3 Off-Road Memory Seat and Mirrors ...... 1-6 Recovery ...... 4-9 M Message Oil DIC Warnings and Engine ...... 5-13 Maintenance Messages ...... 3-56 Engine Oil Life System ...... 5-15 Footnotes ...... 6-7 Mirrors Pressure Light ...... 3-42 Maintenance Schedule Automatic Dimming Older Children, Restraints ...... 1-28 Additional Required Rearview ...... 2-31 Online Owner Center ...... 7-4 Services ...... 6-6 Manual Rearview Mirror ..... 2-31 OnStar, Privacy ...... 7-18 At Each Fuel Fill ...... 6-9 Outside Convex Mirror ...... 2-34 OnStar® System, see At Least Once a Month ..... 6-10 Outside Heated Mirrors ...... 2-34 OnStar® Manual ...... 2-42 At Least Once a Year ...... 6-10 Outside Power Foldaway Operation, Universal Home Maintenance Record ...... 6-16 Mirrors ...... 2-33 Remote System ...... 2-46 Maintenance Outside Power Mirrors ...... 2-32 Outlet Adjustment ...... 3-27 Replacement Parts ...... 6-14 Park Tilt ...... 2-34 Outlets Maintenance Requirements ... 6-1 MP3 ...... 3-92, 3-97 Accessory Power ...... 3-17 i-8 INDEX

Outside PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Programmable Automatic Convex Mirror ...... 2-34 Immobilizer ...... 2-18 Door Locks ...... 2-9 Heated Mirrors ...... 2-34 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Proposition 65 Warning, Power Foldaway Mirrors ..... 2-33 Immobilizer Operation ...... 2-18 California ...... 5-3 Power Mirrors ...... 2-32 Perchlorate Materials Overheated Engine Protection Requirements, California ...... 5-4 Operating Mode ...... 5-25 Phone R Owner Checks and Services ..... 6-9 Bluetooth® ...... 3-103 Radio Frequency Identiﬁcation Owners, Canadian ...... ii Power (RFID), Privacy ...... 7-18 Door Locks ...... 2-8 Radio(s) ...... 3-75 Electrical System ...... 5-92 Radios P Liftgate ...... 2-11 Navigation/Radio System, Paint, Damage ...... 5-90 Lumbar Controls ...... 1-5 see Navigation Parade Dimming ...... 3-15 Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Manual ...... 3-103 Park Current ...... 3-18 Reception ...... 3-126 Shifting Into ...... 2-28 Retained Setting the Clock ...... 3-74 Shifting Out of ...... 2-29 Accessory (RAP) ...... 2-21 Theft-Deterrent ...... 3-125 Park Aid ...... 2-34 Seat ...... 1-4 Reading Lamps ...... 3-15 Park Tilt Mirrors ...... 2-34 Steering Fluid ...... 5-25 Rear Air Conditioning and Parking Windows ...... 2-14 Heating System ...... 3-28 Assist ...... 2-34 Pregnancy, Using Rear Air Conditioning and Over Things That Burn ...... 2-29 Safety Belts ...... 1-28 Heating System and Parking Brake ...... 2-27 Privacy ...... 7-16 Electronic Climate Passenger Airbag Status Navigation System ...... 7-18 Controls ...... 3-29 Indicator ...... 3-34 OnStar ...... 7-18 Rear Door Security Locks ...... 2-9 Passenger Sensing System .... 1-55 Radio Frequency Rear Seat Armrest ...... 2-52 Passing ...... 4-10 Identiﬁcation (RFID) ...... 7-18 INDEX i-9

Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Replacement Bulbs ...... 5-37 S System ...... 3-123 Replacement Parts, Safety Belt Reminders ...... 3-32 Rear Seat Entertainment Maintenance ...... 6-14 Safety Belts System ...... 3-114 Reporting Safety Defects Care of ...... 5-86 Rear Seat Operation ...... 1-9 to Saturn ...... 7-15 Extender ...... 1-28 Rear Vision Camera (RVC) ..... 2-37 Reporting Safety Defects How to Wear Safety Belts Rear Window Washer/Wiper ..... 3-9 to the Canadian Properly ...... 1-18 Rearview Mirror, Automatic Government ...... 7-15 Lap-Shoulder Belt ...... 1-23 Dimming ...... 2-31 Reporting Safety Defects Safety Belts Are for Rearview Mirrors ...... 2-31 to the United States Everyone ...... 1-14 Reclining Seatbacks ...... 1-8 Government ...... 7-14 Use During Pregnancy ...... 1-28 Recommended Fluids and Restraint System Check Safety Defects Lubricants ...... 6-12 Checking the Restraint Reporting to Saturn ...... 7-15 Recreational Vehicle Systems ...... 1-61 Reporting to the Canadian Towing ...... 4-22 Replacing Restraint System Government ...... 7-15 Reimbursement Program, Parts After a Crash ...... 1-62 Reporting to the United GM Mobility ...... 7-6 Retained Accessory States Government ...... 7-14 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Power (RAP) ...... 2-21 Safety Warnings and System ...... 2-3 Roadside Assistance Symbols ...... iii Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Program ...... 7-6 Scheduled Maintenance ...... 6-3 System, Operation ...... 2-4 Rocking Your Vehicle to Additional Required Remote Vehicle Start ...... 2-6 Get it Out ...... 4-18 Services ...... 6-6 Removing the Flat Tire and Roof Scheduling Appointments ...... 7-9 Installing the Spare Tire ..... 5-74 Sunroof ...... 2-54 Sealant Kit, Tire ...... 5-62 Removing the Spare Tire Running the Vehicle While and Tools ...... 5-71 Parked ...... 2-30 i-10 INDEX

Seats Service Parts Identification Storage Areas Driver Seat Height Adjuster ... 1-3 Label ...... 5-91 Cargo Management Head Restraints ...... 1-2 Servicing Your System ...... 2-53 Heated Seats ...... 1-5 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 1-60 Center Console ...... 2-50 Manual Lumbar ...... 1-4 Setting the Clock ...... 3-74 Convenience Net ...... 2-52 Memory, Mirrors ...... 1-6 Sheet Metal Damage ...... 5-90 Cupholders ...... 2-50 Power Lumbar ...... 1-5 Shifting Glove Box ...... 2-50 Power Seats ...... 1-4 Out of Park ...... 2-29 Instrument Panel ...... 2-50 Rear Seat Operation ...... 1-9 Shifting Into Park ...... 2-28 Luggage Carrier ...... 2-52 Reclining Seatbacks ...... 1-8 Signals, Turn and Rear Seat Armrest ...... 2-52 Third Row Seat ...... 1-12 Lane-Change ...... 3-6 Second Row Center Second Row Center Spare Tire Console ...... 2-50 Console ...... 2-50 Compact ...... 5-83 Storing the Tire Sealant and Secondary Latch System ...... 5-78 Installing ...... 5-74 Compressor Kit ...... 5-70 Securing a Child Restraint Removing ...... 5-71 Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, Rear Seat Position ...... 1-43 Storing ...... 5-80 or Snow ...... 4-17 Right Front Seat Position .... 1-45 Specifications and Sun Visors ...... 2-16 Security Light ...... 3-43 Capacities ...... 5-98 Sunroof ...... 2-54 Service ...... 5-3 Speedometer ...... 3-32 Accessories and StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ..... 3-37 Modifications ...... 5-3 StabiliTrak® System ...... 4-5 T Adding Equipment to the Start Vehicle, Remote ...... 2-6 Tachometer ...... 3-32 Outside of the Vehicle ..... 5-5 Starting the Engine ...... 2-22 Taillamps Doing Your Own Work ...... 5-4 Steering ...... 4-8 Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Engine Soon Lamp ...... 3-39 Steering Wheel Controls, Sidemarker Lamps ...... 5-36 Publications Ordering Audio ...... 3-125 Telescopic Wheel ...... 3-6 Information ...... 7-15 Steering Wheel, Tilt and Text Telephone (TTY) Users ..... 7-5 Scheduling Appointments ..... 7-9 Telescopic ...... 3-6 INDEX i-11

Theft-Deterrent Feature ...... 3-125 Tires (cont.) Towing Theft-Deterrent Systems ...... 2-16 Inspection and Rotation ..... 5-52 Recreational Vehicle ...... 4-22 Content Theft-Deterrent ..... 2-16 Installing the Spare Tire ..... 5-74 Towing a Trailer ...... 4-26 PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Pressure Monitor Your Vehicle ...... 4-22 Immobilizer ...... 2-18 Operation ...... 5-48 Traction PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Pressure Monitor System .... 5-46 StabiliTrak® System ...... 4-5 Immobilizer Operation ..... 2-18 Removing the Flat Tire ...... 5-74 Transmission Third-Row Seats ...... 1-12 Removing the Spare Tire Fluid, Automatic ...... 5-18 Tilt Wheel ...... 3-6 and Tools ...... 5-71 Transmission Operation, Time, Setting ...... 3-74 Sealant and Automatic ...... 2-24 Tire Compressor Kit ...... 5-62 Transportation, Courtesy ...... 7-9 Pressure Light ...... 3-39 Secondary Latch System .... 5-78 Turn and Lane-Change Tire Sealant and Sidewall Labeling ...... 5-40 Signals ...... 3-6 Compressor Kit ...... 5-70 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire Turn Signal/Multifunction Tires ...... 5-39 and Tools ...... 5-80 Lever ...... 3-6 Aluminum or Terminology and Chrome-Plated Wheels, Deﬁnitions ...... 5-42 Cleaning ...... 5-89 Uniform Tire Quality U Buying New Tires ...... 5-54 Grading ...... 5-57 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Chains ...... 5-60 Wheel Alignment and Assist (URPA) ...... 2-34 Changing a Flat Tire ...... 5-70 Tire Balance ...... 5-58 Uniform Tire Quality Cleaning ...... 5-90 Wheel Replacement ...... 5-59 Grading ...... 5-57 Compact Spare ...... 5-83 When It Is Time for Universal Home Remote Different Size ...... 5-56 New Tires ...... 5-54 System ...... 2-45 If a Tire Goes Flat ...... 5-61 Tow/Haul Mode ...... 2-26 Operation ...... 2-46 Inﬂation - Tire Pressure ..... 5-45 Tow/Haul Mode Light ...... 3-43 i-12 INDEX

V W Windshield (cont.) Wiper Blade Vehicle Warning Lights, Gages, Replacement ...... 5-38 Control ...... 4-3 and Indicators ...... 3-30 Wiper Fuses ...... 5-92 Loading ...... 4-18 Warnings Wipers ...... 3-7 Running While Parked ...... 2-30 DIC Warnings and Winter Driving ...... 4-15 Symbols ...... iii Messages ...... 3-56 Wipers Vehicle Customization, DIC ..... 3-65 Hazard Warning Flashers ..... 3-5 Rear Washer ...... 3-9 Vehicle Data Recording Safety and Symbols ...... iii Wiring, High Voltage and Privacy ...... 7-16 Wheels Devices ...... 5-91 Vehicle Data Recording, Alignment and Tire Radio Frequency (RFID) ..... 7-18 Balance ...... 5-58 Vehicle Identiﬁcation Different Size ...... 5-56 X Number (VIN) ...... 5-91 Replacement ...... 5-59 XM Radio Messages ...... 3-102 Service Parts When It Is Time for Identiﬁcation Label ...... 5-91 New Tires ...... 5-54 Vehicle, Remote Start ...... 2-6 Where to Put the Child Y Ventilation Adjustment ...... 3-27 Restraint ...... 1-35 Your Vehicle and the Visors ...... 2-16 Windows ...... 2-14 Environment ...... 6-1 Voltage Devices, and Power ...... 2-14 Wiring ...... 5-91 Windshield Voltmeter Gage ...... 3-35 Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning ...... 5-88 Washer ...... 3-8 Washer Fluid ...... 5-26